AC 55-3 AC60-3 Training Manual V 1.1

Demag AC55-3 & AC60-3
Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

AC 55-3
PRELIMINARY
All Terrain Crane

55 t Capacity class

Contents AC 55-3
Inhalt · Contenu · Indice · Contenido · Indice · Содержание
Page · Seite · Page · Pagina · Página · Página · Страница:
Dimensions · Abmessungen · Encombrement · Dimensioni · Dimensiones · Dimensões · Pазмеры. . ............................. 4

Counterweight · Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Contrappeso · Contrapeso · Contrapeso · Противовес....................... 5
Specifications · Technische Daten · Caractéristiques · Dati tecnici · Datos técnicos ·
Especificações · Технические характеристики............................................................................................................... 6
Equipment · Einrichtungen · Équipement · Equipaggiamento · Equipamiento · Equipamento · Оборудование. . ......... 7
HA
Main boom · Hauptausleger · Flèche principale · Braccio base · Pluma principal ·
Lança principal · Главная стрела............................................................................................................... 8
MS
Runner · Montagespitze · Potence · Runner · Runner · Ponta de montagem (Runner) ·
Шкив......................................................................................................................................................... 14
Technical description · Technische Beschreibung · Descriptif technique · Descrizione tecnica ·

Descripción técnica · Descrição técnica · Техническое описание. . .................................................................................. 22
02

Key AC 55-3
Zeichenerklärung · Légende · Leggenda · Leyenda · Legenda ·
Условные обозначения
Counterweight · Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Working speeds · Arbeitsgeschwindigkeiten ·

Contrappeso · Contrapeso · Contrapeso · Vitesses opérationnelles · Velocità di lavoro ·
Противовес Velocidades de trabajo · Velocidades de trabalho ·
Рабочие скорости
Lifting capacities on outriggers · Tragfähigkeiten,
abgestützt · Capacités de levage sur stabilisateurs · Max. line pull · Max. Seilzug · Traction par câble max. ·
Portate su stabilizzatori · Capacidad de elevación Tiro max · Tensión máx. de cable · Tração máx. por
sobre apoyos · Capacidades de içamento sobre cabo · Максимальная грузоподъемность троса
estabilizadores · Грузоподъемность с выдвинутыми
опорами · 360° Rope diameter · Seildurchmesser · Diamètre du câble ·
Diametro della fune · Diámetro cable · Diâmetro do
Radius · Ausladung · Portée · Sbraccio · Radio · cabo · Диаметр троса
Raio de operação · Рабочий радиус
Rope length · Seillänge · Longueur de câble ·
Lunghezza fune · Longitud cable · Compr. cabo ·
Main boom · Hauptausleger · Flèche principale ·
Длина троса
Braccio base · Pluma principal · Lança principal ·
Главная стрела Hook block (capacity - sheaves - rope diameter) ·
Unterflasche (Tragfähigkeit - Rollen-Seildurchmesser) ·
Runner · Montagespitze · Potence · Runner · Runner · Crochet-moufle (capacité de charge-poulies-diamètre
Ponta de montagem (Runner) · Шкив du câble) · Bozello (portata - pulegge- diametro fune) ·
Gancho (capacidad de carga- poleas - diametro de
Max. axle loads · Max. Achslasten · Poids d’essieux cable) · Moitão (capacidade - polias-diâmetro dos
max. · Pesi sugli assi max. · Carga por eje máx. · cabos) · Крюкоблок (грузоподъемность - шкивы-
Carga máxima por eixo · Максимальная нагрузка диаметр троса)
на ось
Number of lines · Einscherung · Nombre de brins ·
Mechanism · Antrieb · Mécanisme · Funzioni · No max avvolgim. · Reenvíos máx. · Número de cabos ·
Mecanismos · Mecanismo · Механизм Кратность троса
Tires · Bereifung · Pneumatiques · Pneumatici · Possible load of hook block · Mögliche Traglast
Neumáticos · Pneus · Шины Unterflasche · Charge possible de crochet-moufle ·
Portata possibile di bozzello · Carga permitida de
Hook block · Unterflasche · Crochet-moufle · gancho · Carga possível do moitão · Допустимая
Bozzello · Gancho · Moitão · Крюкоблок нагрузка на крюкоблок
Hoist · Hubwerk · Treuil de levage · Agano · Weight of hook block · Gewicht Unterflasche ·
Cabrestante · Guincho · подъем Poids de crochet-moufle · Peso di bozello ·
Peso de gancho · Peso do moitão · Вес крюкоблока
Dolly · Nachläufer · Remorque · Vagoni · Tráiler ·
Plataforma · Грузовая тележка
Distance head sheave axle – hook ground ·
Abstand Kopfrollenachse – Hakengrund · Distance
Travel speed · Fahrgeschwindigkeit · Vitesse sur route · entre l’axe de la poulie de tête et le fond du crochet ·
Velocità su strada · Velocidad en carretera · Distanza asse puleggia da testa – zona di ancoraggio
Velocidade em estrada · Скорость движения del gancio · Distancia eje de la polea de cabeza –
fondo del gancho · Distância entre o eixo da polia
Gradeability – road · Steigfähigkeit – Straße · da cabeça e o fundo do gancho · Расстояние от оси
Capacité sur rampes – route · Pendenza superabile – шкива вершины до низа крюка
su strada · Pendiente franqueable – carretera ·
Capacidade de rampa – rodovia · Number of sheaves in boom head · Anzahl der Rollen
im Auslegerkopf · Nombre de poulies au niveau de
Способность преодолевать подъёмы – дорога
la tête de flèche · Numero di pulegge nella testa
del braccio · Total de poleas en el cabezal de flecha ·
Gradeability – off road · Steigfähigkeit – Gelände ·
Número de polias na cabeça da lança ·
Capacité sur rampes – tous terrains · Pendenza
Количество шкивов вершины стрелы
superabile – fuoristrada · Pendiente franqueable –
campo a través · Capacidade de rampa – fora da Supporting force · Stützkraft · Force de calage ·
estrada · Способность преодолевать подъемы – Carico degli stabilizzatori · Fuerza de apoyo ·
бездорожье Força de sustentação · Опорное усилие
Slewing · Drehwerk · Orientation · Rotazione · Length of stroke (support cylinders) · Stützhub ·
Unidad de giro · Giro · Поворот Longueur d’appui · Lunghezza corsa (cilindri di
stabilizzazone) · Longitud de carrera (cilindros de
Boom telescoping · Teleskopieren · Télescopage · soporte) · Distância de curso (cilindros de apoio) ·
Funzione telescopica · Despliegue telescópico · Длина хода (цилиндры опор)
Telescópica · Выдвижение/втягивание стрелы
Boom elevation · Ausleger-Winkelstellung ·

Relevage de flèche · Angolazione braccio ·
Elevación de pluma · Elevação da lança ·
Угол подъема стрелы
03

Dimensions AC 55-3
Abmessungen · Encombrement · Dimensioni · Dimensiones ·
Dimensões · Размеры
(…) E
quipped with polyamide outrigger pads · mit PA Stützteller ausgestattet · Equipé de semelles de calage en polyamide ·
Con piastre di appoggio degli stabilizzatori in poliammide · Equipada con apoyos estabilizadores de poliamida ·
Equipado com sapatas de poliamida nos estabilizadores · с подушками опор из полиамида
* 385/95R25
** 445/95R25
(2) s teering mode 2 · Lenkfunktion 2 · mode de direction 2 · modalità di sterzata 2 · modo de conducción 2 · modo de manobra 2 ·
Режим поворота 2
(3) steering mode 3* · Lenkfunktion 3* · mode de direction 3* · modalità di sterzata 3* · modo de conducción 3* · modo de manobra 3* ·
Режим поворота 3*
see page 6 · siehe Seite 6 · voir page 6 · vedere a pagina 6 · Véase p. 6 · ver página 6 · см. на стр. 6
04

Counterweight AC 55-3
Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Contrappeso · Contrapeso ·
Contrapeso · противовес
Parts · Teile · Pièces · Pezzi · Piezas · Peças · Детали
When using H2, counterweight „c“

is not applicable
Wenn H2 verwendet wird, entfällt Gegen-
gewicht „c“
Avec H2, contrepoids «c» non concerné
H2 è incompatibile con il contrappeso „c“
Al usar H2 no es aplicable el contrapeso „c“
Usando o H2, o contrapeso „c“ não se
aplica
При использовании H2 противовес „c“
не применяется
Configurations · Konfigurationen · Configurations · Configurazioni ·

Configuraciones · Configurações · Варианты конфигурации
a 3,0 t b 1,9 t c 1,1 t
0t
1,1 t X
1,9 t X
3,0 t X X
3,0 t X
4,1 t X X
4,9 t X X
6,0 t X X X
05

Specifications AC 55-3
Technische Daten · Caractéristiques · Dati tecnici ·
Datos técnicos · Especificações · Технические характеристики
Total
< 9,1 t on request · auf Anfrage · sur demande · su richiesta · bajo demanda · a pedido · по заявке X
10 t 30 t 6x4x6 385/95R25 – 1,1 t –
12 t 36 t 6x4x6 445/95R25 Vario 50-3-18 6,0 t –
1 Highway > 45 km/h · Landstraße > 45 km/h · Route > 45 km/h · Strade extraurbane > 45 km/h · Carretera > 45 km/h ·
Rodovia > 45 km/h · Дорога > 45 км/ч
City < 45 km/h · Stadt < 45 km/h · Ville < 45 km/h · Città < 45 km/h · Ciudad < 45 km/h · Urbano < 45 km/h ·
2
Город < 45 км/ч
Minimum turning radius < 20 km/h · Minimaler Kurvenradius < 20 km/h · Rayon de courbure minimum < 20 km/h ·
3* Raggio minimo di sterzatura < 20 km/h · Radio mínimo de giro < 20 km/h · Raio mínimo de giro < 20 km/h ·
Минимальный радиус поворота < 20 км/ч
4* Off-wall · Wand-weg · Hors mur · Marcia laterale · Desempotrado · Longe da parede · от стены
Crab steer mode · Hundegang · Marche en crabe · Marcia a granchio · Marcha cangrejo · Modo de translação lateral ·
5*
Режим поворота на всех колесах «крабовый ход»
All wheel steering · Allradlenkung · Transmission intégrale · Sterzatura integrale · Dirección en todas las ruedas ·
6*
Todas as rodas exterçantes · Рулевое управление со всеми управляемыми колесами
*must be activated · muss angewählt werden · activation nécessaire · deve essere attivato · debe activarse · precisa ser ativado · должно быть активировано
32 t 40 t kg
85 km/h1)
640 mm 700 mm
1) Depending on tire type, size and country specific legislation · Abhängig 1 16,1 18-0-18 3 170 kg 1,00 m
von Reifentyp, Reifengröße sowie länderspezifischer Gesetzgebung · En
fonction du type et de la taille de pneus ainsi que de la législation locale ·
In base al tipo e alla dimensione dei pneumatici, nonché alle normative
locali applicabili · Según tipo de neumático, tamaño y legislación del paía ·
Dependendo do tipo e t amanho do pneu e da legislação específica do país · 2 12,1 20-1-18 3 300 kg 1,80 m
Зависит от типа шин, размера и требований законодательства страны
3 23,9 50-3-18 3 550 kg 1,80 m

385/95 R 25 445 /95 R 25 525 /80 R 25
14.00 R 25 16.00 R 25 20.50 R 25
4 29,8 50-3-18 3 550 kg 1,80 m
59 % 53 % 53 %
5 35,6 50-3-18 3 550 kg 1,80 m
> 80 % > 80 % > 80 %
120 m/min 60,2 kN 18 mm 200 m
120 m/min 60,2 kN 18 mm 200 m
1,80 min-1
ca. 490 s
(10,3-50 m)
ca. 50 s
(-5° - 82°)
06

Equipment AC 55-3
Einrichtungen · Équipement · Equipaggiamento · Equipamiento ·
Equipamento · Oборудование
MS
195 kg
* 385/95R25
** 445/95R25
07

HA AC 55-3
08

HA AC 55-3
6,0 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m* 10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
m t t t t t t t t t t t t t m
3 55,0** - - - - - - - - - - - - 3
3 35,6 35,6 35,6 35,6 33,3 27,4 - - - - - - - 3
3,5 35,6 35,6 35,6 35,6 31,5 26,6 - - - - - - - 3,5
4 35,6 35,6 35,6 34,4 29,7 25,8 21,4 - - - - - - 4
4,5 35,6 34,9 34,2 32,7 28,2 24,5 20,5 - - - - - - 4,5
5 33,1 32,0 32,1 31,0 26,9 23,1 20,2 15,8 - - - - - 5
6 26,7 26,6 26,8 24,8 23,8 20,6 19,0 14,8 12,0 - - - - 6
7 19,9 19,9 20,6 19,9 19,3 18,7 17,5 13,5 11,7 9,4 - - - 7
8 - - 16,3 16,4 16,1 15,9 14,9 12,5 11,2 9,2 7,3 - - 8
9 - - 13,5 13,9 13,9 13,7 12,8 11,8 10,3 9,1 7,2 5,9 - 9
10 - - 11,5 11,8 11,7 11,6 11,1 11,1 9,4 8,7 7,1 5,8 4,3 10
12 - - - 8,8 8,8 8,7 8,9 8,6 7,9 7,7 6,9 5,6 4,1 12
14 - - - 6,9 6,9 7,2 7,0 6,7 6,8 6,2 6,2 5,5 4,0 14
16 - - - - 5,9 5,8 5,6 5,6 5,5 5,2 5,2 5,1 3,8 16
18 - - - - 4,9 4,8 4,7 4,8 4,5 4,5 4,4 4,2 3,7 18
20 - - - - - 4,1 4,1 4,0 3,8 3,9 3,7 3,5 3,3 20
22 - - - - - - 3,6 3,4 3,4 3,3 3,1 3,0 2,7 22
24 - - - - - - 3,1 2,9 2,9 2,8 2,5 2,6 2,2 24
26 - - - - - - - 2,5 2,4 2,3 2,2 2,1 1,9 26
28 - - - - - - - 2,3 2,1 2,0 2,0 1,8 1,5 28
30 - - - - - - - - 1,8 1,7 1,7 1,5 1,3 30
32 - - - - - - - - 1,5 1,4 1,4 1,2 1,0 32
34 - - - - - - - - - 1,2 1,2 1,0 0,8 34
36 - - - - - - - - - - 1,0 0,8 - 36
38 - - - - - - - - - - 0,8 - - 38
1) 15,2 15,2 9,5 6,4 4,8 3,7 2,8 2,1 1,5 1,0 0,7 - - 1)
4,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
m t t t t t t t t t t t t m
3 35,6 35,6 35,6 33,3 27,4 - - - - - - - 3
4 35,6 35,6 34,4 29,7 25,8 21,4 - - - - - - 4
5 31,2 31,5 29,4 26,9 23,1 20,2 15,8 - - - - - 5
6 24,2 24,8 22,5 21,6 20,6 19,0 14,8 12,0 - - - - 6
7 17,9 18,7 18,7 17,5 17,2 15,9 13,5 11,7 9,4 - - - 7
8 - 14,7 15,4 15,3 14,4 13,4 12,5 11,2 9,2 7,3 - - 8
9 - 12,3 12,6 12,6 12,4 11,5 11,4 10,3 9,1 7,2 5,9 - 9
10 - 10,3 10,6 10,6 10,4 10,5 10,0 9,0 8,7 7,1 5,8 4,3 10
12 - - 7,9 7,9 8,2 8,0 7,7 7,7 7,1 6,8 5,6 4,1 12
14 - - 6,2 6,5 6,4 6,2 6,3 6,1 5,8 5,9 5,5 4,0 14
16 - - - 5,3 5,2 5,1 5,1 4,9 4,9 4,8 4,4 3,8 16
18 - - - 4,4 4,4 4,4 4,2 4,2 4,1 3,9 3,8 3,3 18
20 - - - - 3,7 3,7 3,5 3,5 3,4 3,2 3,1 2,7 20
22 - - - - - 3,1 3,1 2,9 2,8 2,8 2,6 2,2 22
24 - - - - - 2,7 2,6 2,5 2,3 2,3 2,1 1,8 24
26 - - - - - - 2,2 2,1 1,9 2,0 1,8 1,4 26
28 - - - - - - 1,9 1,7 1,6 1,6 1,4 1,2 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,5 1,3 1,3 1,2 0,9 30
32 - - - - - - - 1,2 1,1 1,1 0,9 0,7 32
34 - - - - - - - - 0,9 0,9 0,7 - 34
36 - - - - - - - - - 0,7 - - 36
1) 14,9 8,5 5,9 4,3 3,2 2,4 1,8 1,2 0,8 - - - 1)
1) Capacities with horizontal boom · Traglast horizontal · Charges avec flèche horizontale · Capacità con braccio orizzontale ·
Capacidad con pluma horizontal · Capacidade com lança horizontal · Грузоподъемность с горизонтальной стрелой
* over rear · nach hinten · sur l’arrière · sul retro · hacia atrás · para trás · сзади
** Capacity class · Tragfähigkeitsklasse · Classe de capacité · Classe di portata · Clase de capacidad · Classe de capacidade ·
Класс грузоподъемности
09

HA AC 55-3
3,0 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 35,6 35,6 35,6 33,3 27,4 - - - - - - - 3
4 35,6 35,6 34,4 29,7 25,8 21,4 - - - - - - 4
5 30,8 30,4 27,7 26,2 23,1 20,2 15,8 - - - - - 5
6 22,7 23,3 21,6 20,3 19,7 18,2 14,8 12,0 - - - - 6
7 16,8 17,5 17,6 17,0 16,2 15,0 13,5 11,7 9,4 - - - 7
8 - 14,1 14,5 14,4 13,6 12,6 12,4 11,2 9,2 7,3 - - 8
9 - 11,5 11,8 11,8 11,6 11,1 10,7 9,7 9,1 7,2 5,9 - 9
10 - 9,7 9,9 9,9 9,7 10,0 9,3 8,8 8,1 7,1 5,8 4,3 10
12 - - 7,4 7,7 7,7 7,5 7,2 7,2 6,7 6,3 5,6 4,1 12
14 - - 5,9 6,1 6,0 5,8 5,9 5,7 5,6 5,4 5,1 4,0 14
16 - - - 4,9 4,9 4,9 4,8 4,7 4,6 4,3 4,2 3,7 16
18 - - - 4,0 4,1 4,1 3,9 3,9 3,8 3,6 3,4 3,0 18
20 - - - - 3,4 3,4 3,4 3,2 3,1 3,1 2,8 2,4 20
22 - - - - - 2,9 2,8 2,7 2,5 2,6 2,3 1,9 22
24 - - - - - 2,4 2,4 2,2 2,1 2,1 1,9 1,5 24
26 - - - - - - 2,0 1,8 1,7 1,7 1,5 1,2 26
28 - - - - - - 1,7 1,5 1,4 1,4 1,2 0,9 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,3 1,2 1,2 1,0 0,7 30
32 - - - - - - - 1,1 0,9 0,9 0,7 - 32
34 - - - - - - - - 0,7 0,7 - - 34
1) 13,9 8,0 5,5 4,0 3,0 2,2 1,6 1,1 - - - - 1)
1,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 35,6 35,6 35,6 33,3 27,4 - - - - - - - 3
4 35,6 35,6 34,4 29,7 25,8 21,4 - - - - - - 4
5 29,6 27,7 24,8 23,5 22,4 20,2 15,8 - - - - - 5
6 20,2 20,9 19,6 18,9 17,7 16,3 14,8 12,0 - - - - 6
7 14,9 15,6 16,3 15,4 14,4 13,3 13,0 11,7 9,4 - - - 7
8 - 12,6 12,9 12,9 12,1 11,9 11,0 10,2 9,2 7,3 - - 8
9 - 10,2 10,5 10,5 10,4 10,2 9,5 9,3 8,3 7,2 5,9 - 9
10 - 8,6 8,8 8,9 9,2 8,9 8,2 8,1 7,5 7,0 5,8 4,3 10
12 - - 6,7 6,9 6,8 6,6 6,7 6,3 6,3 5,8 5,5 4,1 12
14 - - 5,2 5,3 5,4 5,4 5,2 5,2 5,1 4,7 4,5 3,9 14
16 - - - 4,3 4,3 4,3 4,3 4,1 4,0 3,9 3,5 3,0 16
18 - - - 3,5 3,6 3,5 3,5 3,3 3,2 3,1 2,8 2,3 18
20 - - - - 3,0 2,9 2,9 2,7 2,6 2,6 2,2 1,8 20
22 - - - - - 2,4 2,4 2,2 2,1 2,1 1,8 1,4 22
24 - - - - - 2,0 2,0 1,8 1,7 1,7 1,4 1,0 24
26 - - - - - - 1,6 1,5 1,3 1,3 1,1 0,7 26
28 - - - - - - 1,3 1,2 1,0 1,1 0,8 - 28
30 - - - - - - - 0,9 0,8 0,8 - - 30
32 - - - - - - - 0,7 - - - - 32
1) 12,3 7,0 4,8 3,4 2,5 1,8 1,3 0,7 - - - - 1)
1) Capacities
with horizontal boom · Traglast horizontal · Charges avec flèche horizontale · Capacità con braccio orizzontale ·
10

HA AC 55-3
6,0 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 35,6 35,6 35,6 33,3 27,4 - - - - - - - 3
4 32,7 30,1 27,3 24,7 23,2 21,0 - - - - - - 4
5 21,4 22,1 20,9 19,6 18,0 16,4 15,1 - - - - - 5
6 15,1 16,1 16,4 15,7 14,5 13,8 13,0 11,6 - - - - 6
7 11,4 12,3 12,6 12,6 12,1 11,8 10,9 10,0 9,3 - - - 7
8 - 9,8 10,1 10,2 10,4 10,1 9,7 9,0 8,3 7,3 - - 8
9 - 8,1 8,4 8,7 8,6 8,4 8,5 7,9 7,6 6,7 5,9 - 9
10 - 6,8 7,2 7,4 7,3 7,4 7,3 7,0 6,8 6,3 5,8 4,3 10
12 - - 5,4 5,5 5,6 5,6 5,5 5,4 5,3 5,2 4,8 4,1 12
14 - - 4,2 4,3 4,4 4,4 4,3 4,2 4,1 4,1 3,9 3,5 14
16 - - - 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,4 3,3 3,3 3,1 2,7 16
18 - - - 2,9 2,9 2,9 2,8 2,7 2,6 2,6 2,5 2,1 18
20 - - - - 2,4 2,4 2,3 2,2 2,1 2,1 2,0 1,6 20
22 - - - - - 2,0 2,0 1,8 1,7 1,7 1,6 1,2 22
24 - - - - - 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,4 1,2 0,9 24
26 - - - - - - 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,2 1,0 - 26
28 - - - - - - 1,2 1,0 0,9 0,9 0,7 - 28
30 - - - - - - - 0,8 0,7 0,7 - - 30
1) 9,5 5,6 3,9 2,8 2,1 1,5 1,1 - - - - - 1)
4,1 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 35,6 35,6 34,9 31,3 27,4 - - - - - - - 3
4 29,4 26,9 24,4 22,9 20,7 18,7 - - - - - - 4
5 18,9 19,6 18,8 17,4 16,0 14,8 13,9 - - - - - 5
6 13,3 14,3 14,6 13,9 13,2 12,5 11,5 10,5 - - - - 6
7 10,0 10,9 11,2 11,1 11,2 10,4 10,1 9,3 8,5 - - - 7
8 - 8,7 9,1 9,3 9,2 9,0 8,6 8,2 7,7 6,8 - - 8
9 - 7,1 7,5 7,7 7,8 7,7 7,5 7,2 6,7 6,2 5,8 - 9
10 - 5,9 6,4 6,5 6,6 6,5 6,5 6,3 5,9 5,5 5,0 4,3 10
12 - - 4,7 4,8 4,9 4,9 4,8 4,7 4,6 4,5 4,1 3,7 12
14 - - 3,7 3,7 3,8 3,8 3,8 3,6 3,5 3,5 3,3 2,8 14
16 - - - 3,0 3,0 3,0 3,0 2,9 2,8 2,8 2,5 2,0 16
18 - - - 2,4 2,5 2,4 2,4 2,3 2,2 2,2 1,9 1,5 18
20 - - - - 2,0 2,0 2,0 1,8 1,7 1,8 1,5 1,1 20
22 - - - - - 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,4 1,1 0,7 22
24 - - - - - 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1 1,1 0,8 - 24
26 - - - - - - 1,1 1,0 0,8 0,9 - - 26
28 - - - - - - 0,9 0,7 - - - - 28
1) 8,3 4,9 3,3 2,4 1,7 1,2 0,8 - - - - - 1)
1) Capacities
with horizontal boom · Traglast horizontal · Charges avec flèche horizontale · Capacità con braccio orizzontale ·
11

HA AC 55-3
3,0 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 35,6 35,6 32,5 29,2 25,5 - - - - - - - 3
4 27,3 25,0 23,1 21,3 19,3 17,6 - - - - - - 4
5 17,5 18,6 17,5 16,2 14,8 14,3 13,0 - - - - - 5
6 12,2 13,2 13,6 12,9 12,5 11,6 11,1 10,2 - - - - 6
7 9,1 10,0 10,3 10,7 10,4 9,9 9,3 8,8 8,1 - - - 7
8 - 8,0 8,4 8,6 8,6 8,5 7,9 7,6 7,1 6,6 - - 8
9 - 6,5 7,0 7,1 7,2 7,1 7,0 6,6 6,2 5,7 5,2 - 9
10 - 5,4 5,8 6,0 6,1 6,0 6,0 5,7 5,4 5,2 4,8 4,3 10
12 - - 4,3 4,4 4,5 4,5 4,4 4,3 4,2 4,1 3,7 3,3 12
14 - - 3,3 3,4 3,5 3,5 3,4 3,3 3,2 3,2 2,8 2,3 14
16 - - - 2,7 2,8 2,7 2,7 2,6 2,5 2,5 2,1 1,7 16
18 - - - 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,0 1,9 1,9 1,6 1,2 18
20 - - - - 1,8 1,8 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,5 1,2 0,8 20
22 - - - - - 1,4 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1 0,8 - 22
24 - - - - - 1,2 1,1 1,0 0,9 0,9 - - 24
26 - - - - - - 0,9 0,8 - - - - 26
28 - - - - - - 0,7 - - - - - 28
1) 7,6 4,4 3,0 2,1 1,5 1,1 - - - - - - 1)
1,1 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 35,6 33,6 29,3 26,6 23,4 - - - - - - - 3
4 23,6 21,8 20,5 18,6 16,8 15,5 - - - - - - 4
5 15,1 16,2 15,2 14,1 13,5 12,4 11,6 - - - - - 5
6 10,4 11,4 11,8 11,6 10,9 10,4 9,6 9,0 - - - - 6
7 7,7 8,6 9,2 9,3 9,2 8,6 8,2 7,6 7,1 - - - 7
8 - 6,8 7,3 7,4 7,5 7,3 7,0 6,5 6,0 5,8 - - 8
9 - 5,5 6,0 6,1 6,2 6,2 6,0 5,6 5,2 5,0 4,6 - 9
10 - 4,6 5,0 5,1 5,2 5,2 5,1 4,8 4,5 4,3 4,0 3,5 10
12 - - 3,6 3,7 3,8 3,8 3,7 3,6 3,4 3,3 2,9 2,4 12
14 - - 2,7 2,8 2,9 2,9 2,8 2,7 2,6 2,5 2,1 1,6 14
16 - - - 2,2 2,3 2,2 2,2 2,1 2,0 1,8 1,5 1,0 16
18 - - - 1,7 1,8 1,8 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,0 - 18
20 - - - - 1,4 1,4 1,4 1,2 1,1 1,0 - - 20
22 - - - - - 1,1 1,1 0,9 0,8 - - - 22
24 - - - - - 0,9 0,8 - - - - - 24
1) 6,4 3,7 2,5 1,7 1,2 0,7 - - - - - - 1)
6,0 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 26,7 24,4 22,7 20,5 18,5 - - - - - - - 3
4 17,8 17,7 16,6 15,5 14,6 13,4 - - - - - - 4
5 12,0 13,0 12,9 12,5 11,8 11,1 10,3 - - - - - 5
6 8,8 9,7 10,2 10,2 9,8 9,2 8,7 8,1 - - - - 6
7 6,8 7,6 8,0 8,2 8,2 7,8 7,4 6,9 6,4 - - - 7
8 - 6,1 6,5 6,7 6,8 6,7 6,3 5,9 5,5 5,3 - - 8
9 - 5,1 5,5 5,6 5,7 5,6 5,5 5,1 4,8 4,6 4,2 - 9
10 - 4,2 4,6 4,7 4,8 4,8 4,8 4,5 4,2 4,0 3,7 3,3 10
12 - - 3,4 3,5 3,6 3,6 3,5 3,4 3,2 3,1 2,8 2,3 12
14 - - 2,6 2,7 2,8 2,8 2,7 2,6 2,5 2,4 2,0 1,6 14
16 - - - 2,1 2,2 2,2 2,1 2,0 1,9 1,8 1,5 1,0 16
18 - - - 1,7 1,8 1,7 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,0 - 18
20 - - - - 1,4 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1 1,0 - - 20
22 - - - - - 1,1 1,1 0,9 0,8 0,7 - - 22
24 - - - - - 0,9 0,8 - - - - - 24
1) 5,7 3,5 2,4 1,7 1,2 0,7 - - - - - - 1)
12

HA AC 55-3
4,1 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 23,4 21,9 20,0 18,1 16,9 - - - - - - - 3
4 15,5 15,5 14,5 13,9 13,0 12,1 - - - - - - 4
5 10,4 11,3 11,5 10,9 10,4 9,7 9,1 - - - - - 5
6 7,5 8,4 8,9 8,9 8,5 8,0 7,5 7,0 - - - - 6
7 5,7 6,5 7,0 7,1 7,1 6,7 6,4 5,9 5,5 - - - 7
8 - 5,2 5,7 5,8 5,9 5,7 5,4 5,0 4,7 4,5 - - 8
9 - 4,3 4,7 4,8 4,9 4,9 4,7 4,3 4,0 3,9 3,5 - 9
10 - 3,6 3,9 4,0 4,1 4,1 4,1 3,8 3,5 3,4 3,0 2,5 10
12 - - 2,9 3,0 3,0 3,0 3,0 2,9 2,6 2,5 2,1 1,6 12
14 - - 2,2 2,3 2,3 2,3 2,3 2,1 2,0 1,8 1,4 1,0 14
16 - - - 1,7 1,8 1,8 1,7 1,6 1,4 1,3 0,9 - 16
18 - - - 1,4 1,4 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,0 0,9 - - 18
20 - - - - 1,1 1,1 1,0 0,9 - - - - 20
22 - - - - - 0,8 0,7 - - - - - 22
1) 4,8 2,9 2,0 1,3 0,9 - - - - - - - 1)
3,0 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 21,5 20,1 18,4 17,0 15,6 - - - - - - - 3
4 14,1 14,2 13,6 12,8 12,0 11,1 - - - - - - 4
5 9,4 10,4 10,5 10,0 9,5 8,9 8,3 - - - - - 5
6 6,8 7,6 8,1 8,1 7,8 7,3 6,9 6,3 - - - - 6
7 5,1 5,9 6,4 6,5 6,5 6,1 5,8 5,3 4,9 - - - 7
8 - 4,7 5,1 5,3 5,3 5,2 4,9 4,5 4,2 4,0 - - 8
9 - 3,8 4,2 4,3 4,4 4,4 4,2 3,9 3,6 3,4 3,1 - 9
10 - 3,2 3,5 3,6 3,7 3,7 3,6 3,3 3,1 3,0 2,6 2,0 10
12 - - 2,6 2,7 2,7 2,7 2,7 2,5 2,3 2,1 1,7 1,2 12
14 - - 1,9 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 1,9 1,6 1,5 1,1 - 14
16 - - - 1,5 1,6 1,5 1,5 1,4 1,1 1,0 - - 16
18 - - - 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,1 1,0 0,7 - - - 18
20 - - - - 0,9 0,9 0,8 - - - - - 20
1) 4,2 2,5 1,7 1,1 0,7 - - - - - - - 1)
1,1 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 18,1 17,2 16,1 14,7 13,6 - - - - - - - 3
4 11,8 12,0 11,6 10,9 10,2 9,4 - - - - - - 4
5 7,8 8,7 8,9 8,5 8,0 7,5 7,0 - - - - - 5
6 5,5 6,4 6,9 6,8 6,5 6,1 5,7 5,2 - - - - 6
7 4,1 4,9 5,3 5,5 5,4 5,1 4,8 4,3 4,0 - - - 7
8 - 3,8 4,2 4,4 4,5 4,3 4,0 3,6 3,3 3,2 - - 8
9 - 3,1 3,5 3,6 3,7 3,6 3,4 3,1 2,8 2,7 2,2 - 9
10 - 2,5 2,9 3,0 3,0 3,0 2,9 2,6 2,4 2,2 1,7 - 10
12 - - 2,0 2,1 2,2 2,2 2,1 1,9 1,6 1,4 1,0 - 12
14 - - 1,4 1,5 1,6 1,6 1,5 1,3 1,0 0,9 - - 14
16 - - - 1,1 1,2 1,1 1,1 0,8 - - - - 16
18 - - - 0,8 0,8 0,8 0,8 - - - - - 18
1) 3,3 1,9 1,3 0,7 - - - - - - - - 1)
13

MS AC 55-3
14

MS AC 55-3
6,0 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - - 3
3,5 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - - 3,5
4 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - 4
4,5 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 22,9 17,6 - - - - - - 4,5
5 24,0 24,0 24,0 22,7 21,7 17,3 - - - - - - 5
6 24,0 24,0 23,8 20,6 19,4 16,5 13,9 - - - - - 6
7 20,4 20,8 19,9 18,7 17,3 15,6 12,6 11,0 - - - - 7
8 16,0 16,5 16,1 16,0 14,9 14,6 11,5 10,6 8,5 - - - 8
9 - 13,5 13,6 13,4 13,3 12,6 10,5 10,0 8,4 6,7 - - 9
10 - 11,4 11,4 11,7 11,6 11,0 9,7 9,2 8,2 6,6 5,3 - 10
12 - 8,6 8,8 8,8 8,6 8,3 8,1 7,7 7,5 6,3 5,2 3,7 12
14 - - 6,9 6,9 6,7 6,9 6,6 6,3 6,1 6,0 5,0 3,6 14
16 - - - 5,5 5,7 5,5 5,3 5,4 5,1 4,9 4,8 3,5 16
18 - - - 4,8 4,7 4,6 4,6 4,4 4,2 4,2 3,9 3,3 18
20 - - - - 4,0 3,8 3,8 3,6 3,7 3,5 3,2 3,0 20
22 - - - - 3,4 3,4 3,2 3,2 3,0 2,8 2,8 2,4 22
24 - - - - - 2,9 2,7 2,7 2,5 2,3 2,3 1,9 24
26 - - - - - 2,5 2,3 2,2 2,1 2,1 1,9 1,6 26
28 - - - - - - 2,1 1,9 1,7 1,7 1,5 1,2 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,6 1,4 1,4 1,2 1,0 30
32 - - - - - - - 1,3 1,2 1,2 1,0 0,7 32
34 - - - - - - - - 1,0 0,9 0,7 - 34
36 - - - - - - - - 0,8 0,8 - - 36
1) 13,3 8,2 5,6 4,3 3,2 2,4 1,8 1,2 0,8 - - - 1)
4,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - - 3
4 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - 4
5 24,0 24,0 24,0 22,7 21,7 17,3 - - - - - - 5
6 24,0 24,0 22,4 20,6 19,4 16,5 13,9 - - - - - 6
7 18,4 19,0 18,0 17,4 16,1 15,6 12,6 11,0 - - - - 7
8 14,5 15,0 15,1 14,5 14,1 13,3 11,5 10,6 8,5 - - - 8
9 - 12,2 12,3 12,6 12,2 11,4 10,5 10,0 8,4 6,7 - - 9
10 - 10,2 10,7 10,7 10,5 9,9 9,3 8,9 8,2 6,6 5,3 - 10
12 - 7,7 7,9 7,9 7,7 7,6 7,6 7,1 6,7 6,3 5,2 3,7 12
14 - - 6,2 6,1 6,4 6,2 5,9 6,0 5,7 5,4 5,0 3,6 14
16 - - - 5,2 5,1 4,9 5,0 4,7 4,7 4,5 4,1 3,5 16
18 - - - 4,3 4,2 4,2 4,1 3,9 3,9 3,6 3,5 3,0 18
20 - - - - 3,6 3,5 3,4 3,3 3,2 3,0 2,8 2,4 20
22 - - - - 3,1 3,0 2,9 2,7 2,6 2,6 2,3 1,9 22
24 - - - - - 2,5 2,4 2,2 2,1 2,1 1,9 1,5 24
26 - - - - - 2,1 2,0 1,9 1,7 1,7 1,5 1,1 26
28 - - - - - - 1,7 1,5 1,4 1,4 1,2 0,9 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,3 1,1 1,1 0,9 - 30
32 - - - - - - - 1,0 0,9 0,9 - - 32
1) 11,9 7,3 5,0 3,8 2,9 2,1 1,5 0,9 - - - - 1)
1) Capacitieswith horzontal boom · Traglast horizontal · Charges avec flèche horizontale · Capacità con braccio orizzontale ·
15

MS AC 55-3
3,0 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - - 3
4 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - 4
5 24,0 24,0 24,0 22,7 21,7 17,3 - - - - - - 5
6 23,4 23,0 21,1 20,2 18,6 16,5 13,9 - - - - - 6
7 17,3 17,9 16,9 16,4 15,1 14,8 12,6 11,0 - - - - 7
8 13,5 14,1 14,1 13,6 13,4 12,5 11,5 10,6 8,5 - - - 8
9 - 11,4 11,9 11,9 11,5 10,7 10,0 9,5 8,4 6,7 - - 9
10 - 9,7 10,0 10,0 9,8 9,2 9,0 8,4 8,0 6,6 5,3 - 10
12 - 7,2 7,4 7,4 7,3 7,4 7,1 7,0 6,5 6,1 5,2 3,7 12
14 - - 5,7 5,9 5,9 5,7 5,8 5,5 5,3 5,2 4,8 3,6 14
16 - - - 4,8 4,7 4,8 4,6 4,4 4,5 4,1 3,9 3,4 16
18 - - - 3,9 4,0 3,9 3,8 3,7 3,6 3,4 3,1 2,7 18
20 - - - - 3,3 3,3 3,2 3,0 2,9 2,8 2,5 2,1 20
22 - - - - 2,8 2,7 2,6 2,5 2,3 2,3 2,0 1,6 22
24 - - - - - 2,3 2,2 2,0 1,9 1,9 1,6 1,2 24
26 - - - - - 1,9 1,8 1,6 1,5 1,5 1,3 0,9 26
28 - - - - - - 1,5 1,3 1,2 1,2 1,0 - 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,1 0,9 0,9 0,7 - 30
32 - - - - - - - 0,9 0,7 - - - 32
1) 11,1 6,8 4,7 3,5 2,6 1,9 1,3 0,8 - - - - 1)
1,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - - 3
4 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - 4
5 24,0 24,0 24,0 22,7 21,2 17,3 - - - - - - 5
6 20,9 20,8 18,8 18,1 16,6 16,1 13,9 - - - - - 6
7 15,4 16,0 15,6 14,6 14,3 13,2 12,3 11,0 - - - - 7
8 12,0 12,5 12,9 12,8 12,0 11,0 10,5 9,8 8,5 - - - 8
9 - 10,3 10,6 10,6 10,2 9,5 9,4 8,6 8,1 6,7 - - 9
10 - 8,7 8,9 8,9 8,7 8,5 8,1 7,9 7,3 6,6 5,3 - 10
12 - 6,3 6,5 6,6 6,7 6,5 6,6 6,2 6,0 5,7 5,2 3,7 12
14 - - 5,1 5,3 5,2 5,3 5,1 4,9 4,8 4,4 4,1 3,6 14
16 - - - 4,2 4,2 4,2 4,1 4,0 3,8 3,6 3,2 2,7 16
18 - - - 3,4 3,5 3,4 3,3 3,2 3,0 2,9 2,5 2,0 18
20 - - - - 2,8 2,8 2,7 2,5 2,4 2,3 1,9 1,5 20
22 - - - - 2,3 2,2 2,2 2,0 1,9 1,8 1,5 1,1 22
24 - - - - - 1,8 1,8 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,1 0,7 24
26 - - - - - 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,1 1,1 0,8 - 26
28 - - - - - - 1,2 1,0 0,8 0,8 - - 28
30 - - - - - - - 0,7 - - - - 30
1) 9,8 6,0 4,2 3,0 2,2 1,5 1,0 - - - - - 1)
16

MS AC 55-3
6,0 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - - 3
4 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 21,9 - - - - - - - 4
5 22,1 21,9 20,2 18,5 17,1 16,2 - - - - - - 5
6 15,6 16,1 16,0 15,2 14,4 13,2 12,3 - - - - - 6
7 11,8 12,3 12,7 12,7 11,9 11,2 10,7 9,9 - - - - 7
8 9,3 10,0 10,2 10,2 10,0 9,6 9,1 8,8 7,8 - - - 8
9 - 8,2 8,4 8,4 8,5 8,4 8,1 7,7 7,1 6,6 - - 9
10 - 6,9 7,1 7,3 7,3 7,1 7,2 6,7 6,6 6,1 5,3 - 10
12 - 5,1 5,4 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,3 5,3 5,2 4,8 4,5 3,7 12
14 - - 4,2 4,3 4,3 4,3 4,2 4,1 3,9 3,9 3,7 3,2 14
16 - - - 3,4 3,4 3,4 3,3 3,2 3,1 3,1 2,9 2,4 16
18 - - - 2,8 2,8 2,7 2,7 2,6 2,5 2,4 2,2 1,8 18
20 - - - - 2,3 2,2 2,2 2,1 2,0 2,0 1,7 1,3 20
22 - - - - 1,9 1,9 1,8 1,7 1,6 1,6 1,3 0,9 22
24 - - - - - 1,5 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,2 0,9 - 24
26 - - - - - 1,3 1,2 1,1 1,0 0,9 - - 26
28 - - - - - - 1,0 0,8 0,7 - - - 28
1) 7,7 4,8 3,4 2,4 1,8 1,3 0,8 - - - - - 1)
4,1 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - - 3
4 24,0 24,0 23,6 21,7 19,4 - - - - - - - 4
5 19,6 19,5 18,0 16,5 15,8 14,4 - - - - - - 5
6 13,8 14,3 14,2 13,8 12,7 11,8 11,3 - - - - - 6
7 10,4 11,1 11,3 11,3 10,5 10,3 9,4 9,0 - - - - 7
8 8,2 8,8 9,0 9,0 9,1 8,7 8,5 7,8 7,2 - - - 8
9 - 7,2 7,4 7,7 7,6 7,6 7,3 7,0 6,6 6,1 - - 9
10 - 6,0 6,4 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,3 6,1 5,8 5,3 4,9 - 10
12 - 4,4 4,7 4,8 4,8 4,8 4,7 4,6 4,5 4,3 4,0 3,5 12
14 - - 3,6 3,7 3,7 3,7 3,6 3,5 3,4 3,4 3,0 2,5 14
16 - - - 2,9 3,0 2,9 2,8 2,7 2,6 2,6 2,2 1,8 16
18 - - - 2,3 2,4 2,3 2,3 2,1 2,0 2,0 1,6 1,2 18
20 - - - - 1,9 1,9 1,8 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,2 0,8 20
22 - - - - 1,6 1,5 1,5 1,3 1,2 1,1 0,8 - 22
24 - - - - - 1,2 1,2 1,0 0,9 0,8 - - 24
26 - - - - - 1,0 0,9 0,8 - - - - 26
28 - - - - - - 0,7 - - - - - 28
1) 6,7 4,1 2,9 2,0 1,5 1,0 - - - - - - 1)
17

MS AC 55-3
3,0 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - - 3
4 24,0 24,0 22,4 20,2 18,5 - - - - - - - 4
5 18,2 18,1 16,7 16,0 14,7 13,5 - - - - - - 5
6 12,7 13,4 13,7 12,8 11,8 11,1 10,4 - - - - - 6
7 9,5 10,2 10,5 10,4 10,1 9,5 9,1 8,4 - - - - 7
8 7,5 8,1 8,3 8,5 8,6 8,2 7,8 7,4 7,0 - - - 8
9 - 6,6 7,0 7,1 7,1 7,1 6,7 6,4 6,0 5,5 - - 9
10 - 5,5 5,9 6,0 6,0 5,9 5,9 5,6 5,2 5,0 4,6 - 10
12 - 4,0 4,3 4,4 4,4 4,4 4,3 4,2 4,0 3,9 3,6 3,0 12
14 - - 3,3 3,4 3,4 3,3 3,3 3,1 3,0 3,0 2,6 2,1 14
16 - - - 2,6 2,7 2,6 2,6 2,4 2,3 2,2 1,8 1,4 16
18 - - - 2,1 2,1 2,1 2,0 1,9 1,8 1,7 1,3 0,9 18
20 - - - - 1,7 1,6 1,6 1,5 1,3 1,2 0,9 - 20
22 - - - - 1,4 1,3 1,3 1,1 1,0 0,9 - - 22
24 - - - - - 1,1 1,0 0,8 - - - - 24
26 - - - - - 0,8 0,7 - - - - - 26
1) 6,1 3,8 2,6 1,8 1,3 0,8 - - - - - - 1)
1,1 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 - - - - - - - - 3
4 23,5 21,6 19,5 17,8 16,6 - - - - - - - 4
5 15,7 15,7 15,1 13,9 12,7 12,1 - - - - - - 5
6 10,9 11,7 11,8 11,0 10,6 9,9 9,4 - - - - - 6
7 8,1 8,8 9,1 9,2 8,9 8,5 8,0 7,4 - - - - 7
8 6,3 7,0 7,3 7,5 7,5 7,2 6,8 6,3 5,9 - - - 8
9 - 5,6 6,0 6,1 6,2 6,1 5,8 5,4 5,0 4,8 - - 9
10 - 4,7 5,0 5,1 5,1 5,1 5,0 4,7 4,4 4,2 3,8 - 10
12 - 3,3 3,6 3,7 3,7 3,7 3,6 3,5 3,3 3,1 2,7 2,1 12
14 - - 2,7 2,8 2,8 2,8 2,7 2,6 2,4 2,2 1,8 1,3 14
16 - - - 2,1 2,2 2,1 2,1 1,9 1,7 1,6 1,2 0,7 16
18 - - - 1,7 1,7 1,6 1,6 1,5 1,2 1,1 0,7 - 18
20 - - - - 1,3 1,3 1,2 1,1 0,8 0,7 - - 20
22 - - - - 1,0 1,0 0,9 0,7 - - - - 22
1) 5,1 3,1 2,1 1,4 0,9 - - - - - - - 1)
6,0 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 24,0 24,0 21,7 19,5 - - - - - - - - 3
4 18,4 17,2 16,4 15,1 14,0 - - - - - - - 4
5 12,5 13,3 12,7 11,9 11,5 10,6 - - - - - - 5
6 9,2 9,9 10,1 10,0 9,4 9,0 8,5 - - - - - 6
7 7,1 7,7 8,1 8,2 8,1 7,6 7,2 6,7 - - - - 7
8 5,7 6,2 6,6 6,7 6,7 6,5 6,2 5,8 5,4 - - - 8
9 - 5,1 5,5 5,6 5,6 5,5 5,4 5,0 4,6 4,5 - - 9
10 - 4,3 4,6 4,7 4,8 4,7 4,6 4,3 4,0 3,9 3,5 - 10
12 - 3,1 3,4 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,4 3,3 3,1 3,0 2,6 2,0 12
14 - - 2,6 2,7 2,7 2,6 2,6 2,5 2,3 2,1 1,8 1,3 14
16 - - - 2,1 2,1 2,0 2,0 1,9 1,7 1,5 1,2 0,7 16
18 - - - 1,6 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,2 1,1 0,7 - 18
20 - - - - 1,3 1,2 1,2 1,1 0,8 0,7 - - 20
22 - - - - 1,0 1,0 0,9 0,7 - - - - 22
1) 4,7 2,9 2,0 1,4 0,9 - - - - - - - 1)
18

MS AC 55-3
4,1 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 23,3 21,2 19,1 17,8 - - - - - - - - 3
4 16,0 15,4 14,4 13,4 12,6 - - - - - - - 4
5 10,9 11,6 11,1 10,8 10,2 9,5 - - - - - - 5
6 7,9 8,6 9,0 8,7 8,4 7,8 7,4 - - - - - 6
7 6,1 6,7 7,0 7,1 7,0 6,6 6,2 5,8 - - - - 7
8 4,8 5,3 5,7 5,8 5,8 5,6 5,3 4,9 4,5 - - - 8
9 - 4,4 4,7 4,8 4,8 4,8 4,5 4,2 3,9 3,7 - - 9
10 - 3,6 3,9 4,0 4,1 4,0 3,9 3,6 3,3 3,2 2,8 - 10
12 - 2,6 2,9 2,9 3,0 2,9 2,9 2,7 2,5 2,3 1,8 1,3 12
14 - - 2,1 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,1 2,0 1,7 1,5 1,2 - 14
16 - - - 1,7 1,7 1,6 1,6 1,4 1,2 1,0 - - 16
18 - - - 1,3 1,3 1,2 1,2 1,0 0,7 - - - 18
20 - - - - 1,0 0,9 0,8 - - - - - 20
22 - - - - 0,7 - - - - - - - 22
1) 3,9 2,4 1,6 1,1 - - - - - - - - 1)
3,0 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 21,4 19,5 18,1 16,4 - - - - - - - - 3
4 14,7 14,1 13,2 12,4 11,8 - - - - - - - 4
5 9,9 10,7 10,3 9,9 9,4 8,7 - - - - - - 5
6 7,2 7,8 8,2 8,0 7,6 7,2 6,7 - - - - - 6
7 5,4 6,1 6,4 6,5 6,4 6,0 5,6 5,2 - - - - 7
8 4,2 4,8 5,2 5,3 5,3 5,1 4,8 4,4 4,1 - - - 8
9 - 3,9 4,2 4,3 4,4 4,3 4,1 3,7 3,4 3,3 - - 9
10 - 3,2 3,5 3,6 3,7 3,6 3,5 3,2 2,9 2,8 2,3 - 10
12 - 2,2 2,5 2,6 2,6 2,6 2,5 2,3 2,0 1,8 1,4 - 12
14 - - 1,9 1,9 2,0 1,9 1,9 1,6 1,4 1,2 0,8 - 14
16 - - - 1,4 1,5 1,4 1,4 1,1 0,9 0,7 - - 16
18 - - - 1,1 1,1 1,0 1,0 0,7 - - - - 18
20 - - - - 0,8 - - - - - - - 20
1) 3,4 2,1 1,4 0,8 - - - - - - - - 1)
1,1 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,3m 13,8m 17,3m 20,8m 24,3m 27,8m 31,3m 34,8m 38,3m 41,8m 45,3m 50,0m
3 18,2 17,0 15,5 14,2 - - - - - - - - 3
4 12,3 12,0 11,5 10,7 10,0 - - - - - - - 4
5 8,3 9,0 8,8 8,4 7,9 7,3 - - - - - - 5
6 5,9 6,6 7,0 6,7 6,4 6,0 5,6 - - - - - 6
7 4,4 5,0 5,4 5,5 5,3 4,9 4,6 4,2 - - - - 7
8 3,4 3,9 4,3 4,4 4,4 4,1 3,9 3,5 3,2 - - - 8
9 - 3,1 3,5 3,6 3,6 3,5 3,3 2,9 2,7 2,5 - - 9
10 - 2,5 2,9 2,9 3,0 2,9 2,8 2,5 2,2 1,9 1,5 - 10
12 - 1,7 2,0 2,1 2,1 2,0 2,0 1,7 1,3 1,1 0,7 - 12
14 - - 1,4 1,5 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,0 0,8 - - - 14
16 - - - 1,0 1,1 1,0 0,9 - - - - - 16
1) 2,6 1,6 1,0 - - - - - - - - - 1)
19

MS AC 55-3
Runner · Montagespitze · Potence · Runner · Runner ·

Runner · Шкив
20

Notes to Lifting Capacity AC 55-3
Anmerkungen zu den Tragfähigkeiten · Conditions d‘utilisation ·
Annotazioni sulle portate · Condiciones de utilización · Notas sobre capacidade
de içamento · Примечания по грузоподъемности
Ratings are in compliance with ISO 4305.

Weight of hook blocks and slings is part of the load, and is to be deducted from the capacity ratings.
Consult operation manual for further details.
Note: Data published herein is intended as a guide only and shall not be construed to warrant applicability for lifting purposes.
Crane operation is subject to the computer charts and operation manual both supplied with the crane.
Tragfähigkeiten entsprechen ISO 4305.
Das Gewicht der Unterflaschen, sowie die Lastaufnahmemittel, sind Bestandteile der Last und sind von den Tragfähigkeits
angaben abzuziehen.
Weitere Angaben in der Bedienungsanleitung des Kranes.
Anmerkung: Die Daten dieser Broschüre dienen nur zur allgemeinen Information; für ihre Richtigkeit übernehmen wir keine
Haftung. Der Betrieb des Kranes ist nur mit den Original-Tragfähigkeitstabellen und mit der Bedienungsanleitung zulässig,
die mit dem Kran mitgeliefert werden.
Le tableau de charges est conforme à la norme ISO 4305.

Les poids du crochet-moufle et de tous les accessoires d’élingage font partie de la charge et sont à déduire des charges indiquées.
Pour plus de détails consulter la notice d’utilisation de la grue.
Nota: Les renseignements ci-inclus sont donnés à titre indicatif et ne représentent aucune garantie d’utilisation pour les opérations
de levage. La mise en service de la grue n’est autorisée qu’à condition que les tableaux de charges ainsi que le manuel de service,
tels que fournis avec la grue, soient observés.
Le portate sono conformi alla norma ISO 4305.

Il peso del bozzello e delle funi d’attacco fanno parte del carico e sono quindi da detrarre dai valori di tabella.
Per ulteriori dettagli sulla velocità vento, consultare il manuale di istruzione della gru.
Nota: I dati riportati su tale prospetto sono solo a titolo indicativo e pertanto non impegnativi. L’impiego della gru è ammesso solo
rispettando le tabelle originali ed il manuale di uso fornito assieme alla gru.
Las capacidades de carga están sujetas a las normas ISO 4305.

El peso de los ganchos y eslingas son parte de la carga y serán deducidos de las capacidades brutas.
Consultar los manuales de operación para ampliar información.
Observación: Los datos publicados son solamente orientativos y no se deben interpretar como garantía de aplicación para
determinadas operaciones de elevación. La manipulación de la grúa está sujeta a las cargas programadas en el ordenador y en
el manual de operaciones, ambos suministrados con la grúa.
Valores nominais de acordo com a ISO 4305.

O peso dos moitões e eslingas faz parte da carga e tem de ser subtraído das capacidades nominais.
Consultar manual de operação para outros detalhes.
Nota: Os dados publicados aqui destinam-se a simples orientação e não devem ser interpretdos como garantia de aplicabilidade
para fins de içamento. A operação da grua depende de tabelas de computador e do manual de operação, ambos fornecidos
com a máquina.
Номинальные значения соответствуют ISO 4305.

Вес крюкоблока и строп является частью груза и должен вычитаться из номинальных значений грузоподъемности.
Подробности см. в руководстве по эксплуатации.
Примечание. Публикуемые в настоящем издании данные приводятся только для справки и не должны использоваться
при расчете нагрузки. При эксплуатации крана должны применяться компьютерные таблицы и руководство по
эксплуатации, входящие в комплект поставки крана.
21

Technical Description AC 55-3
Basic machine
Equipment carrier
Engine 260-4 MTU 6R1000; Diesel engine; 260 kW / 2200 1/min (348 HP), torque 1400 Nm / 1200-1600 1/min;
The engine complies with Euromot 4/Tier 4F; Exhaust system complete stainless steel with
SCR catalyzer.
Fuel tank 390 l Diesel (no RME / biodiesel); 40 l Ad-Blue tank.
Transmission AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic; Automated gearbox with 12 forward speeds and 2 reverse; 2-stage transfer case with
switchable off-road gear and switchable longitudinal lock.
Axles 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6; 3 axles, axles 1 and 3 driven and equipped with selectable transverse lock; All axles s teered.
Suspension Hydropneumatic suspension with axle load compensation; Hydraulically lockable;
Manual or automatic levelling alternatively.
Steering Dual circuit hydro servocom steering with emergency steering pump; Active rear axle steering.
Brakes Pneumatic dual circuit service brake with antilock system, acting on all wheels; Disc brakes;
additional, double-speed decompression brake; Spring-loaded parking brake.
Tire size 385/95 R25 Tires size 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); Steel rim 9,5-25/1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE 170F; or similar.
(14.00R25)
Cab 2550 Type 2.55 m; Adjustable driver seat; Armrests and pneumatic suspension; Co-driver‘s seat; Steering
wheel height and tilt adjustable; Power windows; Tinted glass; Power mirrors with heater; Preparation
for radio.
Heating Engine-dependent warm water heating with 12 kW heating power.
engine-dependent
Drive lights Including low beams, high beams, daytime running lights.
Outriggers H-4-Point design; Vertical and horizontal movement fully hydraulic; Manual or automatic levelling
alternatively; 3 outrigger bases: 3.00 m, 4.50 m and 6.50 m.
Outrigger pads 020 4 round outrigger pads A = 0.20 m2 with transport position at vertical cylinder.
Outrigger basis Individual monitoring of horizontal stroke; Deviation warning in crane cab.
monitoring
Outrigger load indicator The outrigger load is indicated in the operator cab and the outrigger control box.
Electronic immobiliser Prevents uncontrolled carrier mobilisation; Incl. 5 ignition keys.
system
Pneumatic tire filling plug Pneumatic tire filling plug for self-filling of the wheels.
Contour safety marking Continuous reflective strips on the sides of the chassis and on the rear.
Equipment superstructure
Telescopic boom HA50 10.3 m - 50 m; Single cylinder telescoping system, automatic telescoping; Attachments for all equip-
ment and extensions; 3 sheaves integrated in boom head for max. capacity of 35.6 t.
Boom luffing 1 luffing cylinder with automatic lowering brake valve.
Rotary drive Single slewing gear unit with spring-loaded multi-disc brake.
H1 Hoist with spring-loaded multi-disc brake; Resolver (hoist rotation indicator).
Counterweight 6.0 t 6.0 t; 3 pieces; Automatic rigging system; Fully roadable in 12 t axle load limit.
Control system Enabling 4 simultaneous working movements; Electric pilot controls via 2 two-axis joysticks;
Different control modes selectable for hydraulic circuits.
Operator aids IC-1, with integrated electronic load moment indicator in accordance with EN13000; Color display;
Displaying of current operating conditions, load charts, fault indicator; Signal lights indicating
LMI-load; Crane data logger.
Hook height indication Displaying and programmability of the hook height H1 and /or H2 by IC-1.
Cab 875 Type 875; Tilt infinitely variable 16°; Sliding window rear; Fold-out front window; Extendable side
pedestal, front pedestal; Handrails; Tinted safety glass; Pull-down sun visor; Preparation for radio.
Heating Engine-independent warm water heating with 5 kW heating power.
engine-independent
Anemometer Removable, to be used with all extensions.
22

Additional equipment
Carrier
Axles 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6; All 3 axles steered, axles 1 and 3 permanently driven, axle 2 shiftable, all axles equipped with
selectable transverse lock.
Wear-free auxiliary brake Wear-free auxiliary eddy-current brake at 3rd axle.
Aircondition Aircondition for carrier cab with 7 kW rated cooling power.
Superstructure
2. hoist (H2) 2. hoist; Spring-loaded multi-disc brake; Integrated resolver (hoist rotation indicator);
Incl. quick couplings and transport rack.
Aircondition Aircondition in crane cab with 5 kW rated cooling power.
Handling
Remote control Control of superstructure movements via wireless remote control.
Moving out of crane cab Control of carrier out of crane cab, enables machine moving when rigged, possible even under load.
Working range limiter Displaying and programmability of the work range limits by IC-1.
IC-1 Plus Smart crane control system for main boom operation enabling higher lifting capacities especially over
outriggers. Enables safe use of the full capacity of the crane even in asymmetric outrigger configura-
tions. Outriggers can be positioned independently. Capacity precalculation for +/- 30° slewing angle
and radius area. In-cab lift simulation.
Extensions
MS (runner) 1 m; Variable assembly jib with manual offset; 2-sheaves, for max. 24.0 t lifting capacity; Including
open storage box for the transport of the Runner MS.
Hook Blocks
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg); Hook block with adjustable ballast and ramshorn hook, variable usage as
1- and 3-sheave hook block; white with red signal stripes.
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg); Hook block with adjustable ballast and single hook, variable usage as 1- and
3-sheave hook block; white with red signal stripes.
Hook block 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 kg); Hook block with single hook; white with red signal stripes.
Hook 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg); red.
Further additional equipment on request!

Weight data may deviate from posted values based on road / travel configuration, equipment configuration, and component
weight tolerances.
23

Technische Beschreibung AC 55-3
Grundausstattung
Kranfahrgestell
Motor 260-4 MTU 6R1000; Dieselmotor; Leistung 260 kW / 2200 1/min (348 PS), Drehmoment 1400 Nm /
1200-1600 1/min; Zulassung gemäß Euromot 4/Tier 4F; Abgasanlage vollständig aus Edelstahl mit
SCR-Katalysator.
Kraftstoffbehälter 390 l Diesel (kein RME/Biodiesel); 40 l Ad-Blue Tank.
Getriebe AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic; automatisches Getriebe mit 12 Vorwärts- und 2 Rückwärtsgängen; 2-stufiges Verteiler-
getriebe mit jeweils zuschaltbarer Geländestufe und Längssperre.
Achsen 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6; 3 Achsen, davon Achsen 1 und 3 angetrieben mit zuschaltbarer Quersperre; alle Achsen
gelenkt.
Federung Hydropneumatische Federung mit Achslastausgleich; hydraulisch blockierbar; wahlweise manuelle
oder automatische Niveaueinstellung.
Lenkung Zweikreis-Servocom-Hydrolenkung mit Notlenkpumpe; aktive Hinterachslenkung.
Bremsen Pneumatische Zweikreis-Betriebsbremse mit ABS, auf alle Räder wirkend; Scheibenbremsen;
zusätzliche, doppelt getaktete Dekompressionsbremse; Federspeicher-Feststellbremse.
Bereifung 385/95 R25 Reifengröße 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); Stahlfelge 9,5-25/1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE 170F;
(14.00R25) oder gleichwertig.
Kabine 2550 Typ 2,55 m; Einstellbarer Fahrersitz mit Armlehnen und pneumatischer Federung; Beifahrersitz;
Lenkrad mit Höhen- und Neigungsverstellung; Elektrische Fensterheber; Getönte Verglasung;
Elektrisch verstellbare und beheizbare Spiegel; Radiovorbereitung.
Heizung motorabhänging Motorabhängige Warmwasserheizung mit 12 kW Nennheizleistung.
Fahrbeleuchtung Inklusive Abblendlicht, Fernlicht, Tagfahrlicht.
Abstützungen H-4-Punkt-Anordnung; vertikal und horizontal vollhydraulisch verstellbar; Wahlweise manuelle oder
automatische Niveaueinstellung; 3 Abstützbasen: 3,00 m, 4,50 m und 6,50 m.
Stützteller 020 4 runde Stützteller A = 0,20 m2, mit Transportstellung am Stützzylinder.
Stützbasis-Überwachung Einzelüberwachung des Horizontalhubs; Abweichungswarnung in Kabine Kranoberwagen.
Stützkraftanzeige Anzeige der Stützkraft in der Krankabine und am Abstützbedienkasten.
Elektronische Wegfahr- Verhindert unkontrollierte Ingangsetzung des Fahrgestells; mit 5 Zündschlüsseln.
sperre
Pneumatischer Reifenfüll- Ermöglicht Selbstbefüllung der Reifen.
anschluss
Kontur-Sicherheits- Durchgehende Reflektorleisten seitlich am Fahrgestell und am Heck.
markierung
Kranoberwagen
Teleskopausleger HA50 10,3 m - 50 m; Einzylinder-Teleskopiersystem, automatisches Teleskopieren; Aufnahmen für alle An-
bauten und Verlängerungen; 3 Seilrollen im Auslegerkopf für max. 35,6 t Tragfähigkeit.
Auslegerverstellung 1 Wippzylinder mit Sicherheits-Senk-Brems-Ventil.
Drehantrieb Drehwerk mit federbelasteter Lamellenbremse.
H1 Hubwerk mit federbelasteter Lamellenbremse; integrierter Drehmelder.
Gegengewicht 6,0 t 6,0 t; 3-teilig; automatisches Rüstsystem; voll straßentauglich innerhalb der 12-Tonnen-Achslasgrenze.
Steuerung Ermöglicht 4 gleichzeitige Arbeitsbewegungen; elektrische Vorsteuerung über 2 Kreuzsteuerhebel;
verschiedene Steuerungsmodi für Hydraulikkreise anwählbar.
Sicherheitseinrichtung IC-1, mit integrierter Lastmomentbegrenzung gemäß EN13000; Farbdisplay; Betriebszustandsanzeige,
Traglasttabellen, Störungsanzeige; Ampelsignal für LMB-Auslastung; Krandatenrekorder.
Hakenhöhenanzeige Anzeige und Programmierbarkeit der Hakenhöhe H1 und/oder H2 über IC-1.
Kabine 875 Typ 875; Stufenlose Neigung bis 16°; Schiebefenster im Heck; Frontscheibe aufstellbar; ausfahrbares
Seitenpodest, Frontpodest; Handläufe; getönte Sicherheitsverglasung; Sonnenschutzrollo; Radiovor-
bereitung.
Heizung Motorunabhängige Warmwasserheizung mit 5 kW Heizleistung.
motorunabhängig
Windmesser Abnehmbar, an allen Einrichtungen nutzbar.
24

Zusatzausstattung
Kranfahrgestell
Achsen 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6; alle drei Achsen gelenkt, Achsen 1 und 3 permanent angetrieben, Achse 2 zuschaltbar;
alle Achsen mit zuschaltbarer Quersperre.
Verschleißfreie Zusatz- Zusätzliche, verschleißfreie Wirbelstrombremse an der dritten Achse.
bremse
Klimaanlage Klimaanlage für Kabine Kranfahrgestell mit 7 kW Kühlleistung.
Kranoberwagen
2. Hubwerk (H2) 2. Hubwerk; federbelastete Lamellenbremse; integrierter Drehmelder; einschl. Schnellkupplungen
und Transporthalterung.
Klimaanlage Klimaanlage in Kabine Kranoberwagen mit 5 kW Kühlleistung.
Bedienung
Fernbedienung Steuerung der Oberwagenbewegungen per Funkfernsteuerung.
Verfahren aus der Kabine Steuerung des Kranfahrgestells aus der Kabine Kranoberwagen zum Umsetzen der aufgerüsteten
Kranoberwagen Maschine, auch unter Last.
Arbeitsbereichs- Anzeige und Programmierung der Arbeitsbereichsgrenzen über IC-1.
begrenzung
IC-1 Plus Intelligentes Steuerungssystem für HA-Betrieb, das höhere Traglasten ermöglicht – insbesondere
bei Hebevorgängen über den Abstützungen. Sichere Nutzung der vollen Tragfähigkeit des Krans,
selbst bei asymmetrischen Abstützkonfigurationen. Abstützungen unabhängig positionierbar.
Vorberechnung der Traglast für einen Schwenkwinkel und Radiusbereich von +/- 30°. Hubsimulation
in der Kabine.
Verlängerungen
MS (Montagespitze) 1 m; variable Montagespitze mit manueller Abwinkelung; 2 Rollen für max. 24,0 t Tragfähigkeit;
einschl. offener MS-Transportbox.
Unterflaschen
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg); variabel ballastierbare Unterflasche mit Doppelhaken; wahlweise mit einer
oder drei Einscherungen nutzbar; mit weiß-roter Warnschraffur.
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg); variabel ballastierbare Unterflasche mit Einzelhaken; wahlweise mit einer
Unterflasche 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 kg); Unterflasche mit Einfachhaken; mit weiß-roter Warnschraffur.
Haken 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg); rot.
Weitere Zusatzausstattung auf Anfrage!
Gewichtsangaben können entsprechend der Verfahrzustände, des Ausstattungsumfangs und aufgrund von Gewichtstole-
ranzen von Bauteilen positiv oder negativ abweichen!
25

Descriptif technique AC 55-3
Machine de base
Equipement châssis
Moteur 260-4 MTU 6R1000 ; moteur diesel ; 260 kW / 2200 1/min (348 CH) ; couple de 1400 Nm /1200-1600 1/min ;
le moteur est conforme aux standards Euromot 4 / Tier 4F ; système d‘échappement 100 % acier
inoxydable avec catalyseur SRC.
Réservoir de carburant 390 l ; diesel (pas de RME/biodiesel) ; réservoir Ad-Blue de 40 l.
Transmission AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic ; boîte de vitesses automatique ; 12 vitesses AV et 2 AR ; boîte de transfert à deux rapports
avec dispositif tout-terrain commutable et blocage de différentiel longitudinal sélectionnable.
Essieux 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6 ; 3 essieux ; essieux 1 et 3 moteurs et équipés du blocage de différentiel transversal
sélectionnable ; tous essieux directeurs.
Suspension Suspension hydropneumatique avec compensation du poids de l’essieu ; blocage hydraulique ;
mise à niveau manuelle ou automatique.
Direction Direction servocom à deux circuits avec pompe de secours ; direction active des essieux arrière.
Freins Frein de service pneumatique à double circuit avec système antiblocage agissant sur toutes les roues ;
freins à disque ; frein par compression double vitesse additionnel ; frein de stationnement par cylindres
à ressort.
Pneus taille 385/95 R25 Pneus taille 385/95 R25 (14.00R25) ; jantes acier 9,5-25/1,7“ ; TechKing ETCRANE 170F ; ou similaire.
(14.00R25)
Cabine 2550 Type 2,55 m ; siège opérateur réglable avec accoudoirs et suspension pneumatique ; siège passager ;
hauteur et inclinaison du volant réglables ; vitres électriques ; vitres teintées ; rétroviseurs électriques
chauffants ; prémontage radio.
Chauffage en fonction Chauffage à eau chaude en fonction du moteur, puissance de chauffage de 12 kW.
du moteur
Feux de conduite Feux de croisement, feux de route, feux diurnes.
Calage Agencement 4 points en H ; télescopages verticaux et horizontaux entièrement hydrauliques ;
mise à niveau manuelle ou automatique ; 3 bases de calage : 3,00 m, 4,50 m et 6,50 m.
Semelles de calage 020 4 semelles de calage rondes A = 0,20 m2 avec position de transport sur le vérin vertical.
Contrôle de la base Surveillance individuelle de la course horizontale ; signal de déviation dans la cabine de la grue.
de calage
Indicateur de charge de Affichage de la charge de calage dans la cabine et sur le boîtier de commande des stabilisateurs.
calage
Antivol électronique Prévention des mouvements non planifiés du châssis ; avec 5 clés de contact.
Valve de gonflage Valve de gonflage autonome des pneus.
pneumatique
Signalisation du contour Bandes réfléchissantes continues sur les côtés et à l’arrière du châssis.
Equipement tourelle
Flèche télescopique HA50 10,3 m - 50 m ; système de télescopage à vérin unique ; télescopage automatique ; fixations pour
équipements et extensions ; 3 poulies intégrées à la tête de flèche pour une capacité max. de 35,6 t.
Réglage de la flèche 1 vérin de relevage avec descente contrôlée par soupape de freinage.
Entraînement rotatif Unique mécanisme d‘orientation avec frein multidisque à ressort.
H1 Treuil avec frein multidisque à ressort ; indicateur de rotation intégré.
Contrepoids de 6,0 t 6,0 t ; 3 pièces ; système de montage automatique; modèle tout-terrain avec charge d‘essieu limitée
à 12 tonnes.
Système de commande Permet 4 mouvements simultanés ; commande électrique via 2 joysticks en croix ; différents modes
de commande sélectionnables pour les circuits hydrauliques.
Dispositif de sécurité IC-1 avec témoin de moment de charge électronique intégré conforme à la norme EN13000 ;
affichage couleur ; affichage des conditions de travail ; abaques de charge ; indicateur d‘anomalie ;
signal lumineux charge LMB ; enregistreur des données de la machine.
Indication de la hauteur Affichage et possibilité de programmer la hauteur sous crochet H1 et/ou H2 sur dispositif IC-1.
sous crochet
Cabine 875 Type 875 ; inclinaison en continu jusqu’à 16° ; vitre coulissante à l’arrière ; pare-brise réglable ;
quai latéral extensible, quai avant repliable ; mains courantes ; vitrage de sécurité teinté ; pare-soleil
rabattable ; prémontage radio.
Chauffage Chauffage à eau chaude indépendant du moteur, puissance de chauffage de 5 kW.
indépendant du moteur
Anémomètre Amovible, utilisable sur tous les dispositifs.
26

Equipement additionnel
Châssis
Essieux 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6 ; 3 essieux directeurs, essieux 1 et 3 moteurs en permanence ; essieu 2 enclenchable ;
tous essieux équipés du blocage de différentiel transversal sélectionnable.
Frein auxiliaire sans usure Frein à courant de Foucault auxiliaire sans usure sur le 3ème essieu.
Climatiseur Climatisation en cabine ; système de refroidissement d’une puissance nominale de 7 kW.
Tourelle
2. treuil (H2) 2. treuil ; frein multidisque à ressort ; indicateur de rotation intégré ; avec connexions rapides et rack
de transport.
Climatiseur Climatisation de la cabine avec puissance de refroidissement nominale de 5 kW.
Manutention
Commande à distance Commande des mouvements de la tourelle par commande radio à distance.
Déplacement depuis Commande du châssis depuis la cabine du grutier, permet le déplacement de la machine même en
la cabine du grutier charge.
Contrôleur de portée Affichage et programmabilité des limites de portée sur dispositif IC-1.
IC-1 Plus Système de commande intelligent de la flèche principale de la grue, garant de capacités de levage
s upérieures, tout particulièrement sur stabilisateurs. Permet une exploitation sans danger de la
capacité intégrale de la grue, même dans les configurations de stabilisation asymétrique.
Stabilisateurs positionnables indépendamment. Calcul préalable de la capacité pour un angle
d‘orientation de ± 30° au sein du rayon. Simulation en cabine des opérations de levage.
Extensions
MS (potence) 1 m ; fléchette à volée variable et débattement manuel ; 2 poulies pour une capacité de charge max.
de 24,0 t ; avec coffre de rangement ouvert pour le transport de la potence MS.
Crochets moufles
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg) ; crochet moufle avec contrepoids réglable et crochet double ;
utilisation possible en crochet moufle 1 et 3 poulie(s) ; blanc avec bandes de signalisation rouges.
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg) ; crochet moufle avec contrepoids réglable et crochet simple ;
Crochet moufle 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 kg) ; crochet moufle avec crochet simple ; blanc avec bandes de signalisation rouges.
Crochet 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg) ; rouge.
Autres équipements additionnels disponibles sur demande !

Les données relatives au poids peuvent varier en fonction de la configuration en déplacement, de la configuration
d‘équipement et des tolérances liées au poids des composants.
27

Descrizione tecnica AC 55-3
Macchina base
Equipaggiamento carro
Motore 260-4 MTU 6R1000; motore diesel; 260 kW / 2200 1/min (348 HP), coppia 1400 Nm /1200-1600 1/min;
il motore è a norma Euromot 4/Tier 4F; l’impianto di scarico è completo di catalizzatore di tipo SCR
in acciaio inossidabile.
Serbatoio di carburante 390 l diesel (non compatibile con estere metilico di colza/biodiesel); serbatoio 40 l Ad-Blue.
Trasmissione AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic; cambio automatizzato con 12 marce avanti e 2 marce indietro; distributore di coppia a
2 rapporti con rapporto fuori strada e differenziale longitudinale inseribile.
Assalii 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6; 3 assali, di cui gli assali 1 e 3 traenti con blocco differenziale trasversale inseribile;
tutti gli assali sterzanti.
Sospensioni Sospensioni idropneumatiche con compensazione del carico assiale; blocco idraulico; disponibili nella
versione con regolazione del livello manuale o automatica.
Sterzo Servosterzo idraulico a doppio circuito con pompa di soccorso; sterzatura attiva degli assali posteriori.
Freni Freno di servizio pneumatico a doppio circuito con ABS, installato su tutte le ruote; freni a disco;
freno a decompressione a due velocità aggiuntivo; freno di stazionamento a molla.
Dimensione pneumatici Dimensione pneumatici 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); cerchione in acciaio 9,5-25/1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE
385/95 R25 (14.00R25) 170F; o simile.
Cabina 2550 Tipo 2.55 m; sedile di guida regolabile, braccioli e sospensioni pneumatiche; sedile per il secondo
conducente; volante regolabile in altezza e inclinazione; finestrini con alzacristalli elettrico;
vetri oscurati; specchietti elettrici riscaldati; predisposizione per radio.
Riscaldamento tramite Sistema di riscaldamento acqua tramite motore, con potenzialità di riscaldamento 12 kW.
Fari di guida Dotazione comprendente anabbaglianti, abbaglianti, luci di marcia diurna.
Stabilizzatori Sistema a 4 stabilizzatori, estensione orizzontale e verticale completamente idraulica; Disponibili nella
versione con regolazione del livello automatica o manuale; 3 basi di appoggio: 3,00 m, 4,50 m e 6,50 m.
Piastre di appoggio 020 4 piastre di appoggio degli stabilizzatori rotonde A = 0,20 m 2 con posizione di trasporto in
corrispondenza del cilindro verticale.
Monitoraggio base Monitoraggio individuale della corsa orizzontale; avvertimento in caso di deviazione nella cabina gru.
di appoggio
Indicatore di carico degli Il carico degli stabilizzatori viene visualizzato nella cabina operatore e nel quadro comandi degli
stabilizzatori stabilizzatori stessi.
Immobilizzatore elettronico Impedisce l’avviamento involontario del carro; completo di 5 chiavi di accensione.
Raccordo di gonfiaggio Raccordo di gonfiaggio per autogonfiaggio pneumatici.
pneumatici
Bande di sicurezza per Strisce catarifrangenti continue sui lati del telaio e sul retro.
segnalazione sagoma
veicolo
Equipaggiamento torretta
Braccio telescopico HA50 10,3 m - 50 m; sistema telescopico a un cilindro, funzione telescopica automatica; dispositivo per
l‘inserimento di tutti gli accessori opzionali; 3 pulegge sulla punta braccio per una portata max. di
35,6 t.
Sfilo del braccio 1 cilindro di sfilo con valvola di comando automatico del freno di discesa.
Meccanismo di rotazione Meccanismo di rotazione singolo con freno lamellare a molla.
H1 Argano con freno lamellare a molla; con sincronizzatore integrato (indicatore di rotazione
dell’argano).
Contrappeso 6,0 t 6,0 t; 3 blocchi; sistema di allestimento automatico; in assetto da strada entro il limite di carico assiale
di 12 t.
Sistema di controllo Consente 4 movimenti operativi in contemporanea; comandi elettrici con joystick a 2 assi; diverse
modalità di comando selezionabili per i circuiti idraulici.
Indicatori per l’operatore IC-1, con indicatore del momento di carico elettronico integrato, a norma EN13000; display a colori;
visualizzazione dello stato operativo attuale, diagrammi di carico, indicatore di errore; segnalazione
luminosa sulla cabina corretta del carico massimo; registratore dati della gru.
Indicazione altezza sotto Funzioni di visualizzazione e programmazione dell‘altezza sotto gancio H1 e/o H2 tramite IC-1.
gancio
Cabina 875 Tipo 875; inclinazione a regolazione infinitesimale 16°; alzacristalli sul retro; parabrezza regolabile;
pedana laterale allungabile, pedana anteriore; corrimano; vetri oscurati; tendina parasole; predisposi-
zione per radio.
Riscaldamento Riscaldamento acqua calda indipendente dal motore con 5 kW di potenza.
indipendente dal motore
Anemometro Rimovibile, utilizzabile con tutte le prolunghe.
28

Equipaggiamento aggiuntivo
Carro
Assali 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6; tutti e tre gli assali sterzanti, gli assali 1 e 3 permanentemente traenti, l’assale 2 commutabile,
tutti gli assali con blocco differenziale trasversale inseribile.
Freno ausiliario senza Freno ausiliario a correnti parassite senza usura sul terzo assale.
usura
Climatizzazione Impianto di climatizzazione per la cabina torretta con potenzialità di raffreddamento di 7 kW.
Torretta
2. argano (H2) Secondo argano; freno lamellare a molla; con sincronizzatore integrato (indicatore di rotazione
dell’argano); incl. giunti rapidi e vano di trasporto.
Climatizzazione Impianto di climatizzazione per la cabina gru con potenzialità di raffreddamento di 5 kW.
Movimentazione
Radiocomando Controllo dei movimenti della torretta a distanza tramite telecomando wireless.
Movimentazione dall’ Il controllo del carro al di fuori della cabina gru consente lo spostamento della macchina una volta
esterno della cabina gru allestita/sotto carico.
Limitatore del raggio Visualizzazione e programmazione dei limiti del raggio d’azione tramite IC-1.
d‘azione
IC-1 Plus Sistema di controllo intelligente della gru per il funzionamento del braccio base che consente di
tilizzare capacità di sollevamento maggiori in particolare con gli stabilizzatori. Consente di utilizzare
u
in sicurezza tutta la capacità della gru anche con una configurazione asimmetrica degli stabilizzatori.
Gli stabilizzatori possono essere posizionati in modo indipendente. Precalcolo della capacità per un
angolo di rotazione +/- 30° e raggio d’azione. Simulazione del sollevamento dalla cabina.
Prolunghe
MS (runner) 1 m; falcone con montaggio a volata variabile, con inclinazione manuale; 2 pulegge, per una capacità
di sollevamento max. di 24,0 t; con vano di stoccaggio per il trasporto del Runner MS.
Bozzelli
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg); bozzello con zavorra regolabile e gancio doppio, possibilità di utilizzo a
1 e 3 pulegge; bianco con strisce segnaletiche rosse.
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg); bozzello con zavorra regolabile e gancio singolo, possibilità di utilizzo a
Bozzello 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 kg); bozzello con gancio singolo; bianco con strisce segnaletiche rosse.
Gancio 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg); rosso.
Altri equipaggiamenti disponibili su richiesta!

I dati relativi al peso possono variare rispetto ai valori indicati in base all’assetto da strada scelto, alla configurazione delle
attrezzature e alle tolleranze di peso dei componenti.
29

Descripción técnica AC 55-3
Máquina básica
Equipamiento chasis
Motor 260-4 MTU 6R1000; motor diésel; 260 kW / 2200 rpm (348 CV), par 1400 Nm /1200-1600 rpm;
El motor cumple con Euromot 4/Tier 4F; Sistema de escape completamente de acero inoxidable
con catalizador SCR.
Depósito de combustible 390 l diésel (no RME / biodiésel); 40 l depósito Ad-Blue.
Transmisión AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic; caja de cambios automática con retardador hidráulico integrado, 12 marchas adelante
y 2 de retroceso; caja de transferencia de 2 etapas con marcha todoterreno accionable y bloqueo
longitudinal conmutable.
Ejes 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6; 3 ejes, ejes 1 y 3 con tracción y equipados con bloqueo transversal conmutable; Todos los
ejes con dirección.
Suspensión Suspensión hidroneumática con compensación de carga de ejes; Mecanismo hidráulico de bloqueo;
Nivelación alternativamente manual o automática.
Dirección Dirección hidráulica Servocom de dos circuitos, con bomba auxiliar de emergencia; Dirección activa de
eje trasero.
Frenos Frenos neumáticos de servicio de dos circuitos, actuantes en todas las ruedas; Frenos de disco;
freno de descompresión de doble efecto adicional; Freno de estacionamiento de muelles.
Neumáticos 385/95 R25 Tamaño de neumáticos 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); Llantas de acero 9,5-25/1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE 170F;
(14.00R25) o similar.
Cabina 2550 Tipo 2,55 m; Asiento de conductor regulable; Reposabrazos y suspensión neumática;
Asiento de segundo conductor; Volante con regulación de altura e inclinación; Elevalunas eléctricos;
Lunas tintadas; Espejos retrovisores de ajuste eléctrico, calefactados; Preinstalación para radio.
Calefacción dependiente Calefacción de agua caliente, dependiente del motor, con una potencia de calefacción de 12 kW.
del motor
Luces de conducción Incluye luces de cruce, luces largas, luces de circulación diurna.
Estabilizadores Diseño 4 puntos en H; Movimiento vertical y horizontal totalmente hidráulico; Puede seleccionarse
regulación de nivel manual o automática; 3 bases estabilizadoras: 3,00 m, 4,50 m y 6,50 m.
Apoyos estabilizadores 020 4 apoyos estabilizadores circulares A = 0,20 m 2 con posición de transporte en el cilindro vertical.
Monitorización de la base Monitorización individual de carrera horizontal; Alerta de desviación en cabina de grúa.
de estabilización
Indicador de carga sobre La carga de estabilizadores es indicada en la cabina del operador y en la caja de control de los
estabilizadores estabilizadores.
Sistema electrónico de Previene la movilización incontrolada del chasis; Incl. 5 llaves de encendido.
inmovilización
Enchufe neumático para Enchufe para el inflado automático de los neumáticos.
inflar neumáticos
Marcas de seguridad Bandas reflectantes continuas en los laterales de vehículo y en la parte trasera.
perimetrales
Equipamiento superestructura
Pluma telescópica HA50 10,3 m - 50 m; Sistema telescópico monocilindro, telescopaje automático; Accesorios para todos
los equipamientos y extensiones; 3 poleas integradas en cabezal de pluma para capacidad de carga
máx. 35,6 t.
Elevación de pluma 1 cilindro de elevación con válvula de frenado automático para descenso.
Mecanismo de giro Mecanismo giratorio único con freno multidisco por muelles.
H1 Cabrestante con freno multdisco por muelles; Resolver (indicador de rotación del cabrestante).
Contrapeso 6,0 t Contrapeso 6,0 t; 3 piezas; Sistema de montaje automático; Puede circular plenamente con carga de
eje de 12 t.
Sistema de control Permite 4 movimientos de trabajo simultáneos; Controles piloto eléctricos a través de joysticks de 2 ejes;
Se pueden seleccionar diferentes modos de control para los circuitos hidráulicos.
Dispositivos de asistencia IC-1, con indicador eléctrico integrado de momento de carga según EN13000; Pantalla a color;
al operario Visualización del estado operativo actual, tablas de carga, indicador de fallos; Luces que indican la
carga del indicador de momento de carga; Registro de datos de la grúa.
Indicación de la altura del Visualización y programación de la altura de gancho H1 y/o H2 mediante IC-1.
gancho
Cabina 875 Tipo 875; Inclinación 16° en progresión continua; Luna corredera trasera; Luna delantera a
batible;
Escalón lateral extensible, escalón frontal; Pasamanos; Cristales de seguridad tintados;
Parasol plegable; Preinstalación para radio.
Calefacción Calefacción de agua caliente, independiente del motor, con una potencia de calefacción de 5 kW.
independiente del motor
Anemómetro Desmontable, para ser usado con todas las extensiones.
30

Equipamiento adicional
Chasis
Ejes 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6; Los 3 ejes con dirección, ejes 1 y 3 con tracción permanente, eje 2 conmutable; Todos los ejes
equipados con bloqueo transversal conmutable.
Freno auxiliar sin desgaste Freno auxiliar sin desgaste por corrientes parásitas en el 3er eje.
Aire acondicionado Aire acondicionado para cabina de vehículo con 7 kW de potencia nominal de refrigeración.
Superestructura
2º cabrestante (H2) 2º cabrestante; Freno multdisco por muelles; Resolver integrado (indicador de rotación del cabrestante);
Incl. acoples rápidos y rack de transporte.
Aire acondicionado Aire acondicionado en cabina de grúa con 5 kW de potencia nominal de refrigeración.
Manipulación
Control remoto Control de los movimientos de la superestructura mediante control remoto inalámbrico.
Desplazamiento desde Control del vehículo desde la cabina de grúa, permite mover la máquina preparada, incluso con carga.
cabina de grúa
Limitador del rango Visualización y programación de los límites del radio de trabajo mediante IC-1.
de trabajo
IC-1 Plus Sistema de control de grúa inteligente para operación de pluma principal que permite capacidades
de carga superiores, especialmente sobre estabilizadores. Permite el uso seguro de la capacidad total
de la grúa, incluso en configuraciones asimétricas de los estabilizadores. Los estabilizadores pueden
ser posicionados independientemente. Precálculo de la capacidad para ángulo de giro +/- 30° y zona
de radio. Simulación de elevación en cabina.
Extensiones
MS (runner) 1 m; Plumín variable con angulamiento manual; 2 poleas, para capacidad de carga máx. de 24,0 t;
Incl. caja de transporte abierta para el transporte del Runner MS.
Bloques de gancho
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg); Bloque de gancho con lastre ajustable y gancho doble; uso variable como
bloque de gancho de 1 y 3 poleas; blanco con franjas rojas de advertencia.
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg); Bloque de gancho con lastre ajustable y gancho simple; uso variable como
Bloque de gancho 20-1-18-E (300 kg); Bloque de gancho con gancho simple; blanco con franjas rojas de advertencia.
20-1-18-E
Gancho 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg); red.
Más equipamiento adicional a petición.

Los valores de peso pueden ser diferentes a los indicados dependiendo de la configuración de viaje, equipamiento y tolerancia
de los pesos de los componentes.
31

Descrição técnica AC 55-3
Máquina básica
Equipamento chasis
Motor 260-4 MTU 6R1000; motor Diesel; 260 kW / 2200 rpm (348 HP), torque 1400 Nm /1200-1600 rpm; O motor
atende a Euromot 4 / Tier 4F; sistema de descarga todo em aço inoxidável com catalisador SCR.
Tanque de combustível 390 l Diesel (menos óleo de canola / biodiesel); tanque de 40 l de Ad-Blue.
Transmissão AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic; câmbio automático com 12 marchas à frente e 2 à ré; caixa de transferência de 2 estágios
com marcha fora-de-estrada e bloqueio longitudinal selecionáveis.
Eixos 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6; 3 eixos, eixos 1 e 3 movidos e equipados com bloqueio transversal selecionável; Todos os
eixos esterçáveis.
Suspensão Suspensão hidropneumática com compensação da carga no eixo; bloqueio hidráulico; alternativa:
compensação manual ou automática.
Direção Direção hidráulica de duplo circuito Servocom com bomba de emergência; direção ativa no eixo traseiro.
Freios Freio de serviço com duplo circuito pneumático e sistema antibloqueio atuando em todas as rodas;
freios a disco; adicional, freio motor de dupla velocidade; freio de estacionamento por ação de mola.
Pneus tamanho Pneus tamanho 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); aros de aço 9,5-25/1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE 170F; ou similar.
385/95 R25 (14.00R25)
Cabine 2550 Tipo 2,55 m; assento do motorista regulável; descansos para os braços e suspensão pneumática;
assento do copiloto; altura e inclinação do volante reguláveis; janelas com vidro elétrico; vidros fumê;
retrovisores elétricos com desembaçador; instalação para rádio.
Calefação dependente Calefação dependente do motor com água sob 12 kW de potência térmica.
Faróis dianteiros Com facho baixo, facho alto, luzes de serviço diurno.
Estabilizadores Modelo de 4 pontos em H; movimento vertical e horizontal totalmente hidráulico; opção de nivela-
mento manual ou automático; 3 bases para estabilizadores: 3,00 m, 4,50 m e 6,50 m.
Patolas 020 4 patolas redondas A = 0,20 m 2 com posição de transporte no cilindro vertical.
Monitoração da base Monitoração individual do curso horizontal; alerta de desvio na cabine do guindaste.
sobre os estabilizadores
Indicador de carga nos A carga nos estabilizadores é indicada na cabine do operador e na caixa de controle dos estabilizadores.
estabilizadores
Sistema imobilizador Impede a movimentação sem controle do veículo; inclui 5 chaves de ignição.
eletrônico
Adaptador para Pino de enchimento dos pneus para calibragem automática das rodas.
calibragem dos pneus
Marcação de segurança Faixas refletoras contínuas nas laterais e na traseira do chassi.
no entorno
Equipamento superestrutura
Lança telescópica HA50 10,3 - 50 m; sistema telescópico automático com cilindro único; acessórios para todos os equipa
mentos e extensões; 3 roldanas integradas na cabeça da lança, capacidade máx. de 35,6 t.
Elevação da lança 1 pistão elevatório com válvula automática de frenagem da descida.
Acionamento da rotação Unidade da engrenagem de giro única com freio multidisco por ação de mola.
H1 Guincho com freio multidisco por ação de mola; resolvedor (indicador de rotação do guincho).
Contrapeso de 6,0 t 6,0 t; 3 peças; sistema automático de instalação; pronto para o tráfego rodoviário, 12 t de limite de
carga por eixo.
Sistema de controle Habilitando 4 movimentos de trabalho simultâneos; controles elétricos da pilotagem por 2 comandos
eletroproporcionais biaxiais; diferentes modos de controle selecionáveis por circuitos hidráulicos.
Equipamentos de IC-1, com indicador eletrônico integrado de momento de carga de acordo com a EN13000; monitor
segurança colorido apresentando as condições de operação no momento, tabelas de carga, indicador de falha;
lâmpadas indicadoras do nível de capacidade; indicador de dados do guindaste.
Indicação de altura do Apresentação e condição de programar a altura do gancho H1 e/ou H2 pelo IC-1.
gancho
Cabine 875 Tipo 875; inclinação infinitamente variável até 16°; janela traseira corrediça; janela dianteira basculante;
plataforma lateral extensível, plataforma frontal; corrimãos; vidro de segurança fumê; quebra-sol tipo
cortina; instalação para rádio.
Calefação independente Calefação por água quente, independente do motor, com 5 kW de potência térmica.
do motor
Anemômetro Removível, pode ser usado com todas as extensões.
32

Equipamentos adicionais
Chasis
Eixos 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6; todos esterçáveis, eixos 1 e 3 com tração permanente, eixo 2 com o câmbio, todos equipados
com bloqueio transversal selecionável.
Freio auxiliar sem desgaste Freio auxiliar sem desgaste por corrente parasita no 3º eixo.
Ar condicionado Ar condicionado na cabine do veículo com 7 kW de potência de refrigeração nominal.
Superestrutura
2. guincho (H2) 2. guincho; com freio multidisco por ação de mola; resolvedor (indicador de rotação do guincho)
integrado; inclui engates rápidos e plataforma de transporte.
Ar condicionado Ar condicionado na cabine do guindaste com 5 kW de potência refrigerante nominal.
Manejo
Controle remoto Controle dos movimentos da superestrutura por controle remoto sem fio.
Movimentação de fora Controle do veículo fora da cabine da grua, permite mover a máquina quando montada, mesmo com
da cabine da grua carga.
Limitador da faixa Exibição e capacidade de programação dos limites da faixa de trabalho pelo IC-1.
de trabalho
IC-1 Plus Sistema inteligente de controle do guindaste para a operação da lança principal permitindo maiores
capacidades de içamento especialmente sobre estabilizadores. Permite o emprego seguro da
capacidade integral do guindaste mesmo em configurações assimétricas dos estabilizadores.
Os estabilizadores podem ser posicionados de maneira independente. Pré-cálculo da capacidade
para +/- 30° de ângulo de giro e área do raio. Simulação do içamento na cabine.
Extensões
MS (ponta de montagem) 1 m; ponta de montagem variável com deslocamento manual; 2 roldanas para capacidade de içamento
máxima de 24,0 t; inclui caixa de armazenagem aberta para o transporte da ponta.
Moitões
Gancho Vario 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg); moitão com lastro regulável e gancho chifre-de-carneiro, uso variável como
moitão de 1 e 3 roldanas; branco com faixas de sinalização vermelhas.
Gancho Vario 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg); moitão com lastro regulável e gancho simples, uso variável como moitão de
1 e 3 roldanas; branco com faixas de sinalização vermelhas.
Moitão 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 kg); moitão com gancho simples; branco com faixas de sinalização vermelhas.
Gancho 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg); vermelho.
Outros equipamentos adicionais mediante pedido!

Os dados referentes a peso podem divergir dos valores publicados com base nas configurações para estrada/viagem,
configuração do equipamento e tolerâncias no peso dos componentes.
33

Техническое описание AC 55-3
Кран в базовой комплектации

Шасси крана
Двигатель 260-4 Дизельный двигатель MTU 6R1000; 260 кВт / 2200 л/мин (348 л.с.), крутящий момент 1400 Нм /
1200-1600 л/мин; двигатель соответствует Евромот 4 / Tier 4F; выхлопная система из нержавеющей
стали в комплекте с катализатором SCR.
Топливный бак 390 л дизель (без RME / биодизель); 40 л Ad-Blue.
Коробка передач ZF AS-Tronic; автоматическая коробка передач с 12 скоростями вперед и 2 назад; 2-ступенчатая
AS-Tronic раздаточная коробка с отключаемым внедорожным приводом и переключаемой продольной
блокировкой.
Оси 6 х 4 х 6 Оси 6 х 4 х 6; 3, оси 1 и 3 управляемые с отключаемой поперечной блокировкой; все мосты
управляемые.
Подвеска Гидропневматическая подвеска с компенсацией нагрузки на ось; с гидравлической блокировкой;
ручное или автоматическое выравнивание в качестве альтернативной опции.
Рулевое управление Гидравлическая двухконтурная система рулевого управления Servocom с аварийным насосом
управления; активное рулевое управление заднего моста.
Тормоза Пневматическая двухконтурная рабочая тормозная система с системой антиблокировки на
все колеса; дисковые тормоза; дополнительный быстрый декомпрессионный тормоз;
Подпружиненный стояночный тормоз.
Размер шин 385/95 R25 Шины размером 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); Стальной обод 9,5-25 / 1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE 170F;
(14.00R25) или аналогичные.
Кабина 2550 Тип 2,55 м; сиденье водителя с регулировкой положения, подогревом, подлокотниками и
пневматической подвеской; сиденье второго водителя; руль, регулируемый по высоте и наклону;
стеклоподъемники; тонированные стекла; зеркала с электроприводом и обогревом; подготовка
под радио.
Обогреватель от двигателя водяной обогреватель от двигателя с мощностью нагрева 12 кВт.
Фары и подфарники Фары ближнего и дальнего света, дневные ходовые огни.
Выдвижные опоры Конструкция H-4-Point; выдвижение в вертикальном и горизонтальном направлениях полностью
за счет гидравлики; по выбору – ручная или автоматическая регулировка высоты подвески;
3 выносных опоры: 3,00 м, 4,50 м и 6,50 м.
Подушки опоры 020 4 круглые опорные подушки A = 0,20 м2, в транспортном положении укладываются на цилиндр
вертикального перемещения.
Мониторинг базы опор Индивидуальный мониторинг горизонтального положения; предупреждение об отклонении в
кабине крана.
Индикатор нагрузки Нагрузка на опоры отображается на дисплее в кабине крана и на щите управления опорами.
выдвижных опор
Электронный Предотвращает неконтролируемое включение двигателя и движение крана; включает 5 ключа
иммобилайзер зажигания.
Вентиль от пневмосистемы Вентиль подкачки шин от пневмосистемы для автоматической подкачки шин.
для подкачки шин
Маркировка безопасности Непрерывные светоотражающие полосы по бокам корпуса и сзади.
контура
Надстройка крана
Телескопическая стрела 10,3 м - 50 м; единый цилиндр системы телескопирования, автоматическое телескопирование;
HA50 точки подключения для всего навесного оборудования и удлинителей; 3 шкива интегрированные
в головке стрелы с макс. грузоподъемностью 35,6 т.
Изменение вылета стрелы 1 цилиндр изменения вылета с клапаном автоматического грузоупорного тормоза.
Поворотный привод Единый поворотный механизм с подпружиненным многодисковым тормозом.
H1 Лебедка с подпружиненным многодисковым тормозом; резольвер (индикатор вращения лебедки).
Противовес 6,0 т 6,0 т; 3 штуки; автоматическая система монтажа подъемной стрелы; полностью пригоден для
перевозки по шоссе с предельной нагрузкой 12 т на ось.
Система управления Одновременное выполнение 4 рабочих движений; электронная система пилотного управления с
помощью 2 двух-осевых джойстиков; выбор различных режимов управления для гидравлических
контуров.
Дополнительные Электронная система управления краном IC-1 со встроенным электронным индикатором
устройства грузового момента в соответствии с EN13000; цветной дисплей; отображение текущих условий
эксплуатации, графики нагрузки, индикатор неисправности; сигнализаторы ограничителя
грузового момента; регистратор данных работы крана.
Индикация высоты под Отображение и программирование высоты под крюком электронной системой управления IC-1
крюком для лебедки H1 и/или H2.
Кабина 875 Типа 875; бесступенчатый наклон до 16 °; раздвижные окна сзади; складное переднее окно;
выдвижная боковая подножка, передняя подножка; поручни; тонированное безопасное стекло;
опускаемый солнцезащитный козырек; подготовка для радио.
Обогреватель Водяной обогреватель независимый от двигателя мощностю обогрева 5 кВт.
независимый от двигателя
Анемометр Съемный, для использования на любом удлинителе.
34

Дополнительное оборудование
Оси 6 х 6 х 6 Оси 6 х 6 х 6; 3, все 3 оси управляемые, оси 1 и 3 неотключаемые, ось 2 отключаемая, все оси с
отключаемой поперечной блокировкой.
Неизнашиваемый Неизнашиваемый вспомогательный вихретоковый тормоз на 3-й оси.
вспомогательный тормоз
Кондиционер Кондиционер в кабине шасси с номинальной мощностью охлаждения 7 кВт.
2. Лебедка (H2) Лебедка № 2 с подпружиненным многодисковым тормозом; встроенный резольвер (индикатор
вращения лебедки); включает быстроразъемные соединения и транспортировочную полку.
Кондиционер Кондиционер в кабине крана с номинальной мощностью охлаждения 5 кВт.
Обработка
Дистанционное Управление движением надстройки крана через радиопульт дистанционного управления.
управление
Перемещение шасси с Управление перемещением шасси крана из кабины крана позволяет движение крана в полностью
управлением из кабины собранном виде, даже под нагрузкой.
крана
Ограничитель рабочего Отображение и программирование пределов рабочего диапазона электронной системой
диапазона управления IC-1.
IC-1 Plus Интеллектуальная система управления краном, предназначенная для управления основной
стрелой, позволяет увеличение грузоподъемности особенно при использовании опор.
Позволяет безопасное использование полной грузоподъемности крана даже в асимметричных
конфигурациях выносных опор. Раздельная установка выносных опор. Расчетная грузоподъемность
в пределах угла поворота +/- 30° и рабочей зоны для конкретного радиуса. Моделирование
подъема в кабине.
Удлинители
MS (с подвижным блоком) 1 м; дополнительная сборная стрела изменяемой длины с ручной установкой угла сдвига;
2 шкива, макс. грузоподъемность 24,0 т; в комплект входит открытый ящик для укладки Runner MS
при транспортировке.
Крюкоблоки
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 кг); крюкоблок с регулируемым балластом и двойным крюком,
используется для различных целей в качестве крюкоблока с 1- и 3 шкивами; сигнальная
маркировка из белых и красных полос.
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 кг); крюкоблок с регулируемым балластом и одиночным крюком,
используется для различных целей в качестве крюкоблока с 1- и 3 шкивами; сигнальная
маркировка из белых и красных полос.
Крюкоблок 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 кг); крюкоблок с одиночным крюком; сигнальная маркировка из белых и красных
полос.
Крюк 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 кг); красный.
Другое дополнительное оборудование по запросу!

Вес может отличаться от заявленного в зависимости от транспортировочной/дорожной конфигурации, конфигурации
оборудования и допусков на вес компонентов.
35

October 2017. Product specifications and prices are subject to change without notice or obligation. The photographs and/or drawings in this document are for
illustrative purposes only. Refer to the appropriate Operator’s Manual for instructions on the proper use of this equipment. Failure to follow the corresponding
Operator’s Manual when using our equipment or to otherwise act responsibly may result in serious injury or death. The only warranty applicable to our
equipment is the standard written warranty applicable to the particular product and sale and Terex makes no other warranty, express or implied. Products
and services listed may be trademarks, service marks or trade-names of Terex Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in the USA and other countries. All rights
are reserved. Terex, Demag and Above, Ahead, Always are trademarks of or licensed by Terex Corporation or its subsidiaries.
Oktober 2017. Irrtum und Änderungen der Produktspezifikationen vorbehalten. Die in diesem Dokument enthaltenen Fotos und/oder Zeichnungen dienen rein
anschaulichen Zwecken. Für den sachgemäßen Gebrauch der Maschinen ist das entsprechende Bedienerhandbuch heranzuziehen. Unsachgemäßer Umgang
mit bzw. unsachgemäßer Einsatz unserer Maschinen kann zu schweren gesundheitlichen Schäden bis hin zum Tod führen. Für unsere Produkte wird ausschließ-
lich die entsprechende, schriftlich niedergelegte Standardgarantie gewährt. Terex leistet keinerlei darüber hinausgehende Garantie, weder ausdrücklich noch
stillschweigend. Die genannten Produkte und Dienstleistungen sind in den USA und anderen Ländern ggf. Marken, Dienstleistungsmarken oder Handelsnamen
der Terex Corporation und/oder ihrer Tochtergesellschaften. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Terex, Demag und Above, Ahead, Always sind Marken in Eigentum oder
Lizenz der Terex Corporation bzw. ihrer Tochtergesellschaften.
Octobre 2017. Les caractéristiques et prix des produits peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans notification préalable. Les photographies ou dessins présentés
dans ce document servent uniquement à des fins d’illustration. Pour connaître les instructions relatives à l’utilisation correcte de cet équipement, veuillez vous
référer au manuel de l‘utilisateur correspondant. Le non-respect du manuel d’utilisateur correspondant lors de l’utilisation de notre équipement ou des actes
irresponsables risquent de provoquer de graves blessures, voire un décès. La seule garantie applicable à nos équipements est la garantie écrite standard
applicable au produit et à la vente spécifiques. Terex ne délivre aucune autre garantie, expresse ou implicite. Les produits et les services mentionnés peuvent
être des marques, des marques de service ou des appellations commerciales de Terex Corporation et/ou de ses filiales aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Tous droits réservés. Terex, Demag et Above, Ahead, Always sont des marques déposées, propriétés ou sous licence de Terex Corporation ou de ses filiales.
Ottobre 2017. Specifiche e prezzi dei prodotti sono soggetti a modifica senza preavviso o altro obbligo. Le fotografie e i disegni in questo documento hanno
esclusivamente scopo illustrativo. Consulta il Manuale dell‘operatore pertinente per trovare istruzioni per l‘utilizzo corretto di questo macchinario. La mancata
osservanza delle istruzioni contenute nel relativo Manuale dell‘operatore durante l‘uso del macchinario e altri comportamenti irresponsabili possono provocare
gravi lesioni, anche mortali. L‘unica garanzia applicabile ai nostri macchinari è la garanzia scritta standard applicabile al particolare prodotto e alla particolare
vendita e Terex è esonerata dal fornire qualsiasi altra garanzia, esplicita o implicita. I prodotti e servizi elencati possono essere dei marchi di fabbrica, marchi di
servizio o nomi commerciali di Terex Corporation, e/o delle rispettive società affiliate negli Stati Uniti d‘America e in molte altre nazioni. Tutti i diritti riservati.
Terex, Demag e Above, Ahead, Always sono marchi di proprietà o concessi in licenza da Terex Corporation o dalle sue società affiliate.
Octubre 2017. Las especificaciones y los precios de los productos están sujetos a cambios sin necesidad de previo aviso ni ninguna otra obligación. Las fotografías
y /o dibujos de este documento tienen un fin meramente ilustrativo. Consulte el correspondiente manual de instrucciones del operario para obtener más
información sobre el uso correcto de esta maquinaria. No respetar el manual del operario al utilizar la maquinaria o actuar de forma irresponsable puede
provocar lesiones graves e incluso mortales. La única garantía aplicable a nuestra maquinaria es la garantía escrita estándar de cada producto y venta. Terex
no amplía dicha garantía de forma expresa ni implícita. Los productos y servicios mencionados pueden ser marcas comerciales, marcas de servicio o nombres de
marca de Terex Corporation o de alguna de sus filiales en Estados Unidos y otros países. Todos los derechos reservados. Terex, Demag y Above, Ahead, Always
son marcas registradas o con licencia de Terex Corporation o de sus filiales.
Outubro 2017. Especificações e preços dos produtos sujeitos a alteração sem aviso prévio ou obrigações. As fotografias e/ou desenhos neste documento
são apenas para fins ilustrativos. Consulte o respectivo Manual do Operador para instruções sobre o uso correto deste equipamento. Deixar de acompanhar
o respectivo Manual do Operador ao usar o nosso equipamento ou, por qualquer outra forma, deixar de agir de maneira responsável pode resultar em lesões
corporais graves ou a morte. A única garantia aplicável ao nosso equipamento é a garantia padrão por escrito correspondente ao produto específico vendido.
A Terex não dá outras garantias, expressas ou implícitas. Os produtos e serviços listados podem ser marcas comerciais, marcas de serviço ou nomes-fantasia
da Terex Corporation e/ou suas subsidiárias nos EUA e em outros países. Todos os direitos reservados. Terex, Demag e Above, Ahead, Always são marcas
comerciais pertencentes ou licenciadas pela Terex Corporation ou suas subsidiárias.
Окртябрь 2017. года Технические характеристики и цены могут изменяться без предварительного уведомления и без каких-либо обязательств
для производителя. Фотографии и (или) чертежи в настоящем документе служат только в качестве иллюстраций. Инструкции по надлежащей
эксплуатации данного оборудования см. в соответствующем руководстве для оператора. Невыполнение указаний соответствующих руководств для
оператора при эксплуатации оборудования или другие безответственные действия могут повлечь серьезные травмы или смерть. Единственной
гарантией, действующей в отношении нашего оборудования, является стандартная форма письменной гарантии на данный тип оборудования
и на условия его продажи. Terex не дает никаких других гарантий: ни ясно выраженных, ни подразумеваемых. Перечисленные продукты и услуги
могут быть торговыми марками, знаками обслуживания или торговыми наименованиями Terex Corporation и / или ее дочерних компаний в США и
других странах. Все права защищены. Terex, Demag и Above, Ahead, Always являются торговыми марками, принадлежащими Terex Corporation или ее
дочерним компаниям или лицензированы ими.
© Terex Cranes 2017
TEREX CRANES GERMANY GMBH www.terex.com/cranes

Dinglerstraße 24 linkedin.com/company/demagmobilecranes
66482 Zweibrücken facebook.com/TerexCranes
Germany youtube.com/TerexCranesMarketing
E info.cranes@terex.com
T + 49 6332 830

AC 60-3
PRELIMINARY
All Terrain Crane

60 t Capacity class

Contents AC 60-3
Inhalt · Contenu · Indice · Contenido · Indice · Содержание
Page · Seite · Page · Pagina · Página · Página · Страница:
Dimensions · Abmessungen · Encombrement · Dimensioni · Dimensiones · Dimensões · Pазмеры. . ............................. 4

Counterweight · Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Contrappeso · Contrapeso · Contrapeso · Противовес....................... 5
Specifications · Technische Daten · Caractéristiques · Dati tecnici · Datos técnicos ·
Especificações · Технические характеристики............................................................................................................... 6
Equipment · Einrichtungen · Équipement · Equipaggiamento · Equipamiento · Equipamento · Оборудование. . ......... 7
HA
Main boom · Hauptausleger · Flèche principale · Braccio base · Pluma principal ·
Lança principal · Главная стрела............................................................................................................... 8
HAV
Folding swing-away jib · Klappspitze · Fléchette pliante · Punta rettratile · Plumín de a
rticulación ·
Jib articulada desdobrável · Складная убирающаяся дополнительная стрела................................... 14
MS
Runner · Montagespitze · Potence · Runner · Runner · Ponta de montagem (Runner) ·
Шкив......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Technical description · Technische Beschreibung · Descriptif technique · Descrizione tecnica ·

Descripción técnica · Descrição técnica · Техническое описание. . .................................................................................. 24
02

Key AC 60-3
Zeichenerklärung · Légende · Leggenda · Leyenda · Legenda ·
Условные обозначения
Counterweight · Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Working speeds · Arbeitsgeschwindigkeiten ·

Contrappeso · Contrapeso · Contrapeso · Противовес Vitesses opérationnelles · Velocità di lavoro ·
Velocidades de trabajo · Velocidades de trabalho ·
Lifting capacities on outriggers · Tragfähigkeiten, Рабочие скорости
abgestützt · Capacités de levage sur stabilisateurs ·
Portate su stabilizzatori · Capacidad de elevación Max. line pull · Max. Seilzug · Traction par câble max. ·
sobre apoyos · Capacidades de içamento sobre Tiro max · Tensión máx. de cable · Tração máx. por
estabilizadores · Грузоподъемность с выдвинутыми cabo · Максимальная грузоподъемность троса
опорами · 360°
Rope diameter · Seildurchmesser · Diamètre du câble ·
Radius · Ausladung · Portée · Sbraccio · Radio · Diametro della fune · Diámetro cable · Diâmetro do
Raio de operação · Рабочий радиус cabo · Диаметр троса
Main boom · Hauptausleger · Flèche principale · Rope length · Seillänge · Longueur de câble ·
Braccio base · Pluma principal · Lança principal · Lunghezza fune · Longitud cable · Compr. cabo ·
Главная стрела Длина троса
Folding swing-away jib · Klappspitze · Hook block (capacity - sheaves- rope diameter) ·
Fléchette pliante · Punta rettratile · Unterflasche (Tragfähigkeit - Rollen-Seildurchmesser) ·
Plumín de articulación · Jib articulada desdobrável · Crochet-moufle (capacité de charge-poulies-diamètre
Складная убирающаяся дополнительная стрела du câble) · Bozello (portata - pulegge- diametro fune) ·
Runner · Montagespitze · Potence · Runner · Runner · Gancho (capacidad de carga- poleas - diametro de
Ponta de montagem (Runner) · Шкив cable) · Moitão (capacidade - polias-diâmetro dos
cabos) · Крюкоблок (грузоподъемность - шкивы-
Max. axle loads · Max. Achslasten · Poids d’essieux диаметр троса)
max. · Pesi sugli assi max. · Carga por eje máx. ·
Carga máxima por eixo · Максимальная нагрузка Number of lines · Einscherung · Nombre de brins ·
на ось No max avvolgim. · Reenvíos máx. · Número de cabos ·
Кратность троса
Mechanism · Antrieb · Mécanisme · Funzioni ·
Mecanismos · Mecanismo · Механизм Possible load of hook block · Mögliche Traglast
Unterflasche · Charge possible de crochet-moufle ·
Tires · Bereifung · Pneumatiques · Pneumatici · Portata possibile di bozzello · Carga permitida de
Neumáticos · Pneus · Шины gancho · Carga possível do moitão · Допустимая
нагрузка на крюкоблок
Hook block · Unterflasche · Crochet-moufle ·
Bozzello · Gancho · Moitão · Крюкоблок Weight of hook block · Gewicht Unterflasche ·
Poids de crochet-moufle · Peso di bozello ·
Hoist · Hubwerk · Treuil de levage · Agano ·
Peso de gancho · Peso do moitão · Вес крюкоблока
Cabrestante · Guincho · подъем
Dolly · Nachläufer · Remorque · Vagoni · Tráiler · Distance head sheave axle – hook ground ·

Plataforma · Грузовая тележка Abstand Kopfrollenachse – Hakengrund · Distance
entre l’axe de la poulie de tête et le fond du crochet ·
Travel speed · Fahrgeschwindigkeit · Vitesse sur route · Distanza asse puleggia da testa – zona di ancoraggio
Velocità su strada · Velocidad en carretera · del gancio · Distancia eje de la polea de cabeza –
Velocidade em estrada · Скорость движения fondo del gancho · Distância entre o eixo da polia
da cabeça e o fundo do gancho · Расстояние от оси
Gradeability – road · Steigfähigkeit – Straße · шкива вершины до низа крюка
Capacité sur rampes – route · Pendenza superabile –
su strada · Pendiente franqueable – carretera · Number of sheaves in boom head · Anzahl der Rollen
Capacidade de rampa – rodovia · im Auslegerkopf · Nombre de poulies au niveau de
Способность преодолевать подъёмы – дорога la tête de flèche · Numero di pulegge nella testa
del braccio · Total de poleas en el cabezal de flecha ·
Gradeability – off road · Steigfähigkeit – Gelände · Número de polias na cabeça da lança ·
Capacité sur rampes – tous terrains · Pendenza Количество шкивов вершины стрелы
superabile – fuoristrada · Pendiente franqueable –
campo a través · Capacidade de rampa – fora da Supporting force · Stützkraft · Force de calage ·
estrada · Способность преодолевать подъемы – Carico degli stabilizzatori · Fuerza de apoyo ·
бездорожье Força de sustentação · Опорное усилие
Slewing · Drehwerk · Orientation · Rotazione · Length of stroke (support cylinders) · Stützhub ·
Unidad de giro · Giro · Поворот Longueur d’appui · Lunghezza corsa (cilindri di
stabilizzazone) · Longitud de carrera (cilindros de
Boom telescoping · Teleskopieren · Télescopage ·
soporte) · Distância de curso (cilindros de apoio) ·
Funzione telescopica · Despliegue telescópico ·
Длина хода (цилиндры опор)
Telescópica · Выдвижение/втягивание стрелы
Boom elevation · Ausleger-Winkelstellung ·
Relevage de flèche · Angolazione braccio · Elevación
de pluma · Elevação da lança · Угол подъема стрелы
03

Dimensions AC 60-3
Abmessungen · Encombrement · Dimensioni · Dimensiones ·
Dimensões · Размеры
* 385/95R25
** 445/95R25
(2) steering mode 2 · Lenkfunktion 2 · mode de direction 2 · modalità di sterzata 2 · modo de conducción 2 · modo de manobra 2 ·
Режим поворота 2
(3) steering mode 3* · Lenkfunktion 3* · mode de direction 3* · modalità di sterzata 3* · modo de conducción 3* ·
modo de manobra 3* · Режим поворота 3*
* outer turning radius, axle 1 · Wenderadius (außen) Achse 1 · Rayon de giration extérieur essieu 1 · raggio di sterzatura, esterno,
assale 1 · radio de giro exterior, eje 1 · raio de giro externo, eixo 1 · наружный радиус поворота, ось 1
** inner turning radius, axle 1 · Wenderadius (innen) Achse 1 · Rayon de giration intérieur essieu 1 · raggio di sterzatura, interno,
assale 1 · radio de giro interior, eje 1 · raio de giro interno, eixo 1 · внутренний радиус поворота, ось 1
see page 6 · siehe Seite 6 · voir page 6 · vedere a pagina 6 · Véase p. 6 · ver página 6 · см. на стр. 6
04

Counterweight AC 60-3
Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Contrappeso · Contrapeso ·
Contrapeso · противовес
Parts · Teile · Pièces · Pezzi · Piezas · Peças · Детали
When using H2, counterweight „g“ is not applicable · Wenn H2 verwendet wird,
entfällt Gegengewicht „g“ · Avec H2, contrepoids «g» non compatible ·
H2 è incompatibile con il contrappeso „g“ · Al usar H2 no es aplicable el
contrapeso „g“ · Usando o H2, o contrapeso „g“ não se aplica ·
При использовании H2 противовес „g“ не применяется
Configurations · Konfigurationen · Configurations · Configurazioni ·

Configuraciones · Configurações · Варианты конфигурации
a 0,6 t b 0,9 t c 3,8 t d 2,7 t e 0,9 t f 1,9 t g 1,3 t
3,2 t X X
3,8 t X X X
4,1 t X X X
4,7 t X X X X
5,6 t X X X X X
6,8 t X X X X
8,5 t X X X X X
9,4 t X X X X X X
11,2 t X X X X X X
12,1 t X X X X X X X
05

Specifications AC 60-3
Technische Daten · Caractéristiques · Dati tecnici ·
Datos técnicos · Especificações · Технические характеристики
Total
< 9,1 t on request · auf Anfrage · sur demande · su richiesta · bajo demanda · a pedido · по заявке X
12,0 t 36 t 6x4x6 445/95R25 50-3B-18 14,7 t – –
12,0 t 36 t 6x6x6 445/95R25 50-3-18 13,8 t – –
12,0 t 36 t 6x6x6 445/95R25 50-3B-18 13,2 t 16 m –
13,0 t 39 t 6x6x6 445/95R25 50-3-18 15,6 t 16 m –
15,5 t 46 t 6x6x6 445/95R25 50-3-18 12,1 t 16 m –
1 Highway > 45 km/h · Landstraße > 45 km/h · Route > 45 km/h · Strade extraurbane > 45 km/h · Carretera > 45 km/h ·
Rodovia > 45 km/h · Дорога > 45 км/ч
City < 45 km/h · Stadt < 45 km/h · Ville < 45 km/h · Città < 45 km/h · Ciudad < 45 km/h · Urbano < 45 km/h ·
2
Город < 45 км/ч
Minimum turning radius < 20 km/h · Minimaler Kurvenradius < 20 km/h · Rayon de courbure minimum < 20 km/h ·
3* Raggio minimo di sterzatura < 20 km/h · Radio mínimo de giro < 20 km/h · Raio mínimo de giro < 20 km/h ·
Минимальный радиус поворота < 20 км/ч
4* Off-wall · Wand-weg · Hors mur · Marcia laterale · Desempotrado · Longe da parede · от стены
Crab steer mode · Hundegang · Marche en crabe · Marcia a granchio · Marcha cangrejo · Modo de translação lateral ·
5*
Режим поворота на всех колесах «крабовый ход»
All wheel steering · Allradlenkung · Transmission intégrale · Sterzatura integrale · Dirección en todas las ruedas ·
6*
Todas as rodas exterçantes · Рулевое управление со всеми управляемыми колесами
*must be activated · muss angewählt werden · activation nécessaire · deve essere attivato · debe activarse · precisa ser ativado · должно быть активировано
32 t 40 t kg
85 km/h1)
640 mm 700 mm
1) Depending on tire type, size and country specific legislation · Abhängig 1 16,8 18-0-18 3 170 kg 1,00 m
von Reifentyp, Reifengröße sowie länderspezifischer Gesetzgebung · En
fonction du type et de la taille de pneus ainsi que de la législation locale ·
In base al tipo e alla dimensione dei pneumatici, nonché alle normative
locali applicabili · Según tipo de neumático, tamaño y legislación del paía ·
Dependendo do tipo e t amanho do pneu e da legislação específica do país · 2 13,4 20-1-18 3 300 kg 1,80 m
Зависит от типа шин, размера и требований законодательства страны
3 20,0 20-1-18 3 300 kg 1,80 m

385/95 R 25 445 /95 R 25 525 /80 R 25
14.00 R 25 16.00 R 25 20.50 R 25
4 26,6 50-3-18 3 550 kg 1,80 m
59 % 53 % 53 %
> 80 % > 80 % > 80 % 5 33,1 50-3-18 3 550 kg 1,80 m
6 39,5 50-3-18 3 550 kg 1,80 m
120 m/min 66,9 kN 18 mm 240 m
120 m/min 66,9 kN 18 mm 240 m
1,8 min-1
ca. 490 s
(10,4-50 m)
ca. 50 s
(-5° - 82°)
06

Equipment AC 60-3
Einrichtungen · Équipement · Equipaggiamento · Equipamiento ·
Equipamento · Oборудование
HAV16 1150 kg
400 kg 750 kg
MS
205 kg
* 385/95R25
** 445/95R25
07

HA AC 60-3
08

HA AC 60-3
12,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,4m* 10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
m t t t t t t t t t t t t t m
3 60,0** - - - - - - - - - - - - 3
3 39,5 39,5 39,5 39,5 38,7 33,9 - - - - - - - 3
3,5 39,5 39,5 39,1 37,6 36,3 33,3 - - - - - - - 3,5
4 38,1 37,7 36,5 35,1 34,0 32,4 29,2 - - - - - - 4
4,5 35,6 34,7 34,2 32,9 31,8 30,7 27,8 - - - - - - 4,5
5 33,4 32,2 32,2 30,9 29,8 29,2 26,3 19,6 - - - - - 5
6 29,2 27,9 28,4 27,6 26,6 26,2 24,3 18,5 15,5 - - - - 6
7 24,4 24,0 24,6 24,7 24,0 23,6 22,7 17,2 15,1 12,4 - - - 7
8 - - 21,3 21,7 21,8 20,7 19,3 16,6 14,6 12,1 10,0 - - 8
9 - - 17,8 18,1 18,1 17,8 16,7 15,9 13,4 11,9 9,7 8,2 - 9
10 - - 15,0 15,3 15,3 15,1 14,6 14,5 12,3 11,4 9,6 8,1 6,1 10
12 - - - 11,5 11,5 11,8 11,6 11,3 10,5 9,9 9,2 7,9 6,0 12
14 - - - 9,1 9,2 9,4 9,1 8,9 9,0 8,4 8,2 7,6 5,8 14
16 - - - - 7,7 7,6 7,4 7,6 7,3 7,3 7,0 6,9 5,6 16
18 - - - - 6,5 6,4 6,5 6,3 6,2 6,0 5,9 5,7 5,4 18
20 - - - - - 5,4 5,5 5,3 5,3 5,2 4,9 4,9 4,6 20
22 - - - - - - 4,7 4,7 4,5 4,4 4,2 4,2 3,9 22
24 - - - - - - 4,1 4,0 3,9 3,8 3,7 3,5 3,3 24
26 - - - - - - - 3,5 3,3 3,2 3,2 3,0 2,7 26
28 - - - - - - - 3,1 2,9 2,7 2,8 2,5 2,3 28
30 - - - - - - - - 2,5 2,4 2,4 2,1 1,9 30
32 - - - - - - - - 2,2 2,0 2,0 1,8 1,6 32
34 - - - - - - - - - 1,7 1,7 1,5 1,3 34
36 - - - - - - - - - - 1,5 1,3 1,0 36
38 - - - - - - - - - - 1,3 1,0 0,8 38
40 - - - - - - - - - - - 0,8 - 40
1) 14,4 14,4 10,6 8,3 6,3 4,8 3,8 2,9 2,1 1,5 1,1 - - 1)
8,5 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 39,5 39,5 39,5 38,7 33,9 - - - - - - - 3
4 37,4 36,5 35,1 34,0 32,4 29,2 - - - - - - 4
5 31,9 32,2 30,9 29,8 29,2 26,3 19,6 - - - - - 5
6 27,1 27,7 27,6 26,6 25,8 23,9 18,5 15,5 - - - - 6
7 22,3 23,2 23,7 22,6 21,2 19,7 17,2 15,1 12,4 - - - 7
8 - 18,6 19,0 18,9 17,8 16,6 16,4 14,6 12,1 10,0 - - 8
9 - 15,3 15,6 15,6 15,3 15,1 14,1 13,1 11,9 9,7 8,2 - 9
10 - 12,8 13,1 13,1 13,4 13,2 12,4 11,8 10,9 9,6 8,1 6,1 10
12 - - 9,8 10,2 10,1 9,9 9,9 9,6 9,3 8,8 7,9 6,0 12
14 - - 7,9 8,0 8,0 8,1 7,9 7,8 7,6 7,3 6,9 5,8 14
16 - - - 6,5 6,6 6,6 6,5 6,3 6,2 6,0 5,9 5,4 16
18 - - - 5,4 5,5 5,4 5,4 5,2 5,1 5,1 4,9 4,4 18
20 - - - - 4,6 4,6 4,5 4,3 4,2 4,3 4,0 3,6 20
22 - - - - - 3,9 3,8 3,7 3,5 3,6 3,3 2,9 22
24 - - - - - 3,3 3,3 3,1 3,0 3,0 2,8 2,4 24
26 - - - - - - 2,8 2,6 2,5 2,5 2,3 2,0 26
28 - - - - - - 2,4 2,2 2,1 2,1 1,9 1,6 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,9 1,7 1,7 1,5 1,3 30
32 - - - - - - - 1,6 1,4 1,4 1,2 1,0 32
34 - - - - - - - - 1,2 1,2 1,0 0,7 34
36 - - - - - - - - - 1,0 0,7 - 36
38 - - - - - - - - - 0,8 - - 38
1) 14,4 10,4 7,2 5,3 4,0 3,0 2,3 1,6 1,0 0,7 - - 1)
* over rear · nach hinten · sur l’arrière · sul retro · hacia atrás · para trás · сзади
09

HA AC 60-3
5,6 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 39,5 39,5 39,5 38,7 33,9 - - - - - - - 3
4 37,3 36,5 35,1 34,0 32,4 29,2 - - - - - - 4
5 31,5 32,1 30,9 29,8 28,8 26,3 19,6 - - - - - 5
6 26,0 26,7 25,9 24,4 22,7 20,9 18,5 15,5 - - - - 6
7 19,4 20,6 21,0 19,8 18,6 17,7 16,8 15,1 12,4 - - - 7
8 - 16,2 16,6 16,6 15,6 15,3 14,3 13,6 12,1 10,0 - - 8
9 - 13,3 13,6 13,6 14,0 13,2 12,5 12,0 11,2 9,7 8,2 - 9
10 - 11,1 11,4 11,9 11,8 11,5 11,2 10,6 10,2 9,3 8,1 6,1 10
12 - - 8,7 8,9 8,8 8,9 8,7 8,6 8,2 7,6 7,2 6,0 12
14 - - 6,8 6,9 7,0 7,0 6,9 6,7 6,6 6,5 6,0 5,5 14
16 - - - 5,6 5,7 5,6 5,5 5,4 5,3 5,3 4,9 4,3 16
18 - - - 4,6 4,7 4,6 4,5 4,4 4,3 4,3 3,9 3,4 18
20 - - - - 3,9 3,8 3,8 3,6 3,5 3,5 3,2 2,7 20
22 - - - - - 3,2 3,2 3,0 2,9 2,9 2,6 2,2 22
24 - - - - - 2,7 2,6 2,4 2,3 2,3 2,1 1,7 24
26 - - - - - - 2,2 2,0 1,9 1,9 1,7 1,3 26
28 - - - - - - 1,9 1,7 1,5 1,6 1,3 1,0 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,4 1,2 1,3 1,0 0,8 30
32 - - - - - - - 1,1 1,0 1,0 0,8 - 32
34 - - - - - - - - 0,8 0,8 - - 34
1) 14,4 9,0 6,2 4,5 3,4 2,4 1,8 1,1 - - - - 1)
4,7 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 39,5 39,5 39,5 38,7 33,9 - - - - - - - 3
4 37,2 36,5 35,1 34,0 32,4 29,2 - - - - - - 4
5 31,2 31,8 30,9 28,9 27,6 25,2 19,6 - - - - - 5
6 25,0 25,7 24,9 23,4 21,7 20,0 18,5 15,5 - - - - 6
7 18,5 19,8 20,1 19,0 17,7 17,3 16,1 14,6 12,4 - - - 7
8 - 15,5 15,9 15,8 15,4 14,6 13,6 13,2 11,8 10,0 - - 8
9 - 12,7 13,0 13,0 13,4 12,6 12,0 11,4 11,0 9,7 8,2 - 9
10 - 10,6 10,9 11,3 11,3 11,0 10,7 10,3 9,8 9,2 8,1 6,1 10
12 - - 8,3 8,4 8,6 8,5 8,4 8,2 7,7 7,6 7,0 6,0 12
14 - - 6,4 6,6 6,7 6,6 6,6 6,4 6,2 6,1 5,7 5,2 14
16 - - - 5,3 5,4 5,3 5,3 5,1 5,0 5,0 4,5 4,0 16
18 - - - 4,3 4,4 4,4 4,3 4,1 4,0 4,0 3,6 3,1 18
20 - - - - 3,7 3,6 3,6 3,4 3,3 3,3 2,9 2,5 20
22 - - - - - 3,0 2,9 2,8 2,6 2,7 2,4 1,9 22
24 - - - - - 2,5 2,4 2,3 2,1 2,2 1,9 1,5 24
26 - - - - - - 2,0 1,8 1,7 1,7 1,5 1,1 26
28 - - - - - - 1,7 1,5 1,4 1,4 1,2 0,8 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,2 1,1 1,1 0,9 - 30
32 - - - - - - - 1,0 0,8 0,9 - - 32
1) 14,4 8,6 5,9 4,2 3,1 2,3 1,6 1,0 - - - - 1)
10

HA AC 60-3
3,8 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 39,5 39,5 39,5 38,7 33,9 - - - - - - - 3
4 37,1 36,5 35,1 34,0 32,4 29,2 - - - - - - 4
5 30,8 31,4 30,1 28,1 26,4 24,1 19,6 - - - - - 5
6 23,9 24,6 23,8 22,3 20,7 19,1 17,9 15,5 - - - - 6
7 17,6 18,9 19,2 18,1 16,9 16,5 15,3 14,2 12,4 - - - 7
8 - 14,8 15,2 15,1 14,9 14,0 13,2 12,6 11,5 10,0 - - 8
9 - 12,1 12,4 12,9 12,8 12,0 11,7 11,2 10,7 9,5 8,2 - 9
10 - 10,1 10,7 10,8 10,8 10,5 10,2 9,8 9,3 8,7 8,1 6,1 10
12 - - 7,9 8,0 8,1 8,1 8,0 7,7 7,3 7,1 6,7 6,0 12
14 - - 6,1 6,2 6,3 6,3 6,2 6,1 5,9 5,8 5,3 4,8 14
16 - - - 5,0 5,1 5,0 5,0 4,8 4,7 4,6 4,2 3,7 16
18 - - - 4,1 4,2 4,1 4,1 3,9 3,8 3,7 3,3 2,9 18
20 - - - - 3,5 3,4 3,3 3,1 3,0 3,0 2,7 2,2 20
22 - - - - - 2,8 2,7 2,5 2,4 2,5 2,1 1,7 22
24 - - - - - 2,3 2,3 2,1 2,0 2,0 1,7 1,3 24
26 - - - - - - 1,9 1,7 1,6 1,6 1,3 1,0 26
28 - - - - - - 1,5 1,3 1,2 1,2 1,0 - 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,1 0,9 1,0 0,7 - 30
32 - - - - - - - 0,9 0,7 0,7 - - 32
1) 14,2 8,1 5,5 4,0 2,9 2,1 1,4 0,8 - - - - 1)
3,2 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 39,5 39,5 39,5 38,7 33,9 - - - - - - - 3
4 37,1 36,5 35,1 34,0 32,4 29,2 - - - - - - 4
5 30,5 31,2 29,2 27,8 25,6 23,4 19,6 - - - - - 5
6 23,1 23,8 23,1 21,6 20,1 18,9 17,7 15,5 - - - - 6
7 17,0 18,2 18,6 17,5 16,6 16,0 14,8 14,2 12,4 - - - 7
8 - 14,3 14,7 14,6 14,4 13,5 12,9 12,2 11,4 10,0 - - 8
9 - 11,6 12,0 12,4 12,3 11,6 11,3 10,9 10,3 9,4 8,2 - 9
10 - 9,7 10,3 10,4 10,4 10,4 10,1 9,5 9,0 8,4 7,9 6,1 10
12 - - 7,6 7,7 7,9 7,8 7,7 7,5 7,1 6,9 6,4 5,9 12
14 - - 5,9 6,0 6,1 6,1 6,0 5,8 5,7 5,5 5,1 4,5 14
16 - - - 4,8 4,9 4,8 4,8 4,6 4,5 4,4 4,0 3,4 16
18 - - - 3,9 4,0 3,9 3,9 3,7 3,6 3,5 3,1 2,6 18
20 - - - - 3,3 3,2 3,2 3,0 2,9 2,9 2,5 2,0 20
22 - - - - - 2,7 2,6 2,4 2,3 2,3 2,0 1,5 22
24 - - - - - 2,2 2,1 1,9 1,8 1,8 1,5 1,1 24
26 - - - - - - 1,7 1,5 1,4 1,4 1,2 0,8 26
28 - - - - - - 1,4 1,2 1,1 1,1 0,9 - 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,0 0,8 0,8 - - 30
32 - - - - - - - 0,8 - - - - 32
1) 13,7 7,8 5,3 3,8 2,8 1,9 1,3 0,7 - - - - 1)
11

HA AC 60-3
12,1 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 39,5 39,5 39,5 38,7 33,9 - - - - - - - 3
4 33,2 33,7 33,7 33,5 30,8 28,6 - - - - - - 4
5 27,9 28,3 28,3 26,5 24,5 22,4 19,6 - - - - - 5
6 20,8 22,0 22,4 21,3 19,9 18,9 17,7 15,5 - - - - 6
7 15,9 16,9 17,2 17,2 16,6 16,1 15,0 14,2 12,4 - - - 7
8 - 13,5 13,8 14,1 14,2 13,8 13,1 12,5 11,5 10,0 - - 8
9 - 11,2 11,7 11,9 11,8 11,7 11,7 11,2 10,7 9,5 8,2 - 9
10 - 9,5 10,0 10,1 10,0 10,2 10,1 9,9 9,4 8,8 8,1 6,1 10
12 - - 7,5 7,6 7,7 7,7 7,6 7,5 7,4 7,3 6,9 6,0 12
14 - - 5,9 6,0 6,1 6,1 6,0 5,9 5,8 5,8 5,6 5,1 14
16 - - - 4,9 5,0 4,9 4,9 4,7 4,6 4,7 4,5 4,2 16
18 - - - 4,1 4,1 4,1 4,0 3,9 3,8 3,8 3,6 3,4 18
20 - - - - 3,5 3,4 3,4 3,2 3,1 3,1 3,0 2,8 20
22 - - - - - 2,9 2,8 2,7 2,6 2,6 2,4 2,2 22
24 - - - - - 2,5 2,4 2,3 2,2 2,2 2,0 1,8 24
26 - - - - - - 2,1 1,9 1,8 1,8 1,7 1,4 26
28 - - - - - - 1,8 1,6 1,5 1,5 1,4 1,1 28
30 - - - - - - - 1,4 1,3 1,3 1,1 0,8 30
32 - - - - - - - 1,2 1,0 1,0 0,8 - 32
34 - - - - - - - - 0,8 0,8 - - 34
1) 13,1 7,8 5,4 3,9 3,0 2,2 1,7 1,1 - - - - 1)
4,7 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 39,2 39,5 37,9 34,3 30,3 - - - - - - - 3
4 30,8 28,3 26,5 24,1 21,8 20,6 - - - - - - 4
5 19,8 21,0 19,8 18,4 17,5 16,2 15,3 - - - - - 5
6 13,8 15,0 15,3 15,1 14,3 13,5 12,7 11,8 - - - - 6
7 10,3 11,3 11,9 12,1 12,0 11,3 10,7 9,9 9,3 - - - 7
8 - 9,0 9,5 9,7 9,8 9,6 9,1 8,5 8,0 7,7 - - 8
9 - 7,3 7,8 8,0 8,1 8,0 7,9 7,3 6,9 6,6 6,1 - 9
10 - 6,1 6,6 6,7 6,8 6,8 6,7 6,4 6,0 5,8 5,3 4,8 10
12 - - 4,8 4,9 5,0 5,0 4,9 4,8 4,6 4,5 4,1 3,6 12
14 - - 3,7 3,8 3,9 3,8 3,8 3,6 3,5 3,5 3,2 2,6 14
16 - - - 3,0 3,0 3,0 3,0 2,8 2,7 2,7 2,3 1,8 16
18 - - - 2,4 2,4 2,4 2,3 2,2 2,1 2,1 1,7 1,3 18
20 - - - - 2,0 1,9 1,9 1,7 1,6 1,6 1,2 0,8 20
22 - - - - - 1,5 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,2 0,9 - 22
24 - - - - - 1,3 1,2 1,0 0,9 0,9 - - 24
26 - - - - - - 0,9 0,7 - - - - 26
1) 8,3 4,8 3,3 2,3 1,6 1,1 - - - - - - 1)
3,2 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 38,9 39,4 34,6 31,4 27,7 - - - - - - - 3
4 28,0 26,3 24,2 22,0 20,7 18,8 - - - - - - 4
5 17,9 19,1 18,0 17,2 16,0 15,1 14,1 - - - - - 5
6 12,4 13,5 14,2 13,7 13,1 12,3 11,5 10,7 - - - - 6
7 9,2 10,2 10,8 11,0 10,8 10,2 9,6 9,0 8,4 - - - 7
8 - 8,0 8,6 8,8 8,9 8,6 8,2 7,6 7,1 6,8 - - 8
9 - 6,5 7,0 7,2 7,3 7,2 7,1 6,6 6,1 5,9 5,4 - 9
10 - 5,4 5,9 6,0 6,1 6,1 6,0 5,7 5,3 5,1 4,6 4,1 10
12 - - 4,3 4,4 4,5 4,4 4,4 4,2 4,0 3,9 3,5 3,0 12
14 - - 3,2 3,3 3,4 3,4 3,3 3,2 3,1 3,0 2,6 2,0 14
16 - - - 2,6 2,7 2,6 2,6 2,4 2,3 2,3 1,8 1,3 16
18 - - - 2,0 2,1 2,1 2,0 1,9 1,8 1,7 1,3 0,8 18
20 - - - - 1,7 1,6 1,6 1,4 1,3 1,2 0,9 - 20
22 - - - - - 1,3 1,2 1,1 0,9 0,9 - - 22
24 - - - - - 1,0 0,9 0,7 - - - - 24
1) 7,4 4,3 2,9 2,0 1,4 0,8 - - - - - - 1)
12

HA AC 60-3
8,5 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
4 20,9 20,7 19,4 18,5 17,3 16,1 - - - - - - 4
5 14,1 15,2 15,4 14,6 13,9 13,0 12,2 - - - - - 5
6 10,3 11,3 11,9 11,9 11,4 10,7 10,2 9,5 - - - - 6
7 8,0 8,8 9,4 9,5 9,6 9,1 8,6 8,0 7,5 - - - 7
8 - 7,1 7,6 7,8 7,9 7,8 7,4 6,9 6,4 6,2 - - 8
9 - 5,9 6,3 6,5 6,6 6,5 6,4 6,0 5,6 5,4 4,9 - 9
10 - 4,9 5,4 5,5 5,6 5,5 5,5 5,2 4,8 4,7 4,3 3,8 10
12 - - 4,0 4,1 4,2 4,1 4,1 3,9 3,7 3,6 3,2 2,8 12
14 - - 3,0 3,1 3,2 3,2 3,1 3,0 2,9 2,8 2,4 1,9 14
16 - - - 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,4 2,3 2,2 2,1 1,8 1,3 16
18 - - - 2,0 2,0 2,0 1,9 1,8 1,7 1,6 1,2 0,8 18
20 - - - - 1,6 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,2 0,8 - 20
22 - - - - - 1,2 1,2 1,0 0,9 0,8 - - 22
24 - - - - - 1,0 0,9 - - - - - 24
1) 6,5 4,0 2,7 1,9 1,3 0,8 - - - - - - 1)
4,7 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 24,7 23,2 21,6 19,8 18,2 - - - - - - - 3
4 16,3 16,3 15,7 14,7 13,8 12,8 - - - - - - 4
5 10,8 11,9 12,1 11,5 10,9 10,2 9,5 - - - - - 5
6 7,8 8,7 9,3 9,3 8,9 8,4 7,9 7,2 - - - - 6
7 5,9 6,7 7,3 7,4 7,4 7,0 6,6 6,1 5,6 - - - 7
8 - 5,3 5,8 6,0 6,1 5,9 5,6 5,1 4,7 4,5 - - 8
9 - 4,3 4,8 4,9 5,0 5,0 4,8 4,4 4,0 3,9 3,5 - 9
10 - 3,6 4,0 4,1 4,2 4,2 4,1 3,8 3,4 3,3 2,9 2,4 10
12 - - 2,9 3,0 3,1 3,0 3,0 2,8 2,5 2,4 2,0 1,4 12
14 - - 2,1 2,2 2,3 2,3 2,2 2,1 1,8 1,7 1,2 0,7 14
16 - - - 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,2 1,1 0,7 - 16
18 - - - 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,2 1,0 0,8 - - - 18
20 - - - - 1,0 0,9 0,8 - - - - - 20
1) 4,7 2,8 1,9 1,2 0,7 - - - - - - - 1)
3,2 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO
10,4m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 22,1 20,8 19,5 17,8 16,4 - - - - - - - 3
4 14,4 14,6 14,1 13,2 12,4 11,4 - - - - - - 4
5 9,5 10,6 10,8 10,3 9,8 9,1 8,5 - - - - - 5
6 6,8 7,7 8,3 8,3 7,9 7,4 7,0 6,4 - - - - 6
7 5,0 5,9 6,4 6,6 6,6 6,2 5,8 5,3 4,9 - - - 7
8 - 4,6 5,1 5,3 5,4 5,2 4,9 4,4 4,1 3,9 - - 8
9 - 3,7 4,2 4,3 4,4 4,4 4,1 3,8 3,4 3,3 2,9 - 9
10 - 3,0 3,5 3,6 3,7 3,7 3,5 3,2 2,9 2,8 2,3 1,7 10
12 - - 2,4 2,6 2,6 2,6 2,6 2,3 2,0 1,9 1,4 0,9 12
14 - - 1,7 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,8 1,6 1,3 1,2 0,8 - 14
16 - - - 1,3 1,4 1,4 1,3 1,1 0,8 - - - 16
18 - - - 1,0 1,0 1,0 0,9 - - - - - 18
1) 4,0 2,3 1,5 0,9 - - - - - - - - 1)
13

HAV AC 60-3
14

HAV AC 60-3
12,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
50,0 m 45,4 m
8,5 m 16,0 m 8,5 m 16,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
m t t t t t t m t t t t t t
12 3,6 - - - - - 12 4,8 - - 2,9 - -
14 3,6 - - 2,2 - - 14 4,8 - - 2,9 - -
16 3,6 3,6 - 2,2 - - 16 4,8 4,8 - 2,9 - -
18 3,6 3,6 - 2,2 - - 18 4,8 4,8 4,8 2,9 - -
20 3,5 3,6 3,6 2,2 - - 20 4,4 4,7 4,6 2,9 2,9 -
22 3,4 3,5 3,6 2,2 2,2 - 22 3,7 4,0 4,3 2,9 2,9 -
24 2,8 3,1 3,4 2,2 2,2 - 24 3,2 3,3 3,6 2,8 2,8 2,5
26 2,3 2,6 2,9 2,1 2,2 2,2 26 2,7 3,0 3,1 2,5 2,7 2,4
28 1,9 2,2 2,4 1,7 2,2 2,2 28 2,3 2,5 2,7 2,1 2,5 2,4
30 1,5 1,8 2,0 1,3 1,8 2,2 30 1,9 2,1 2,3 1,7 2,2 2,3
32 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,0 1,5 1,9 32 1,6 1,7 1,9 1,4 1,8 2,1
34 1,0 1,2 1,3 0,8 1,2 1,5 34 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,2 1,5 1,8
36 0,7 0,9 1,0 - 0,9 1,3 36 1,0 1,2 1,2 0,9 1,3 1,6
38 - - 0,8 - 0,7 1,0 38 0,8 0,9 1,0 0,7 1,0 1,3
40 - - - - - 0,8 40 - - 0,7 - 0,8 1,0
42 - - - - - 0,8
41,9 m 38,4 m
8,5 m 16,0 m 8,5 m 16,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
10 5,9 - - - - - 9 7,3 - - 4,2 - -
12 5,9 - - 3,6 - - 10 7,3 - - 4,2 - -
14 5,9 5,9 - 3,6 - - 12 7,3 - - 4,2 - -
16 5,9 5,9 5,9 3,6 - - 14 7,3 7,3 - 4,1 - -
18 5,3 5,6 5,5 3,5 3,3 - 16 6,4 6,7 6,2 4,1 3,5 -
20 4,8 4,8 5,0 3,5 3,1 - 18 5,6 5,8 5,9 4,0 3,4 -
22 4,0 4,3 4,3 3,5 3,0 2,6 20 4,9 4,9 5,1 4,0 3,2 2,7
24 3,3 3,6 3,8 3,2 2,9 2,5 22 4,2 4,3 4,4 3,7 3,1 2,6
26 2,8 3,0 3,2 2,7 2,8 2,5 24 3,6 3,8 3,9 3,4 3,0 2,6
28 2,5 2,6 2,7 2,3 2,7 2,4 26 3,0 3,3 3,3 3,0 2,9 2,5
30 2,1 2,3 2,3 2,0 2,3 2,4 28 2,6 2,8 2,9 2,6 2,7 2,5
32 1,8 2,0 2,1 1,8 2,0 2,3 30 2,2 2,3 2,5 2,2 2,5 2,4
34 1,5 1,6 1,7 1,5 1,7 1,9 32 1,8 2,0 2,1 1,9 2,2 2,3
36 1,2 1,4 1,4 1,2 1,5 1,6 34 1,5 1,7 1,7 1,6 1,8 2,1
38 1,0 1,1 1,2 1,0 1,2 1,4 36 1,3 1,4 1,4 1,3 1,6 1,7
40 0,8 0,9 0,9 0,8 1,0 1,2 38 1,0 1,1 1,2 1,1 1,3 1,5
42 - - - - 0,8 0,9 40 0,8 0,9 - 0,9 1,1 1,2
44 - - - - - 0,7 42 - 0,7 - - 0,8 1,0
44 - - - - - 0,7
15

HAV AC 60-3
12,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
34,9 m 10,4 m
8,5 m 16,0 m 8,5 m 16,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
8 9,1 - - 4,8 - - 3 13,4 - - 8,2 - -
9 9,1 - - 4,8 - - 4 13,4 - - 8,0 - -
10 9,1 - - 4,7 - - 5 13,3 9,8 - 7,7 - -
12 8,8 8,1 - 4,7 - - 6 12,0 9,2 - 7,0 - -
14 8,0 7,7 6,5 4,6 - - 7 11,0 8,7 7,3 6,3 - -
16 6,7 7,1 6,2 4,5 3,6 - 8 10,2 8,2 7,1 5,8 4,5 -
18 5,6 5,8 6,0 4,4 3,4 2,8 9 9,4 7,8 6,8 5,3 4,2 -
20 5,0 5,0 5,2 4,2 3,3 2,7 10 8,7 7,4 6,7 4,9 4,0 -
22 4,2 4,3 4,4 3,9 3,1 2,6 12 7,7 6,9 6,4 4,3 3,6 3,1
24 3,8 3,8 3,9 3,5 3,0 2,6 14 6,9 6,5 6,4 3,8 3,3 2,9
26 3,2 3,4 3,4 3,1 2,9 2,5 16 6,5 - - 3,4 3,0 2,7
28 2,7 2,9 3,0 2,7 2,7 2,5 18 - - - 3,1 2,8 2,6
30 2,3 2,5 2,6 2,4 2,5 2,4 20 - - - 2,9 2,6 2,5
32 2,0 2,1 2,2 2,0 2,3 2,4 22 - - - 2,6 2,6 -
34 1,7 1,8 1,9 1,7 2,0 2,1
36 1,4 1,5 - 1,5 1,7 1,9
38 1,2 1,3 - 1,2 1,4 1,6
40 1,0 - - 1,0 1,2 1,3
42 - - - 0,9 1,0 1,1
44 - - - - 0,8 -
16

HAV AC 60-3
4,7 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
50,0 m 45,4 m
8,5 m 16,0 m 8,5 m 16,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
12 3,6 - - - - - 12 4,8 - - 2,9 - -
14 3,6 - - 2,2 - - 14 4,8 - - 2,9 - -
16 3,4 3,6 - 2,2 - - 16 4,0 4,5 - 2,9 - -
18 2,6 3,1 - 2,2 - - 18 3,1 3,5 4,0 2,7 - -
20 1,9 2,4 2,8 1,6 - - 20 2,4 2,8 3,2 2,1 2,8 -
22 1,4 1,8 2,2 1,2 1,9 - 22 1,9 2,2 2,5 1,6 2,3 -
24 1,0 1,3 1,7 0,8 1,4 - 24 1,4 1,8 2,0 1,2 1,8 2,4
26 - 1,0 1,2 - 1,0 1,6 26 1,1 1,4 1,6 0,9 1,4 1,9
28 - - 0,9 - - 1,2 28 0,8 1,0 1,2 - 1,1 1,5
30 - - - - - 0,9 30 - 0,7 0,9 - 0,8 1,2
32 - - - - - 0,9
41,9 m 38,4 m
8,5 m 16,0 m 8,5 m 16,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
10 5,9 - - - - - 9 7,3 - - 4,2 - -
12 5,9 - - 3,6 - - 10 7,3 - - 4,2 - -
14 5,3 5,6 - 3,6 - - 12 6,7 6,4 - 4,2 - -
16 4,4 4,9 5,0 3,5 - - 14 5,7 6,0 5,3 4,1 - -
18 3,5 3,9 4,3 3,0 3,3 - 16 4,6 5,1 5,2 3,9 3,5 -
20 2,8 3,2 3,5 2,6 3,1 - 18 3,7 4,1 4,5 3,5 3,4 -
22 2,3 2,6 2,9 2,0 2,6 2,6 20 3,0 3,4 3,7 2,8 3,2 2,7
24 1,8 2,1 2,3 1,6 2,1 2,5 22 2,4 2,7 3,0 2,2 2,8 2,6
26 1,4 1,7 1,9 1,2 1,7 2,2 24 2,0 2,2 2,5 1,8 2,3 2,5
28 1,1 1,3 1,5 0,9 1,4 1,8 26 1,6 1,8 2,0 1,4 1,9 2,3
30 0,8 1,0 1,2 - 1,1 1,4 28 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,1 1,5 1,9
32 - 0,8 0,9 - 0,8 1,1 30 0,9 1,1 1,2 0,8 1,2 1,6
34 - - - - - 0,9 32 - 0,8 0,9 - 1,0 1,3
34 - - - - 0,7 1,0
36 - - - - - 0,7
34,9 m 10,4 m
8,5 m 16,0 m 8,5 m 16,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
8 9,1 - - 4,8 - - 3 13,4 - - 8,2 - -
9 9,1 - - 4,8 - - 4 13,4 - - 8,0 - -
10 8,7 - - 4,7 - - 5 13,3 9,8 - 7,7 - -
12 7,3 7,5 - 4,7 - - 6 12,0 9,2 - 7,0 - -
14 6,1 6,3 6,5 4,6 - - 7 11,0 8,7 7,3 6,3 - -
16 5,0 5,4 5,5 4,3 3,6 - 8 10,2 8,2 7,1 5,8 4,5 -
18 4,1 4,4 4,7 3,8 3,4 2,8 9 9,4 7,8 6,8 5,3 4,2 -
20 3,3 3,6 3,8 3,1 3,3 2,7 10 8,7 7,4 6,7 4,9 4,0 -
22 2,7 3,0 3,2 2,6 3,0 2,6 12 7,7 6,9 6,4 4,3 3,6 3,1
24 2,2 2,4 2,6 2,1 2,6 2,6 14 6,6 6,5 6,4 3,8 3,3 2,9
26 1,7 1,9 2,1 1,7 2,1 2,5 16 5,3 - - 3,4 3,0 2,7
28 1,4 1,6 1,7 1,4 1,8 2,1 18 - - - 3,1 2,8 2,6
30 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,1 1,5 1,7 20 - - - 2,9 2,6 2,5
32 0,8 1,0 1,0 0,9 1,2 1,4 22 - - - 2,6 2,6 -
34 - 0,7 0,8 - 0,9 1,1
36 - - - - - 0,8
17

HAV AC 60-3
3,2 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
50,0 m 45,4 m
8,5 m 16,0 m 8,5 m 16,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
12 3,6 - - - - - 12 4,8 - - 2,9 - -
14 3,6 - - 2,2 - - 14 4,4 - - 2,9 - -
16 2,8 3,4 - 2,2 - - 16 3,4 3,9 - 2,9 - -
18 2,1 2,6 - 1,8 - - 18 2,6 3,1 3,5 2,3 - -
20 1,5 1,9 2,3 1,2 - - 20 2,0 2,4 2,7 1,7 2,5 -
22 1,0 1,4 1,8 0,8 1,5 - 22 1,5 1,8 2,1 1,2 1,9 -
24 - 1,0 1,3 - 1,1 - 24 1,1 1,4 1,7 0,9 1,5 2,0
26 - - 0,9 - - 1,2 26 0,7 1,0 1,3 - 1,1 1,6
28 - - - - - 0,9 28 - 0,7 0,9 - 0,8 1,2
30 - - - - - 0,9
41,9 m 38,4 m
8,5 m 16,0 m 8,5 m 16,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
10 5,9 - - - - - 9 7,3 - - 4,2 - -
12 5,6 - - 3,6 - - 10 7,3 - - 4,2 - -
14 5,0 5,3 - 3,6 - - 12 6,3 6,4 - 4,2 - -
16 3,9 4,4 4,7 3,3 - - 14 5,2 5,7 5,3 4,1 - -
18 3,0 3,4 3,8 2,7 3,2 - 16 4,1 4,6 5,0 3,7 3,5 -
20 2,4 2,7 3,1 2,1 2,8 - 18 3,2 3,6 4,0 3,0 3,3 -
22 1,9 2,2 2,5 1,6 2,2 2,6 20 2,5 2,9 3,2 2,3 3,0 2,7
24 1,4 1,7 2,0 1,2 1,8 2,3 22 2,0 2,3 2,6 1,8 2,4 2,6
26 1,1 1,3 1,6 0,9 1,4 1,9 24 1,6 1,9 2,1 1,4 2,0 2,4
28 0,8 1,0 1,2 - 1,1 1,5 26 1,2 1,5 1,7 1,1 1,6 2,0
30 - 0,8 0,9 - 0,8 1,2 28 0,9 1,1 1,3 0,8 1,2 1,6
32 - - - - - 0,9 30 - 0,8 0,9 - 0,9 1,3
32 - - - - - 1,0
34 - - - - - 0,7
34,9 m 10,4 m
8,5 m 16,0 m 8,5 m 16,0 m

0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40° 0° 20° 40°
8 9,1 - - 4,8 - - 3 13,4 - - 8,2 - -
9 8,9 - - 4,8 - - 4 13,4 - - 8,0 - -
10 8,2 - - 4,7 - - 5 13,3 9,8 - 7,7 - -
12 6,9 7,2 - 4,7 - - 6 12,0 9,2 - 7,0 - -
14 5,5 5,9 6,2 4,5 - - 7 11,0 8,7 7,3 6,3 - -
16 4,5 4,9 5,0 4,0 3,6 - 8 10,2 8,2 7,1 5,8 4,5 -
18 3,6 3,9 4,3 3,4 3,4 2,8 9 9,4 7,8 6,8 5,3 4,2 -
20 2,9 3,2 3,5 2,7 3,2 2,7 10 8,7 7,4 6,7 4,9 4,0 -
22 2,3 2,6 2,8 2,2 2,7 2,6 12 7,7 6,9 6,4 4,3 3,6 3,1
24 1,8 2,1 2,3 1,7 2,2 2,5 14 6,0 6,3 6,4 3,8 3,3 2,9
26 1,4 1,6 1,8 1,4 1,8 2,2 16 4,8 - - 3,4 3,0 2,7
28 1,1 1,3 1,4 1,1 1,5 1,8 18 - - - 3,1 2,8 2,6
30 0,8 1,0 1,1 0,8 1,2 1,5 20 - - - 2,9 2,6 2,5
32 - 0,7 0,8 - 0,9 1,2 22 - - - 2,6 2,6 -
34 - - - - - 0,9
18

MS AC 60-3
19

MS AC 60-3
12,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,4 m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 - - - - - - - - 3
3,5 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 - - - - - - - - 3,5
4 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 - - - - - - - 4
4,5 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 - - - - - - - 4,5
5 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 22,0 - - - - - - 5
6 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,1 25,3 21,4 17,4 - - - - - 6
7 24,6 25,0 24,1 23,5 22,7 20,5 16,3 14,2 - - - - 7
8 21,2 21,7 21,7 21,0 19,7 19,3 14,9 13,9 11,1 - - - 8
9 17,3 17,9 18,0 17,8 17,7 16,6 13,7 13,0 11,0 9,0 - - 9
10 - 15,1 15,1 15,5 15,3 14,5 12,6 12,0 10,7 8,9 7,4 - 10
12 - 11,4 11,7 11,7 11,4 11,1 11,1 10,3 9,6 8,6 7,2 5,5 12
14 - - 9,2 9,2 8,9 9,2 8,9 8,5 8,2 8,0 7,0 5,3 14
16 - - 7,5 7,4 7,6 7,4 7,3 7,2 7,0 6,7 6,7 5,1 16
18 - - - 6,4 6,4 6,1 6,2 5,9 5,9 5,8 5,6 4,9 18
20 - - - - 5,4 5,4 5,2 5,2 5,0 4,8 4,6 4,4 20
22 - - - - 4,6 4,6 4,5 4,4 4,2 4,0 4,0 3,6 22
24 - - - - - 4,0 3,9 3,7 3,6 3,5 3,3 3,0 24
26 - - - - - 3,5 3,4 3,2 3,0 3,0 2,8 2,5 26
28 - - - - - - 2,9 2,7 2,6 2,5 2,3 2,1 28
30 - - - - - - 2,5 2,3 2,2 2,2 1,9 1,7 30
32 - - - - - - - 2,0 1,8 1,8 1,6 1,3 32
34 - - - - - - - - 1,5 1,5 1,3 1,0 34
36 - - - - - - - - 1,3 1,3 1,0 0,8 36
38 - - - - - - - - - 1,0 0,8 - 38
40 - - - - - - - - - 0,9 - - 40
1) 12,3 9,2 7,2 5,5 4,3 3,3 2,5 1,8 1,2 0,8 - - 1)
20

MS AC 60-3
4,7 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,4 m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 - - - - - - - - 3
4 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 - - - - - - - 4
5 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,3 22,0 - - - - - - 5
6 26,2 25,8 24,1 22,4 21,0 20,0 17,4 - - - - - 6
7 19,4 20,0 19,4 18,8 17,7 16,4 15,5 14,2 - - - - 7
8 15,1 15,7 16,3 15,8 14,9 14,0 13,6 12,6 11,1 - - - 8
9 12,2 13,1 13,3 13,3 12,7 12,4 11,7 11,0 10,4 9,0 - - 9
10 - 10,9 11,2 11,1 11,0 10,9 10,4 9,9 9,6 8,7 7,4 - 10
12 - 8,0 8,2 8,5 8,5 8,4 8,3 8,1 7,7 7,1 6,7 5,5 12
14 - - 6,5 6,6 6,7 6,6 6,5 6,4 6,1 6,0 5,5 5,0 14
16 - - 5,2 5,3 5,4 5,3 5,2 5,0 4,9 4,8 4,3 3,8 16
18 - - - 4,3 4,4 4,3 4,2 4,1 3,9 3,8 3,4 2,9 18
20 - - - - 3,6 3,5 3,5 3,3 3,1 3,1 2,7 2,2 20
22 - - - - 3,0 2,9 2,8 2,6 2,5 2,5 2,1 1,7 22
24 - - - - - 2,4 2,3 2,1 2,0 2,0 1,7 1,2 24
26 - - - - - 2,0 1,9 1,7 1,5 1,5 1,3 0,9 26
28 - - - - - - 1,6 1,4 1,2 1,2 1,0 - 28
30 - - - - - - 1,3 1,1 0,9 0,9 - - 30
32 - - - - - - - 0,8 - - - - 32
1) 11,3 7,1 5,0 3,6 2,7 1,9 1,2 0,7 - - - - 1)
21

MS AC 60-3
3,2 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO
10,4 m 13,9m 17,4m 20,9m 24,4m 27,9m 31,4m 34,9m 38,4m 41,9m 45,4m 50,0m
3 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 - - - - - - - - 3
4 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 - - - - - - - 4
5 26,6 26,6 26,6 26,6 24,3 22,0 - - - - - - 5
6 24,2 23,9 22,4 20,7 20,1 18,5 17,2 - - - - - 6
7 17,9 18,5 18,0 17,5 16,4 15,4 14,5 13,3 - - - - 7
8 13,9 14,8 15,1 14,6 13,7 13,1 12,6 12,0 10,8 - - - 8
9 11,2 12,0 12,3 12,2 11,8 11,5 10,9 10,5 10,1 9,0 - - 9
10 - 10,0 10,3 10,2 10,5 10,1 9,8 9,4 8,9 8,4 7,4 - 10
12 - 7,3 7,7 7,8 7,8 7,8 7,8 7,4 7,0 6,7 6,2 5,5 12
14 - - 5,9 6,1 6,1 6,0 6,0 5,8 5,5 5,3 4,9 4,3 14
16 - - 4,7 4,8 4,9 4,8 4,7 4,5 4,4 4,2 3,7 3,2 16
18 - - - 3,9 4,0 3,9 3,8 3,6 3,4 3,3 2,9 2,4 18
20 - - - - 3,2 3,1 3,1 2,9 2,7 2,6 2,2 1,8 20
22 - - - - 2,6 2,5 2,5 2,3 2,1 2,1 1,7 1,3 22
24 - - - - - 2,1 2,0 1,8 1,6 1,6 1,3 0,9 24
26 - - - - - 1,7 1,6 1,4 1,2 1,2 1,0 - 26
28 - - - - - - 1,3 1,1 0,9 0,9 - - 28
30 - - - - - - 1,0 0,8 - - - - 30
1) 10,3 6,4 4,5 3,2 2,3 1,6 1,0 - - - - - 1)
22

Notes to Lifting Capacity AC 60-3
Anmerkungen zu den Tragfähigkeiten · Conditions d‘utilisation ·
Annotazioni sulle portate · Condiciones de utilización · Notas sobre capacidade
de içamento · Примечания по грузоподъемности
Ratings are in compliance with ISO 4305.

Weight of hook blocks and slings is part of the load, and is to be deducted from the capacity ratings.
Consult operation manual for further details.
Note: Data published herein is intended as a guide only and shall not be construed to warrant applicability for lifting purposes.
Crane operation is subject to the computer charts and operation manual both supplied with the crane.
Tragfähigkeiten entsprechen ISO 4305.
Das Gewicht der Unterflaschen, sowie die Lastaufnahmemittel, sind Bestandteile der Last und sind von den Tragfähigkeits
angaben abzuziehen.
Weitere Angaben in der Bedienungsanleitung des Kranes.
Anmerkung: Die Daten dieser Broschüre dienen nur zur allgemeinen Information; für ihre Richtigkeit übernehmen wir keine
Haftung. Der Betrieb des Kranes ist nur mit den Original-Tragfähigkeitstabellen und mit der Bedienungsanleitung zulässig,
die mit dem Kran mitgeliefert werden.
Le tableau de charges est conforme à la norme ISO 4305.

Les poids du crochet-moufle et de tous les accessoires d’élingage font partie de la charge et sont à déduire des charges indiquées.
Pour plus de détails consulter la notice d’utilisation de la grue.
Nota : Les renseignements ci-inclus sont donnés à titre indicatif et ne représentent aucune garantie d’utilisation pour les opérations
de levage. La mise en service de la grue n’est autorisée qu’à condition que les tableaux de charges ainsi que le manuel de service,
tels que fournis avec la grue, soient observés.
Le portate sono conformi alla norma ISO 4305.

Il peso del bozzello e delle funi d’attacco fanno parte del carico e sono quindi da detrarre dai valori di tabella.
Per ulteriori dettagli sulla velocità vento, consultare il manuale di istruzione della gru.
Nota: I dati riportati su tale prospetto sono solo a titolo indicativo e pertanto non impegnativi. L’impiego della gru è ammesso solo
rispettando le tabelle originali ed il manuale di uso fornito assieme alla gru.
Las capacidades de carga están sujetas a las normas ISO 4305.

El peso de los ganchos y eslingas son parte de la carga y serán deducidos de las capacidades brutas.
Consultar los manuales de operación para ampliar información.
Observación: Los datos publicados son solamente orientativos y no se deben interpretar como garantía de aplicación para
determinadas operaciones de elevación. La manipulación de la grúa está sujeta a las cargas programadas en el ordenador y en
el manual de operaciones, ambos suministrados con la grúa.
Valores nominais de acordo com a ISO 4305.

O peso dos moitões e eslingas faz parte da carga e tem de ser subtraído das capacidades nominais.
Consultar manual de operação para outros detalhes.
Nota: Os dados publicados aqui destinam-se a simples orientação e não devem ser interpretdos como garantia de aplicabilidade
para fins de içamento. A operação da grua depende de tabelas de computador e do manual de operação, ambos fornecidos
com a máquina.
Номинальные значения соответствуют ISO 4305.

Вес крюкоблока и строп является частью груза и должен вычитаться из номинальных значений грузоподъемности.
Подробности см. в руководстве по эксплуатации.
Примечание. Публикуемые в настоящем издании данные приводятся только для справки и не должны использоваться
при расчете нагрузки. При эксплуатации крана должны применяться компьютерные таблицы и руководство по
эксплуатации, входящие в комплект поставки крана.
23

Basic machine
Equipment carrier
Engine 260-4 MTU 6R1000; Diesel engine; 260 kW / 2200 1/min (348 HP), torque 1400 Nm / 1200-1600 1/min;
The engine complies with Euromot 4/Tier 4F; Exhaust system complete stainless steel with
SCR catalyzer.
Fuel tank 390 l Diesel (no RME / biodiesel); 40 l Ad-Blue tank.
Transmission AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic; Automated gearbox with 12 forward speeds and 2 reverse; 2-stage transfer case with
switchable off-road gear and switchable longitudinal lock.
Axles 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6; 3 axles, axles 1 and 3 driven and equipped with selectable transverse lock; All axles s teered.
Suspension Hydropneumatic suspension with axle load compensation; Hydraulically lockable;
Manual or automatic levelling alternatively.
Steering Dual circuit hydro servocom steering with emergency steering pump; Active rear axle steering.
Brakes Pneumatic dual circuit service brake with antilock system, acting on all wheels; Disc brakes;
additional, double-speed decompression brake; Spring-loaded parking brake.
Tire size 385/95 R25 Tires size 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); Steel rim 9,5-25/1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE 170F; or similar.
(14.00R25)
Cab 2550 Type 2.55 m; Adjustable driver seat, armrests and pneumatic suspension; Height and tilt-adjustable
steering wheel; Auxiliary/passenger seat; Powered door windows; Tinted glass; Electrically adjustable
rear-view mirrors, heated; Preparation for radio.
Drive lights Including low beams, high beams, daytime running lights.
Outriggers H-4-Point design; Vertical and horizontal movement fully hydraulic; Manual or automatic levelling
alternatively; 3 outrigger bases: 3.00 m, 4.50 m and 6.50 m.
Outrigger pads 020 4 round outrigger pads A = 0.20 m2 with transport position at vertical cylinder.
Outrigger basis Individual monitoring of horizontal stroke; Deviation warning in crane cab.
monitoring
Outrigger load indicator The outrigger load is indicated in the operator cab and the outrigger control box.
Electronic immobiliser Prevents uncontrolled carrier mobilisation; Incl. 5 ignition keys.
system
Pneumatic tire filling plug Pneumatic tire filling plug for self-filling of the wheels.
Contour safety marking Continuous reflective strips on the sides of the chassis and on the rear.
Equipment superstructure
Telescopic boom HA50 10.4 m - 50 m; Single cylinder telescoping system, automatic telescoping; Attachments for all equip-
ment and extensions; 3 sheaves integrated in boom head for max. capacity of 39.5 t.
Boom luffing 1 luffing cylinder with automatic lowering brake valve.
Rotary drive Single slewing gear unit with spring-loaded multi-disc brake.
H1 Hoist with spring-loaded multi-disc brake; Resolver (hoist rotation indicator).
Counterweight 4.7 t 4.7 t; 4 pieces; Automatic rigging system.
Control system Enabling 4 simultaneous working movements; Electric pilot controls via 2 two-axis joysticks;
Different control modes selectable for hydraulic circuits.
Operator aids IC-1, with integrated electronic load moment indicator in accordance with EN13000; Color display;
Displaying of current operating conditions, load charts, fault indicator; Signal lights indicating
LMI-load; Crane data logger.
Hook height indication Displaying and programmability of the hook height H1 and /or H2 by IC-1.
Cab 875 Type 875; Tilt infinitely variable 16°; Sliding window rear; Fold-out front window; Extendable side
pedestal, front pedestal; Handrails; Tinted safety glass; Pull-down sun visor; Preparation for radio.
Heating Engine-independent warm water heating with 5 kW heating power.
engine-independent
Anemometer Removable, to be used with all extensions.
24

Additional equipment
Carrier
Axles 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6; All 3 axles steered, axles 1 and 3 permanently driven, axle 2 shiftable, all axles equipped with
selectable transverse lock.
Wear-free auxiliary brake Wear-free auxiliary eddy-current brake at 3rd axle.
Aircondition Aircondition for carrier cab with 7 kW rated cooling power.
Superstructure
2. hoist (H2) 2. hoist; Spring-loaded multi-disc brake; Integrated resolver (hoist rotation indicator);
Incl. quick couplings and transport rack.
Additional counterweight Additional counterweight 7.4 t, 3 pieces; for total 12.1 t, 7 pieces.
7.4 t
Aircondition Aircondition in crane cab with 5 kW rated cooling power.
Handling
Remote control Control of superstructure movements via wireless remote control.
Moving out of crane cab Control of carrier out of crane cab, enables machine moving when rigged, possible even under load.
Working range limiter Displaying and programmability of the work range limits by IC-1.
IC-1 Plus Smart crane control system for main boom operation enabling higher lifting capacities especially over
outriggers. Enables safe use of the full capacity of the crane even in asymmetric outrigger configura-
tions. Outriggers can be positioned independently. Capacity precalculation for +/- 30° slewing angle
and radius area. In-cab lift simulation.
Extensions
HAV 9 m 9 m; Lattice swing-away jib, manual offset 20°/40°; 1-sheave head; Incl. transport storage.
HAV 16 m 16 m; Double folding swing-away jib, manual offset 20°/40°; 1-sheave head; Incl. transport storage;
Includes HAV 9 m.
MS (runner) 1.5 m; Variable assembly jib with manual offset; 2-sheaves, for max. 26.6 t lifting capacity; Including
open storage box for the transport of the Runner MS.
Hook Blocks
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg); Hook block with adjustable ballast and ramshorn hook, variable usage as
1- and 3-sheave hook block; white with red signal stripes.
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg); Hook block with adjustable ballast and single hook, variable usage as 1- and
3-sheave hook block; white with red signal stripes.
Hook block 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 kg); Hook block with single hook; white with red signal stripes.
Hook 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg); red.
Further additional equipment on request!

Weight data may deviate from posted values based on road / travel configuration, equipment configuration, and component
weight tolerances.
25

Grundausstattung
Kranfahrgestell
Motor 260-4 MTU 6R1000; Dieselmotor; Leistung 260 kW / 2200 1/min (348 PS), Drehmoment 1400 Nm /
1200-1600 1/min; Zulassung gemäß Euromot 4/Tier 4F; Abgasanlage vollständig aus Edelstahl mit
SCR-Katalysator.
Kraftstoffbehälter 390 l Diesel (kein RME/Biodiesel); 40 l Ad-Blue Tank.
Getriebe AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic; automatisches Getriebe mit 12 Vorwärts- und 2 Rückwärtsgängen; 2-stufiges Verteiler-
getriebe mit jeweils zuschaltbarer Geländestufe und Längssperre.
Achsen 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6; 3 Achsen, davon Achsen 1 und 3 angetrieben mit zuschaltbarer Quersperre; alle Achsen ge-
lenkt.
Federung Hydropneumatische Federung mit Achslastausgleich; hydraulisch blockierbar; wahlweise manuelle
oder automatische Niveaueinstellung.
Lenkung Zweikreis-Servocom-Hydrolenkung mit Notlenkpumpe; aktive Hinterachslenkung.
Bremsen Pneumatische Zweikreis-Betriebsbremse mit ABS, auf alle Räder wirkend; Scheibenbremsen;
zusätzliche, doppelt getaktete Dekompressionsbremse; Federspeicher-Feststellbremse.
Bereifung 385/95 R25 Reifengröße 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); Stahlfelge 9,5-25/1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE 170F;
(14.00R25) oder gleichwertig.
Kabine 2550 Typ 2,55 m; verstellbarer Fahrersitz mit Armlehnen und pneumatischer Federung; Lenkrad mit Höhen-
und Neigungsverstellung; Beifahrersitz; elektrische Fensterheber; getönte Verglasung; elektrisch ver-
stell- und beheizbare Außenspiegel; Radiovorbereitung.
Fahrbeleuchtung Inklusive Abblendlicht, Fernlicht, Tagfahrlicht.
Abstützungen H-4-Punkt-Anordnung; vertikal und horizontal vollhydraulisch verstellbar; Wahlweise manuelle oder
automatische Niveaueinstellung; 3 Abstützbasen: 3,00 m, 4,50 m und 6,50 m.
Stützteller 020 4 runde Stützteller A = 0,20 m2, mit Transportstellung am Stützzylinder.
Stützbasis-Überwachung Einzelüberwachung des Horizontalhubs; Abweichungswarnung in Kabine Kranoberwagen.
Stützkraftanzeige Anzeige der Stützkraft in der Krankabine und am Abstützbedienkasten.
Elektronische Wegfahr- Verhindert unkontrollierte Ingangsetzung des Fahrgestells; mit 5 Zündschlüsseln.
sperre
Pneumatischer Reifenfüll- Ermöglicht Selbstbefüllung der Reifen.
anschluss
Kontur-Sicherheits- Durchgehende Reflektorleisten seitlich am Fahrgestell und am Heck.
markierung
Kranoberwagen
Teleskopausleger HA50 10,4 m - 50 m; Einzylinder-Teleskopiersystem, automatisches Teleskopieren; Aufnahmen für alle An-
bauten und Verlängerungen; 3 Seilrollen im Auslegerkopf für max. 39,5 t Tragfähigkeit.
Auslegerverstellung 1 Wippzylinder mit Sicherheits-Senk-Brems-Ventil.
Drehantrieb Drehwerk mit federbelasteter Lamellenbremse.
H1 Hubwerk mit federbelasteter Lamellenbremse; integrierter Drehmelder.
Gegengewicht 4,7 t 4,7 t; 4-teilig; automatisches Rüstsystem.
Steuerung Ermöglicht 4 gleichzeitige Arbeitsbewegungen; elektrische Vorsteuerung über 2 Kreuzsteuerhebel;
verschiedene Steuerungsmodi für Hydraulikkreise anwählbar.
Sicherheitseinrichtung IC-1, mit integrierter Lastmomentbegrenzung gemäß EN13000; Farbdisplay; Betriebszustandsanzeige,
Traglasttabellen, Störungsanzeige; Ampelsignal für LMB-Auslastung; Krandatenrekorder.
Hakenhöhenanzeige Anzeige und Programmierbarkeit der Hakenhöhe H1 und/oder H2 über IC-1.
Kabine 875 Typ 875; Stufenlose Neigung bis 16°; Schiebefenster im Heck; Frontscheibe aufstellbar; ausfahrbares
Seitenpodest, Frontpodest; Handläufe; getönte Sicherheitsverglasung; Sonnenschutzrollo; Radiovor-
bereitung.
Heizung Motorunabhängige Warmwasserheizung mit 5 kW Heizleistung.
motorunabhängig
Windmesser Abnehmbar, an allen Einrichtungen nutzbar.
26

Zusatzausstattung
Kranfahrgestell
Achsen 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6; alle drei Achsen gelenkt, Achsen 1 und 3 permanent angetrieben, Achse 2 zuschaltbar;
alle Achsen mit zuschaltbarer Quersperre.
Verschleißfreie Zusatz- Zusätzliche, verschleißfreie Wirbelstrombremse an der dritten Achse.
bremse
Klimaanlage Klimaanlage für Kabine Kranfahrgestell mit 7 kW Kühlleistung.
Kranoberwagen
2. Hubwerk (H2) 2. Hubwerk; federbelastete Lamellenbremse; integrierter Drehmelder; einschl. Schnellkupplungen
und Transporthalterung.
Zusatzgegengewicht Zusatzgegengewicht 7,4 t, 3-teilig; Für max. 12,1 t, 7-teilig.
7,4 t
Klimaanlage Klimaanlage in Kabine Kranoberwagen mit 5 kW Kühlleistung.
Bedienung
Fernbedienung Steuerung der Oberwagenbewegungen per Funkfernsteuerung.
Verfahren aus der Kabine Steuerung des Kranfahrgestells aus der Kabine Kranoberwagen zum Umsetzen der aufgerüsteten
Kranoberwagen Maschine, auch unter Last.
Arbeitsbereichs- Anzeige und Programmierung der Arbeitsbereichsgrenzen über IC-1.
begrenzung
IC-1 Plus Intelligentes Steuerungssystem für HA-Betrieb, das höhere Traglasten ermöglicht – insbesondere
bei Hebevorgängen über den Abstützungen. Sichere Nutzung der vollen Tragfähigkeit des Krans,
selbst bei asymmetrischen Abstützkonfigurationen. Abstützungen unabhängig positionierbar.
Vorberechnung der Traglast für einen Schwenkwinkel und Radiusbereich von +/- 30°. Hubsimulation
in der Kabine.
Verlängerungen
HAV 9 m 9 m; Gittermast-Klappspitze, manuell 20° / 40° abwinkelbar; 1-rolliger Kopf; Inkl. Transporthalterung.
HAV 16 m 16 m; Doppelklappspitze, manuell 20° / 40° abwinkelbar; 1-rolliger Kopf; Inkl. Transporthalterung;
Beinhaltet HAV 9 m.
MS (Montagespitze) 1,5 m; variable Montagespitze mit manueller Abwinkelung; 2 Rollen für max. 26,6 t Tragfähigkeit;
einschl. offener MS-Transportbox.
Unterflaschen
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg); variabel ballastierbare Unterflasche mit Doppelhaken; wahlweise mit einer
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg); variabel ballastierbare Unterflasche mit Einzelhaken; wahlweise mit einer
Unterflasche 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 kg); Unterflasche mit Einfachhaken; mit weiß-roter Warnschraffur.
Haken 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg); rot.
Weitere Zusatzausstattung auf Anfrage!
Gewichtsangaben können entsprechend der Verfahrzustände, des Ausstattungsumfangs und aufgrund von Gewichtstole-
ranzen von Bauteilen positiv oder negativ abweichen!
27

Machine de base
Equipement châssis
Moteur 260-4 MTU 6R1000 ; moteur diesel ; 260 kW / 2200 1/min (348 CH) ; couple de 1400 Nm /1200-1600 1/min ;
le moteur est conforme aux standards Euromot 4 / Tier 4F ; système d‘échappement 100 % acier
inoxydable avec catalyseur SRC.
Réservoir de carburant 390 l ; diesel (pas de RME/biodiesel) ; réservoir Ad-Blue de 40 l.
Transmission AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic ; boîte de vitesses automatique ; 12 vitesses AV et 2 AR ; boîte de transfert à deux rapports
avec dispositif tout-terrain commutable et blocage de différentiel longitudinal sélectionnable.
Essieux 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6 ; 3 essieux ; essieux 1 et 3 moteurs et équipés du blocage de différentiel transversal
sélectionnable ; tous essieux directeurs.
Suspension Suspension hydropneumatique avec compensation du poids de l’essieu ; blocage hydraulique ;
mise à niveau manuelle ou automatique.
Direction Direction servocom à deux circuits avec pompe de secours ; direction active des essieux arrière.
Freins Frein de service pneumatique à double circuit avec système antiblocage agissant sur toutes les roues ;
freins à disque ; frein par compression double vitesse additionnel ; frein de stationnement par cylindres
à ressort.
Pneus taille 385/95 R25 Pneus taille 385/95 R25 (14.00R25) ; jantes acier 9,5-25/1,7“ ; TechKing ETCRANE 170F ; ou similaire.
(14.00R25)
Cabine 2550 Type 2,55 m ; siège opérateur réglable avec accoudoirs et suspension pneumatique ; volant avec
réglage de la hauteur et de l‘inclinaison ; siège auxiliaire/passager ; vitres électriques ; vitres t eintées ;
rétroviseurs arrière réglables avec chauffage électrique ; prémontage radio.
Feux de conduite Feux de croisement, feux de route, feux diurnes.
Calage Agencement 4 points en H ; télescopages verticaux et horizontaux entièrement hydrauliques ;
mise à niveau manuelle ou automatique ; 3 bases de calage : 3,00 m, 4,50 m et 6,50 m.
Semelles de calage 020 4 semelles de calage rondes A = 0,20 m2 avec position de transport sur le vérin vertical.
Contrôle de la base Surveillance individuelle de la course horizontale ; signal de déviation dans la cabine de la grue.
de calage
Indicateur de charge de Affichage de la charge de calage dans la cabine et sur le boîtier de commande des stabilisateurs.
calage
200Antivol électronique Prévention des mouvements non planifiés du châssis ; avec 5 clés de contact.
Valve de gonflage Valve de gonflage autonome des pneus.
pneumatique
Signalisation du contour Bandes réfléchissantes continues sur les côtés et à l’arrière du châssis.
Equipement tourelle
Flèche télescopique HA50 10,4 m - 50 m ; système de télescopage à vérin unique ; télescopage automatique ; fixations pour
équipements et extensions ; 3 poulies intégrées à la tête de flèche pour une capacité max. de 39,5 t.
Réglage de la flèche 1 vérin de relevage avec descente contrôlée par soupape de freinage.
Entraînement rotatif Unique mécanisme d‘orientation avec frein multidisque à ressort.
H1 Treuil avec frein multidisque à ressort ; indicateur de rotation intégré.
Contrepoids de 4,7 t 4,7 t ; 4 pièces ; système de montage automatiques.
Système de commande Permet 4 mouvements simultanés ; commande électrique via 2 joysticks en croix ; différents modes de
commande sélectionnables pour les circuits hydrauliques.
Dispositif de sécurité IC-1 avec témoin de moment de charge électronique intégré conforme à la norme EN13000 ;
affichage couleur ; affichage des conditions de travail ; abaques de charge ; indicateur d‘anomalie ;
signal lumineux charge LMB ; enregistreur des données de la machine.
Indication de la hauteur Affichage et possibilité de programmer la hauteur sous crochet H1 et/ou H2 sur dispositif IC-1.
sous crochet
Cabine 875 Type 875 ; inclinaison en continu jusqu’à 16° ; vitre coulissante à l’arrière ; pare-brise réglable ;
quai latéral extensible, quai avant repliable ; mains courantes ; vitrage de sécurité teinté ; pare-soleil
rabattable ; prémontage radio.
Chauffage Chauffage à eau chaude indépendant du moteur, puissance de chauffage de 5 kW.
indépendant du moteur
Anémomètre Amovible, utilisable sur tous les dispositifs.
28

Equipement additionnel
Châssis
Essieux 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6 ; 3 essieux directeurs, essieux 1 et 3 moteurs en permanence ; essieu 2 enclenchable ;
tous essieux équipés du blocage de différentiel transversal sélectionnable.
Frein auxiliaire sans usure Frein à courant de Foucault auxiliaire sans usure sur le 3ème essieu.
Climatiseur Climatisation en cabine ; système de refroidissement d’une puissance nominale de 7 kW.
Tourelle
2. treuil (H2) 2. treuil ; frein multidisque à ressort ; indicateur de rotation intégré ; avec connexions rapides et rack
de transport.
Contrepoids supplé- Contrepoids supplémentaire 7,4 t, 3 pièces ; pour 12,1 t max, 7 pièces.
mentaire 7,4 t
Climatiseur Climatisation de la cabine avec puissance de refroidissement nominale de 5 kW.
Manutention
Commande à distance Commande des mouvements de la tourelle par commande radio à distance.
Déplacement depuis Commande du châssis depuis la cabine du grutier, permet le déplacement de la machine même en
la cabine du grutier charge.
Contrôleur de portée Affichage et programmabilité des limites de portée sur dispositif IC-1.
IC-1 Plus Système de commande intelligent de la flèche principale de la grue, garant de capacités de levage
s upérieures, tout particulièrement sur stabilisateurs. Permet une exploitation sans danger de la
capacité intégrale de la grue, même dans les configurations de stabilisation asymétrique.
Stabilisateurs positionnables indépendamment. Calcul préalable de la capacité pour un angle
d‘orientation de ± 30° au sein du rayon. Simulation en cabine des opérations de levage.
Extensions
HAV 9 m 9 m ; Fléchette treillis pliante, inclinable manuellement à 20° / 40° ; tête à 1 poulie ; position de
transport incl.
HAV 16 m 16 m ; Double fléchette pliante, inclinable manuellement à 20° / 40° ; tête à 1 poulie ; position de
transport incl. ; HAV 9 m inclus.
MS (potence) 1,5 m ; fléchette à volée variable et débattement manuel ; 2 poulies pour une capacité de charge max.
de 26,6 t ; avec coffre de rangement ouvert pour le transport de la potence MS.
Crochets moufles
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg) ; crochet moufle avec contrepoids réglable et crochet double ;
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg) ; crochet moufle avec contrepoids réglable et crochet simple ;
Crochet moufle 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 kg) ; crochet moufle avec crochet simple ; blanc avec bandes de signalisation rouges.
Crochet 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg) ; rouge.
Autres équipements additionnels disponibles sur demande !

Les données relatives au poids peuvent varier en fonction de la configuration en déplacement, de la configuration
d‘équipement et des tolérances liées au poids des composants.
29

Macchina base
Equipaggiamento carro
Motore 260-4 MTU 6R1000; motore diesel; 260 kW / 2200 1/min (348 HP), coppia 1400 Nm /1200-1600 1/min;
il motore è a norma Euromot 4/Tier 4F; l’impianto di scarico è completo di catalizzatore di tipo SCR
in acciaio inossidabile.
Serbatoio di carburante 390 l diesel (non compatibile con estere metilico di colza/biodiesel); serbatoio 40 l Ad-Blue.
Trasmissione AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic; cambio automatizzato con 12 marce avanti e 2 marce indietro; distributore di coppia a
2 rapporti con rapporto fuori strada e differenziale longitudinale inseribile.
Assalii 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6; 3 assali, di cui gli assali 1 e 3 traenti con blocco differenziale trasversale inseribile;
tutti gli assali sterzanti.
Sospensioni Sospensioni idropneumatiche con compensazione del carico assiale; blocco idraulico; disponibili nella
versione con regolazione del livello manuale o automatica.
Sterzo Servosterzo idraulico a doppio circuito con pompa di soccorso; sterzatura attiva degli assali posteriori.
Freni Freno di servizio pneumatico a doppio circuito con ABS, installato su tutte le ruote; freni a disco;
freno a decompressione a due velocità aggiuntivo; freno di stazionamento a molla.
Dimensione pneumatici Dimensione pneumatici 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); cerchione in acciaio 9,5-25/1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE
385/95 R25 (14.00R25) 170F; o simile.
Cabina 2550 Tipo 2.55 m; sedile di guida regolabile, braccioli e sospensioni pneumatiche; volante regolabile in
altezza e inclinazione; sedile ausiliario/passeggero; finestrini con alzacristalli elettrico; vetri oscurati;
specchietti retrovisori a riscaldamento elettrico; predisposizione per radio.
Fari di guida Dotazione comprendente anabbaglianti, abbaglianti, luci di marcia diurna.
Stabilizzatori Sistema a 4 stabilizzatori, estensione orizzontale e verticale completamente idraulica; disponibili nella
versione con regolazione del livello automatica o manuale; 3 basi di appoggio: 3,00 m, 4,50 m e 6,50 m.
Piastre di appoggio 020 4 piastre di appoggio degli stabilizzatori rotonde A = 0,20 m 2 con posizione di trasporto in
corrispondenza del cilindro verticale.
Monitoraggio base Monitoraggio individuale della corsa orizzontale; avvertimento in caso di deviazione nella cabina gru.
di appoggio
Indicatore di carico degli Il carico degli stabilizzatori viene visualizzato nella cabina operatore e nel quadro comandi degli
stabilizzatori stabilizzatori stessi.
Immobilizzatore elettronico Impedisce l’avviamento involontario del carro; completo di 5 chiavi di accensione.
Raccordo di gonfiaggio Raccordo di gonfiaggio per autogonfiaggio pneumatici.
pneumatici
Bande di sicurezza per Strisce catarifrangenti continue sui lati del telaio e sul retro.
segnalazione sagoma
veicolo
Equipaggiamento torretta
Braccio telescopico HA50 10,4 m - 50 m; sistema telescopico a un cilindro, funzione telescopica automatica; dispositivo per
l‘inserimento di tutti gli accessori opzionali; 3 pulegge sulla punta braccio per una portata max. di
39,5 t.
Sfilo del braccio 1 cilindro di sfilo con valvola di comando automatico del freno di discesa.
Meccanismo di rotazione Meccanismo di rotazione singolo con freno lamellare a molla.
H1 Argano con freno lamellare a molla; con sincronizzatore integrato (indicatore di rotazione
dell’argano).
Contrappeso 4,7 t 4,7 t; 4 blocchi; sistema di allestimento automatico.
Sistema di controllo Consente 4 movimenti operativi in contemporanea; comandi elettrici con joystick a 2 assi; diverse
modalità di comando selezionabili per i circuiti idraulici.
Indicatori per l’operatore IC-1, con indicatore del momento di carico elettronico integrato, a norma EN13000; display a colori;
visualizzazione dello stato operativo attuale, diagrammi di carico, indicatore di errore; segnalazione
luminosa sulla cabina corretta del carico massimo; registratore dati della gru.
Indicazione altezza sotto Funzioni di visualizzazione e programmazione dell‘altezza sotto gancio H1 e/o H2 tramite IC-1.
gancio
Cabina 875 Tipo 875; inclinazione a regolazione infinitesimale 16°; alzacristalli sul retro; parabrezza regolabile;
pedana laterale allungabile, pedana anteriore; corrimano; vetri oscurati; tendina parasole;
predisposizione per radio.
Riscaldamento Riscaldamento acqua calda indipendente dal motore con 5 kW di potenza.
indipendente dal motore
Anemometro Rimovibile, utilizzabile con tutte le prolunghe.
30

Equipaggiamento aggiuntivo
Carro
Assali 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6; tutti e tre gli assali sterzanti, gli assali 1 e 3 permanentemente traenti, l’assale 2 commutabile,
tutti gli assali con blocco differenziale trasversale inseribile.
Freno ausiliario senza Freno ausiliario a correnti parassite senza usura sul terzo assale.
usura
Climatizzazione Impianto di climatizzazione per la cabina torretta con potenzialità di raffreddamento di 7 kW.
Torretta
2. argano (H2) Secondo argano; freno lamellare a molla; con sincronizzatore integrato (indicatore di rotazione
dell’argano); incl. giunti rapidi e vano di trasporto.
Contrappeso aggiuntivo Contrappeso aggiuntivo 7,4 t, 3 sezioni; per 12,1 t max, 7 pezzi.
7,4 t
Climatizzazione Impianto di climatizzazione per la cabina gru con potenzialità di raffreddamento di 5 kW.
Movimentazione
Radiocomando Controllo dei movimenti della torretta a distanza tramite telecomando wireless.
Movimentazione dall’ Il controllo del carro al di fuori della cabina gru consente lo spostamento della macchina una volta
esterno della cabina gru allestita/sotto carico.
Limitatore del raggio Visualizzazione e programmazione dei limiti del raggio d’azione tramite IC-1.
d‘azione
IC-1 Plus Sistema di controllo intelligente della gru per il funzionamento del braccio base che consente di
tilizzare capacità di sollevamento maggiori in particolare con gli stabilizzatori. Consente di utilizzare
u
in sicurezza tutta la capacità della gru anche con una configurazione asimmetrica degli stabilizzatori.
Gli stabilizzatori possono essere posizionati in modo indipendente. Precalcolo della capacità per un
angolo di rotazione +/- 30° e raggio d’azione. Simulazione del sollevamento dalla cabina.
Prolunghe
HAV 9 m 9 m; Falcone ripiegabile con struttura a traliccio, manualmente inclinabile 20° / 40°; cabezal de 1 polea;
completo di posizione di trasporto.
HAV 16 m 16 m; falcone doppio, manualmente inclinabile 20° / 40°; cabezal de 1 polea; completo di posizione
di trasporto; comprende HAV 9 m.
MS (runner) 1,5 m; falcone con montaggio a volata variabile, con inclinazione manuale; 2 pulegge, per una
capacità di sollevamento max. di 26,6 t; con vano di stoccaggio per il trasporto del Runner MS.
Bozzelli
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg); bozzello con zavorra regolabile e gancio doppio, possibilità di utilizzo a
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg); bozzello con zavorra regolabile e gancio singolo, possibilità di utilizzo a
Bozzello 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 kg); bozzello con gancio singolo; bianco con strisce segnaletiche rosse.
Gancio 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg); rosso.
Altri equipaggiamenti disponibili su richiesta!

I dati relativi al peso possono variare rispetto ai valori indicati in base all’assetto da strada scelto, alla configurazione delle
attrezzature e alle tolleranze di peso dei componenti.
31

Máquina básica
Equipamiento chasis
Motor 260-4 MTU 6R1000; motor diésel; 260 kW / 2200 rpm (348 CV), par 1400 Nm /1200-1600 rpm;
El motor cumple con Euromot 4/Tier 4F; Sistema de escape completamente de acero inoxidable
con catalizador SCR.
Depósito de combustible 390 l diésel (no RME / biodiésel); 40 l depósito Ad-Blue.
Transmisión AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic; caja de cambios automática con retardador hidráulico integrado, 12 marchas adelante
y 2 de retroceso; caja de transferencia de 2 etapas con marcha todoterreno accionable y bloqueo
longitudinal conmutable.
Ejes 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6; 3 ejes, ejes 1 y 3 con tracción y equipados con bloqueo transversal conmutable; Todos los
ejes con dirección.
Suspensión Suspensión hidroneumática con compensación de carga de ejes; Mecanismo hidráulico de bloqueo;
Nivelación alternativamente manual o automática.
Dirección Dirección hidráulica Servocom de dos circuitos, con bomba auxiliar de emergencia; Dirección activa de
eje trasero.
Frenos Frenos neumáticos de servicio de dos circuitos, actuantes en todas las ruedas; Frenos de disco;
Freno de descompresión de doble efecto adicional; Freno de estacionamiento de muelles.
Neumáticos 385/95 R25 Tamaño de neumáticos 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); Llantas de acero 9,5-25/1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE 170F;
(14.00R25) o similar.
Cabina 2550 Tipo 2,55 m; Asiento de conductor regulable, reposabrazos y suspensión neumática; Volante con
regulación de altura e inclinación; Asiento auxiliar/de pasajero; Elevalunas eléctricos; Lunas tintadas;
Espejos retrovisores de ajuste eléctrico, calefactados; Preinstalación para radio.
Luces de conducción Incluye luces de cruce, luces largas, luces de circulación diurna.
Estabilizadores Diseño 4 puntos en H; Movimiento vertical y horizontal totalmente hidráulico; Puede seleccionarse
regulación de nivel manual o automática; 3 bases estabilizadoras: 3,00 m, 4,50 m y 6,50 m.
Apoyos estabilizadores 020 4 apoyos estabilizadores circulares A = 0,20 m 2 con posición de transporte en el cilindro vertical.
Monitorización de la base Monitorización individual de carrera horizontal; Alerta de desviación en cabina de grúa.
de estabilización
Indicador de carga sobre La carga de estabilizadores es indicada en la cabina del operador y en la caja de control de los
estabilizadores estabilizadores.
Sistema electrónico de Previene la movilización incontrolada del chasis; Incl. 5 llaves de encendido.
inmovilización
Enchufe neumático para Enchufe para el inflado automático de los neumáticos.
inflar neumáticos
Marcas de seguridad Bandas reflectantes continuas en los laterales de vehículo y en la parte trasera.
perimetrales
Equipamiento superestructura
Pluma telescópica HA50 10,4 m - 50 m; Sistema telescópico monocilindro, telescopaje automático; Accesorios para todos
los equipamientos y extensiones; 3 poleas integradas en cabezal de pluma para capacidad de carga
máx. 39,5 t.
Elevación de pluma 1 cilindro de elevación con válvula de frenado automático para descenso.
Mecanismo de giro Mecanismo giratorio único con freno multidisco por muelles.
H1 Cabrestante con freno multdisco por muelles; Resolver (indicador de rotación del cabrestante).
Contrapeso 4,7 t Contrapeso 4,7 t; 4 piezas; Sistema de montaje automático.
Sistema de control Permite 4 movimientos de trabajo simultáneos; Controles piloto eléctricos a través de joysticks de 2 ejes;
Se pueden seleccionar diferentes modos de control para los circuitos hidráulicos.
Dispositivos de asistencia IC-1, con indicador eléctrico integrado de momento de carga según EN13000; Pantalla a color;
al operario Visualización del estado operativo actual, tablas de carga, indicador de fallos; Luces que indican la
carga del indicador de momento de carga; Registro de datos de la grúa.
Indicación de la altura del Visualización y programación de la altura de gancho H1 y/o H2 mediante IC-1.
gancho
Cabina 875 Tipo 875; Inclinación 16° en progresión continua; Luna corredera trasera; Luna delantera a
batible;
Escalón lateral extensible, escalón frontal; Pasamanos; Cristales de seguridad tintados;
Parasol plegable; Preinstalación para radio.
Calefacción Calefacción de agua caliente, independiente del motor, con una potencia de calefacción de 5 kW.
independiente del motor
Anemómetro Desmontable, para ser usado con todas las extensiones.
32

Equipamiento adicional
Chasis
Ejes 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6; Los 3 ejes con dirección, ejes 1 y 3 con tracción permanente, eje 2 conmutable; Todos los ejes
equipados con bloqueo transversal conmutable.
Freno auxiliar sin desgaste Freno auxiliar sin desgaste por corrientes parásitas en el 3er eje.
Aire acondicionado Aire acondicionado para cabina de vehículo con 7 kW de potencia nominal de refrigeración.
Superestructura
2º cabrestante (H2) 2º cabrestante; Freno multdisco por muelles; Resolver integrado (indicador de rotación del cabrestante);
Incl. acoples rápidos y rack de transporte.
Contrapeso adicional Contrapeso adicional 7,4 t, 3 piezas; para máx. 12,1 t, 7 piezas.
7,4 t
Aire acondicionado Aire acondicionado en cabina de grúa con 5 kW de potencia nominal de refrigeración.
Manipulación
Control remoto Control de los movimientos de la superestructura mediante control remoto inalámbrico.
Desplazamiento desde Control del vehículo desde la cabina de grúa, permite mover la máquina preparada, incluso con carga.
cabina de grúa
Limitador del rango Visualización y programación de los límites del radio de trabajo mediante IC-1.
de trabajo
IC-1 Plus Sistema de control de grúa inteligente para operación de pluma principal que permite capacidades
de carga superiores, especialmente sobre estabilizadores. Permite el uso seguro de la capacidad total
de la grúa, incluso en configuraciones asimétricas de los estabilizadores. Los estabilizadores pueden
ser posicionados independientemente. Precálculo de la capacidad para ángulo de giro +/- 30° y zona
de radio. Simulación de elevación en cabina.
Extensiones
HAV 9 m 9 m; Plumín articulado de celosía, angulable manualmente en 20° / 40°; Cabezal de 1 polea;
Incl. puesto de transporte.
HAV 16 m 16 m; Plumín de doble articulación, angulable manualmente en 20° / 40°; Cabezal de 1 polea;
Incl. puesto de transporte; Contiene HAV 9 m.
MS (runner) 1,5 m; Plumín variable con angulamiento manual; 2 poleas, para capacidad de carga máx. de 26,6 t;
Incl. caja de transporte abierta para el transporte del Runner MS.
Bloques de gancho
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg); Bloque de gancho con lastre ajustable y gancho doble; uso variable como
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg); Bloque de gancho con lastre ajustable y gancho simple; uso variable como
Bloque de gancho 20-1-18-E (300 kg); Bloque de gancho con gancho simple; blanco con franjas rojas de advertencia.
20-1-18-E
Gancho 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg); red.
Más equipamiento adicional a petición.

Los valores de peso pueden ser diferentes a los indicados dependiendo de la configuración de viaje, equipamiento y tolerancia
de los pesos de los componentes.
33

Máquina básica
Equipamento chasis
Motor 260-4 MTU 6R1000; motor Diesel; 260 kW / 2200 rpm (348 HP), torque 1400 Nm /1200-1600 rpm; O motor
atende a Euromot 4 / Tier 4F; sistema de descarga todo em aço inoxidável com catalisador SCR.
Tanque de combustível 390 l Diesel (menos óleo de canola / biodiesel); tanque de 40 l de Ad-Blue.
Transmissão AS-Tronic ZF AS-Tronic; câmbio automático com 12 marchas à frente e 2 à ré; caixa de transferência de 2 estágios
com marcha fora-de-estrada e bloqueio longitudinal selecionáveis.
Eixos 6 x 4 x 6 6 x 4 x 6; 3 eixos, eixos 1 e 3 movidos e equipados com bloqueio transversal selecionável; Todos os
eixos esterçáveis.
Suspensão Suspensão hidropneumática com compensação da carga no eixo; bloqueio hidráulico; alternativa:
compensação manual ou automática.
Direção Direção hidráulica de duplo circuito Servocom com bomba de emergência; direção ativa no eixo traseiro.
Freios Freio de serviço com duplo circuito pneumático e sistema antibloqueio atuando em todas as rodas;
freios a disco; adicional, freio motor de dupla velocidade; freio de estacionamento por ação de mola.
Pneus tamanho Pneus tamanho 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); aros de aço 9,5-25/1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE 170F; ou similar.
385/95 R25 (14.00R25)
Cabine 2550 Tipo 2,55 m; assento do motorista regulável, descansos para braço e suspensão pneumática; volante
com altura e inclinação regulável; assento do auxiliar /passageiro; vidro elétrico nas portas; vidros
fumê; espelhos retrovisores com regulagem elétrica, aquecidos; instalação para rádio.
Faróis dianteiros Com facho baixo, facho alto, luzes de serviço diurno.
Estabilizadores Modelo de 4 pontos em H; movimento vertical e horizontal totalmente hidráulico; opção de nivelamento
manual ou automático; 3 bases para estabilizadores: 3,00 m, 4,50 m e 6,50 m.
Patolas 020 4 patolas redondas A = 0,20 m 2 com posição de transporte no cilindro vertical.
Monitoração da base Monitoração individual do curso horizontal; alerta de desvio na cabine do guindaste.
sobre os estabilizadores
Indicador de carga nos A carga nos estabilizadores é indicada na cabine do operador e na caixa de controle dos estabilizadores.
estabilizadores
Sistema imobilizador Impede a movimentação sem controle do veículo; inclui 5 chaves de ignição.
eletrônico
Adaptador para Pino de enchimento dos pneus para calibragem automática das rodas.
calibragem dos pneus
Marcação de segurança Faixas refletoras contínuas nas laterais e na traseira do chassi.
no entorno
Equipamento superestrutura
Lança telescópica HA50 10,4 - 50 m; sistema telescópico automático com cilindro único; acessórios para todos os equipa
mentos e extensões; 3 roldanas integradas na cabeça da lança, capacidade máx. de 39,5 t.
Elevação da lança 1 pistão elevatório com válvula automática de frenagem da descida.
Acionamento da rotação Unidade da engrenagem de giro única com freio multidisco por ação de mola.
H1 Guincho com freio multidisco por ação de mola; resolvedor (indicador de rotação do guincho).
Contrapeso de 4,7 t 4,7 t; 4 peças; sistema automático de instalação.
Sistema de controle Habilitando 4 movimentos de trabalho simultâneos; controles elétricos da pilotagem por 2 comandos
eletroproporcionais biaxiais; diferentes modos de controle selecionáveis por circuitos hidráulicos.
Equipamentos de IC-1, com indicador eletrônico integrado de momento de carga de acordo com a EN13000; monitor
segurança colorido apresentando as condições de operação no momento, tabelas de carga, indicador de falha;
lâmpadas indicadoras do nível de capacidade; indicador de dados do guindaste.
Indicação de altura do Apresentação e condição de programar a altura do gancho H1 e/ou H2 pelo IC-1.
gancho
Cabine 875 Tipo 875; inclinação infinitamente variável até 16°; janela traseira corrediça; janela dianteira basculante;
plataforma lateral extensível, plataforma frontal; corrimãos; vidro de segurança fumê; quebra-sol tipo
cortina; instalação para rádio.
Calefação independente Calefação por água quente, independente do motor, com 5 kW de potência térmica.
do motor
Anemômetro Removível, pode ser usado com todas as extensões.
34

Equipamentos adicionais
Chasis
Eixos 6 x 6 x 6 6 x 6 x 6; todos esterçáveis, eixos 1 e 3 com tração permanente, eixo 2 com o câmbio, todos equipados
com bloqueio transversal selecionável.
Freio auxiliar sem desgaste Freio auxiliar sem desgaste por corrente parasita no 3º eixo.
Ar condicionado Ar condicionado na cabine do veículo com 7 kW de potência de refrigeração nominal.
Superestrutura
2. guincho (H2) 2. guincho; com freio multidisco por ação de mola; resolvedor (indicador de rotação do guincho)
integrado; inclui engates rápidos e plataforma de transporte.
Contrapeso adicional Contrapeso adicional de 7,4 t, 3 peças; para máx. 12,1 t, 7 peças.
de 7,4 t
Ar condicionado Ar condicionado na cabine do guindaste com 5 kW de potência refrigerante nominal.
Manejo
Controle remoto Controle dos movimentos da superestrutura por controle remoto sem fio.
Movimentação de fora Controle do veículo fora da cabine da grua, permite mover a máquina quando montada, mesmo com
da cabine da grua carga.
Limitador da faixa Exibição e capacidade de programação dos limites da faixa de trabalho pelo IC-1.
de trabalho
IC-1 Plus Sistema inteligente de controle do guindaste para a operação da lança principal permitindo maiores
capacidades de içamento especialmente sobre estabilizadores. Permite o emprego seguro da
capacidade integral do guindaste mesmo em configurações assimétricas dos estabilizadores.
Os estabilizadores podem ser posicionados de maneira independente. Pré-cálculo da capacidade
para +/- 30° de ângulo de giro e área do raio. Simulação do içamento na cabine.
Extensões
HAV 9 m 9 m; Jib articulada treliçada, ajuste manual 20° / 40°; Cabeça de 1 roldana; Incl. armazenagem de
transporte.
HAV 16 m 16 m; Braço extensor com dupla articulação, ajuste manual 20° / 40°; Cabeça de 1 roldana;
Incl. armazenagem de transporte; Inclui HAV 9 m.
MS (ponta de montagem) 1,5 m; ponta de montagem variável com deslocamento manual; 2 roldanas para capacidade de içamento
máxima de 26,6 t; inclui caixa de armazenagem aberta para o transporte da ponta.
Moitões
Gancho Vario 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 kg); moitão com lastro regulável e gancho chifre-de-carneiro, uso variável como
moitão de 1 e 3 roldanas; branco com faixas de sinalização vermelhas.
Gancho Vario 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 kg); moitão com lastro regulável e gancho simples, uso variável como moitão de
1 e 3 roldanas; branco com faixas de sinalização vermelhas.
Moitão 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 kg); moitão com gancho simples; branco com faixas de sinalização vermelhas.
Gancho 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 kg); vermelho.
Outros equipamentos adicionais mediante pedido!

Os dados referentes a peso podem divergir dos valores publicados com base nas configurações para estrada/viagem,
configuração do equipamento e tolerâncias no peso dos componentes.
35

Кран в базовой комплектации

Двигатель 260-4 Дизельный двигатель MTU 6R1000; 260 кВт / 2200 л/мин (348 л.с.), крутящий момент 1400 Нм /
1200-1600 л/мин; двигатель соответствует Евромот 4 / Tier 4F; выхлопная система из
нержавеющей стали в комплекте с катализатором SCR.
Топливный бак 390 л дизель (без RME / биодизель); 40 л Ad-Blue.
Коробка передач ZF AS-Tronic; автоматическая коробка передач с 12 скоростями вперед и 2 назад; 2-ступенчатая
AS-Tronic раздаточная коробка с отключаемым внедорожным приводом и переключаемой продольной
блокировкой.
Оси 6 х 4 х 6 Оси 6 х 4 х 6; 3, оси 1 и 3 управляемые с отключаемой поперечной блокировкой; все мосты
управляемые.
Подвеска Гидропневматическая подвеска с компенсацией нагрузки на ось; с гидравлической блокировкой;
ручное или автоматическое выравнивание в качестве альтернативной опции.
Рулевое управление Гидравлическая двухконтурная система рулевого управления Servocom с аварийным насосом
управления; активное рулевое управление заднего моста.
Тормоза Пневматическая двухконтурная рабочая тормозная система с системой антиблокировки на
все колеса; дисковые тормоза; дополнительный быстрый декомпрессионный тормоз;
Подпружиненный стояночный тормоз.
Размер шин 385/95 R25 Шины размером 385/95 R25 (14.00R25); Стальной обод 9,5-25 / 1,7“; TechKing ETCRANE 170F;
(14.00R25) или аналогичные.
Кабина 2550 Тип 2,55 м; регулируемое сиденье водителя, подлокотники и пневматическая подвеска;
регулируемое по высоте и наклону рулевое колесо; дополнительное / пассажирское сиденье;
электростеклоподъемники дверей; тонированные стекла; электрические зеркала заднего с
подогревом; подготовка под радио.
Фары и подфарники Фары ближнего и дальнего света, дневные ходовые огни.
Выдвижные опоры Конструкция H-4-Point; выдвижение в вертикальном и горизонтальном направлениях полностью
за счет гидравлики; по выбору – ручная или автоматическая регулировка высоты подвески;
3 выносных опоры: 3,00 м, 4,50 м и 6,50 м.
Подушки опоры 020 4 круглые опорные подушки A = 0,20 м2, в транспортном положении укладываются на цилиндр
вертикального перемещения.
Мониторинг базы опор Индивидуальный мониторинг горизонтального положения; предупреждение об отклонении в
кабине крана.
Индикатор нагрузки Нагрузка на опоры отображается на дисплее в кабине крана и на щите управления опорами.
выдвижных опор
Электронный Предотвращает неконтролируемое включение двигателя и движение крана; включает 5 ключа
иммобилайзер зажигания.
Вентиль от пневмосистемы Вентиль подкачки шин от пневмосистемы для автоматической подкачки шин.
для подкачки шин
Маркировка безопасности Непрерывные светоотражающие полосы по бокам корпуса и сзади.
контура
Телескопическая стрела 10,4 м - 50 м; единый цилиндр системы телескопирования, автоматическое телескопирование;
HA50 точки подключения для всего навесного оборудования и удлинителей; 3 шкива интегрированные
в головке стрелы с макс. грузоподъемностью 39,5 т.
Изменение вылета стрелы 1 цилиндр изменения вылета с клапаном автоматического грузоупорного тормоза.
Поворотный привод Единый поворотный механизм с подпружиненным многодисковым тормозом.
H1 Лебедка с подпружиненным многодисковым тормозом; резольвер (индикатор вращения лебедки).
Противовес 4,7 т 4,7 т; 4 штуки; автоматическая система монтажа подъемной стрелы.
Система управления Одновременное выполнение 4 рабочих движений; электронная система пилотного управления с
помощью 2 двух-осевых джойстиков; выбор различных режимов управления для гидравлических
контуров.
Дополнительные Электронная система управления краном IC-1 со встроенным электронным индикатором
устройства грузового момента в соответствии с EN13000; цветной дисплей; отображение текущих условий
эксплуатации, графики нагрузки, индикатор неисправности; сигнализаторы ограничителя
грузового момента; регистратор данных работы крана.
Индикация высоты под Отображение и программирование высоты под крюком электронной системой управления IC-1
крюком для лебедки H1 и/или H2.
Кабина 875 Типа 875; бесступенчатый наклон до 16 °; раздвижные окна сзади; складное переднее окно;
выдвижная боковая подножка, передняя подножка; поручни; тонированное безопасное стекло;
опускаемый солнцезащитный козырек; подготовка для радио.
Обогреватель Водяной обогреватель независимый от двигателя мощностю обогрева 5 кВт.
независимый от двигателя
Анемометр Съемный, для использования на любом удлинителе.
36

Дополнительное оборудование
Оси 6 х 6 х 6 Оси 6 х 6 х 6; 3, все 3 оси управляемые, оси 1 и 3 неотключаемые, ось 2 отключаемая, все оси с
отключаемой поперечной блокировкой.
Неизнашиваемый Неизнашиваемый вспомогательный вихретоковый тормоз на 3-й оси.
вспомогательный тормоз
Кондиционер Кондиционер в кабине шасси с номинальной мощностью охлаждения 7 кВт.
2. Лебедка (H2) Лебедка № 2 с подпружиненным многодисковым тормозом; встроенный резольвер (индикатор
вращения лебедки); включает быстроразъемные соединения и транспортировочную полку.
Дополнительный Дополнительный противовес 7,4 т, 3 секции; максимальный вес 12,1 т, 7 штук.
противовес 7,4 т
Кондиционер Кондиционер в кабине крана с номинальной мощностью охлаждения 5 кВт.
Обработка
Дистанционное управление Управление движением надстройки крана через радиопульт дистанционного управления.
Перемещение шасси с Управление перемещением шасси крана из кабины крана позволяет движение крана в полностью
управлением из кабины собранном виде, даже под нагрузкой.
крана
Ограничитель рабочего Отображение и программирование пределов рабочего диапазона электронной системой
диапазона управления IC-1.
IC-1 Plus Интеллектуальная система управления краном, предназначенная для управления основной
стрелой, позволяет увеличение грузоподъемности особенно при использовании опор.
Позволяет безопасное использование полной грузоподъемности крана даже в асимметричных
конфигурациях выносных опор. Раздельная установка выносных опор. Расчетная грузоподъемность
в пределах угла поворота +/- 30° и рабочей зоны для конкретного радиуса. Моделирование
подъема в кабине.
Удлинители
HAV 9 м 9 м; Решетчатый откидной гусек, ручной установкой угла сдвига 20°/40°; головка на 1 шкив;
вкл. укладку в транспортировочное положение.
HAV 16 м 16 м; Складываемая вдвое откидная дополнительная стрела с ручной установкой угла сдвига
20°/40°; головка на 1 шкив; вкл. укладку в транспортировочное положение; включает HAV 9 m.
MS (с подвижным блоком) 1,5 м; дополнительная сборная стрела изменяемой длины с ручной установкой угла сдвига;
2 шкива, макс. грузоподъемность 26,6 т; в комплект входит открытый ящик для укладки Runner MS
при транспортировке.
Крюкоблоки
VarioHook 50-3B-18-D 50-3B-18-D (300-550 кг); крюкоблок с регулируемым балластом и двойным крюком, используется
для различных целей в качестве крюкоблока с 1- и 3 шкивами; сигнальная маркировка из белых и
красных полос.
VarioHook 50-3B-18-E 50-3B-18-E (300-550 кг); крюкоблок с регулируемым балластом и одиночным крюком, используется
для различных целей в качестве крюкоблока с 1- и 3 шкивами; сигнальная маркировка из белых и
красных полос.
Крюкоблок 20-1-18-E 20-1-18-E (300 кг); крюкоблок с одиночным крюком; сигнальная маркировка из белых и красных
полос.
Крюк 8-0V-18-E 8-0V-18-E (170 кг); красный.
Другое дополнительное оборудование по запросу!

Вес может отличаться от заявленного в зависимости от транспортировочной/дорожной конфигурации, конфигурации
оборудования и допусков на вес компонентов.
37

Notes AC 60-3
Notizen · Notes · Nota · Notas · Notas ·
пометы, комментарии, примечания
38

Notes AC 60-3
Notizen · Notes · Nota · Notas · Notas ·
пометы, комментарии, примечания
39

October 2017. Product specifications and prices are subject to change without notice or obligation. The photographs and/or drawings in this document are for
illustrative purposes only. Refer to the appropriate Operator’s Manual for instructions on the proper use of this equipment. Failure to follow the corresponding
Operator’s Manual when using our equipment or to otherwise act responsibly may result in serious injury or death. The only warranty applicable to our
equipment is the standard written warranty applicable to the particular product and sale and Terex makes no other warranty, express or implied. Products
and services listed may be trademarks, service marks or trade-names of Terex Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in the USA and other countries. All rights
are reserved. Terex, Demag and Above, Ahead, Always are trademarks of or licensed by Terex Corporation or its subsidiaries.
Oktober 2017. Irrtum und Änderungen der Produktspezifikationen vorbehalten. Die in diesem Dokument enthaltenen Fotos und/oder Zeichnungen dienen rein
anschaulichen Zwecken. Für den sachgemäßen Gebrauch der Maschinen ist das entsprechende Bedienerhandbuch heranzuziehen. Unsachgemäßer Umgang
mit bzw. unsachgemäßer Einsatz unserer Maschinen kann zu schweren gesundheitlichen Schäden bis hin zum Tod führen. Für unsere Produkte wird ausschließ-
lich die entsprechende, schriftlich niedergelegte Standardgarantie gewährt. Terex leistet keinerlei darüber hinausgehende Garantie, weder ausdrücklich noch
stillschweigend. Die genannten Produkte und Dienstleistungen sind in den USA und anderen Ländern ggf. Marken, Dienstleistungsmarken oder Handelsnamen
der Terex Corporation und/oder ihrer Tochtergesellschaften. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Terex, Demag und Above, Ahead, Always sind Marken in Eigentum oder
Lizenz der Terex Corporation bzw. ihrer Tochtergesellschaften.
Octobre 2017. Les caractéristiques et prix des produits peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans notification préalable. Les photographies ou dessins présentés
dans ce document servent uniquement à des fins d’illustration. Pour connaître les instructions relatives à l’utilisation correcte de cet équipement, veuillez vous
référer au manuel de l‘utilisateur correspondant. Le non-respect du manuel d’utilisateur correspondant lors de l’utilisation de notre équipement ou des actes
irresponsables risquent de provoquer de graves blessures, voire un décès. La seule garantie applicable à nos équipements est la garantie écrite standard
applicable au produit et à la vente spécifiques. Terex ne délivre aucune autre garantie, expresse ou implicite. Les produits et les services mentionnés peuvent
être des marques, des marques de service ou des appellations commerciales de Terex Corporation et/ou de ses filiales aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Tous droits réservés. Terex, Demag et Above, Ahead, Always sont des marques déposées, propriétés ou sous licence de Terex Corporation ou de ses filiales.
Ottobre 2017. Specifiche e prezzi dei prodotti sono soggetti a modifica senza preavviso o altro obbligo. Le fotografie e i disegni in questo documento hanno
esclusivamente scopo illustrativo. Consulta il Manuale dell‘operatore pertinente per trovare istruzioni per l‘utilizzo corretto di questo macchinario. La mancata
osservanza delle istruzioni contenute nel relativo Manuale dell‘operatore durante l‘uso del macchinario e altri comportamenti irresponsabili possono provocare
gravi lesioni, anche mortali. L‘unica garanzia applicabile ai nostri macchinari è la garanzia scritta standard applicabile al particolare prodotto e alla particolare
vendita e Terex è esonerata dal fornire qualsiasi altra garanzia, esplicita o implicita. I prodotti e servizi elencati possono essere dei marchi di fabbrica, marchi di
servizio o nomi commerciali di Terex Corporation, e/o delle rispettive società affiliate negli Stati Uniti d‘America e in molte altre nazioni. Tutti i diritti riservati.
Terex, Demag e Above, Ahead, Always sono marchi di proprietà o concessi in licenza da Terex Corporation o dalle sue società affiliate.
Octubre 2017. Las especificaciones y los precios de los productos están sujetos a cambios sin necesidad de previo aviso ni ninguna otra obligación. Las fotografías
y /o dibujos de este documento tienen un fin meramente ilustrativo. Consulte el correspondiente manual de instrucciones del operario para obtener más
información sobre el uso correcto de esta maquinaria. No respetar el manual del operario al utilizar la maquinaria o actuar de forma irresponsable puede
provocar lesiones graves e incluso mortales. La única garantía aplicable a nuestra maquinaria es la garantía escrita estándar de cada producto y venta. Terex
no amplía dicha garantía de forma expresa ni implícita. Los productos y servicios mencionados pueden ser marcas comerciales, marcas de servicio o nombres de
marca de Terex Corporation o de alguna de sus filiales en Estados Unidos y otros países. Todos los derechos reservados. Terex, Demag y Above, Ahead, Always
son marcas registradas o con licencia de Terex Corporation o de sus filiales.
Outubro 2017. Especificações e preços dos produtos sujeitos a alteração sem aviso prévio ou obrigações. As fotografias e/ou desenhos neste documento
são apenas para fins ilustrativos. Consulte o respectivo Manual do Operador para instruções sobre o uso correto deste equipamento. Deixar de acompanhar
o respectivo Manual do Operador ao usar o nosso equipamento ou, por qualquer outra forma, deixar de agir de maneira responsável pode resultar em lesões
corporais graves ou a morte. A única garantia aplicável ao nosso equipamento é a garantia padrão por escrito correspondente ao produto específico vendido.
A Terex não dá outras garantias, expressas ou implícitas. Os produtos e serviços listados podem ser marcas comerciais, marcas de serviço ou nomes-fantasia
da Terex Corporation e/ou suas subsidiárias nos EUA e em outros países. Todos os direitos reservados. Terex, Demag e Above, Ahead, Always são marcas
comerciais pertencentes ou licenciadas pela Terex Corporation ou suas subsidiárias.
Окртябрь 2017. года Технические характеристики и цены могут изменяться без предварительного уведомления и без каких-либо обязательств
для производителя. Фотографии и (или) чертежи в настоящем документе служат только в качестве иллюстраций. Инструкции по надлежащей
эксплуатации данного оборудования см. в соответствующем руководстве для оператора. Невыполнение указаний соответствующих руководств для
оператора при эксплуатации оборудования или другие безответственные действия могут повлечь серьезные травмы или смерть. Единственной
гарантией, действующей в отношении нашего оборудования, является стандартная форма письменной гарантии на данный тип оборудования
и на условия его продажи. Terex не дает никаких других гарантий: ни ясно выраженных, ни подразумеваемых. Перечисленные продукты и услуги
могут быть торговыми марками, знаками обслуживания или торговыми наименованиями Terex Corporation и / или ее дочерних компаний в США и
других странах. Все права защищены. Terex, Demag и Above, Ahead, Always являются торговыми марками, принадлежащими Terex Corporation или ее
дочерним компаниям или лицензированы ими.
© Terex Cranes 2017
TEREX CRANES GERMANY GMBH www.terex.com/cranes

Dinglerstraße 24 linkedin.com/company/demagmobilecranes
66482 Zweibrücken facebook.com/TerexCranes
Germany youtube.com/TerexCranesMarketing
E info.cranes@terex.com
T + 49 6332 830

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
05 34
29
F 16 F
B6
A 03
E 24 25 04 E
B3 10
Vue suivant A
ECHELLE 1:10
91 OBTURATEUR TUYAU L22 Q4737784 A 1

81 ECROU Serie L -M22L S2437763 A 1
71 RACCORD PASSE CLOISON 22L S4937587 A 1
61 FLEXIBLE D22L FF/DD L600 A7742214 A 1
41 ECROU H M8 TWOLOK CL8 D2334549 A 2
40 VIS-DIN933-8.8-CLE13-(A2C)-M8X20 E0033814 A 2
B1 06 39 ROND-NFE25513-(A2C)-M-8,4X18X1,5 V0035002 A 2
01
D 38
37
COLLIER A BANDE D77-80
ENTRETOISE
H6836964
Q8528736
A
B
1
2 D
36 SUPPORT ADMISSION W7924187 A 1
35 BOUCHON D10 B6837464 A 1
26 34 COLLIER SUPPORT D10 W0536932 A 1
33 COLLIER D83-D105 TENSION CONSTANTE F6736912 A 2
B2 15 32 COLLIER D70-D92 TENSION CONSTANTE Q6736921 A 6
31 COLLIER D57-D79 TENSION CONSTANTE E6736911 A 8
30 COLLIER D32-D54 TENSION CONSTANTE C6736909 A 2
02 29 COLLIER DE FIXATION D50 B0636917 A 1
28 COLLIER DE SERRAGE D10/D16 P0036951 A 6
33
27 COLLIER D16-27 M0036903 A 4
26 NORMAQUICK PS3 NW32 A7943234 A 1
25 NORMAQUICK PS3 NW6-90 Q7943248 A 3
24 TIRANT M10 LG 120 G0243047 A 2
23 14 23 NORMAQUICK PS3 NW6-0 S7943250 A 1
12
22 DURITE D38 L1600 B7542253 B 1
B6 22 21 DURITE D9,5 L50 W7542226 A 1
C 21
08 39
20
19
DURITE D9,5 L500
DURITE D18 L1900
W7542226
L1503681
A
A
1
1
C
B5 18 DURITE D18 L1050 L1503681 A 1
17 DURITE COUDE D60 S7050137 B 1
35 11 40 37 16 DURITE D9,5 L860 W7542226 B 1
B5 15 MANCHON COUDE 90D D85 K7943289 A 1
14 MANCHON DI60-50 L80 L7743259 A 1
41 13 MANCHON DI50 L100 K7743258 A 2
12 MANCHON D80 L90 R7943249 A 1
20 28 09 11 MANCHON ONDULATION D65 L150 R7843291 B 1
10 DURITE ONDULATION D80 L290 L7943290 A 1
09 COLLECTEUR SORTIE EAU D50 D7350136 B 1
08 COLLECTEUR EAU D60 C7350135 B 1
07 COLLECTEUR ENTREE AIR P7350192 A 1
06 TUYAU D85-80 L198 X7350177 B 1
17 38 05 SUPPORT GA VASE D'EXPANSION U6126459 A 1
30 04 SUPPORT DR VASE D'EXPANSION T6126458 A 1
07
B B5 36
03
02
VASE EXPANSION OM936
BUSE RADIATEUR P12312 / P12315 T4F
D6540214
P7943247
A
A
1
1 B
01 RADIATEUR P12312 / P12315 T4F N7943246 A 1
31
B4 REP NOM PRMS REV QTE
27/10/15 MGSZ 1)ETAIT B7350134; 2)ETAIT R7943249; 3)ETAIT S7843292; 4)ETAIT E7350137; 5)AJOUT; 6)ETAIT INDICE A 14046 B
13 17/03/15 MGSZ CREATION SERIE 13739 A
DATE NOM/NAME ETAIT AVANT MODIFICATION/WAS BEFORE MODIFICATION MODIF REP IND
19
PROJET/PROJECT:
TEREX CRANES FRANCE
61 POIDS/WEIGHT: Kg ZI DE LA SAULE 71304 MONTCEAU LES MINES
32 ECHELLE 1:12 MATIERE/MATERIAL: CE PLAN EST LA PROPRIETE DE TEREX. IL NE PEUT ETRE NI REPRODUIT,
NI COMMUNIQUE SANS NOTRE AUTORISATION / THIS DRAWING IS THE
18 Sce Emetteur: DRD
PROPERTY OF TEREX. IT IS NOT TO BE USED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT
71 OUR AUTHORIZATION
VERIFIE LE: 17/03/15 PAR

MJGA Description francais
A DESSINE LE: 17/03/15 PAR ASSEMBLAGE REFROIDISSEMENT
MGSZ Description
A
91 anglais
27 FAMILLE TEREX: 44-P10 COOLING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY
FEUIL/SHEET ECH/SCALE N Teamcenter N Prms Indice
81 A2 1/1 1:10 PR0302088 CR109782 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 COLLIER ECHAPPEMENT 5" X6636993 A 2
16 COLLIER INOX SERRAGE 125MM S6736969 A 3
F 15 BRIDE DE SERRAGE D89 L6636982 A 1 F
14 COLLIER ECHAPPEMENT MERCEDES H6836941 A 1
12 13 SUPPORT ECHAPPEMENT A6326058 A 1
05
12 COLLIER+PONTET P6736966 A 2
11 COLLIER INOX SERRAGE 132MM T6736970 A 1
10 GRILLE INOX BROSSE E7250110 A 1
09 CAPTEUR DE TEMPERATURE Q8641344 A 1
10 08 CAPTEUR NOx CATALYSEUR M8641341 A 1
07 CAPTEUR NOx COLLECTEUR N8641342 A 1
06 MODULE INJECTEUR AD-BLUE Q7250166 A 1
05 TUYAU SORTIE CATALYSEUR D7250109 B 1
04 TUYAU ENTREE CATALYSEUR M7350190 A 1
E 01
E
03 COUDE AD-BLUE P7250165 A 1
11 02 TUYAU SORTIE TURBO G7350185 B 1
01 CATALYSEUR T4F P12312/P12315 H7141415 A 1
REP NOM PRMS REV QTE
ISOLATION ECHAPPEMENT N7350191
08 KIT ECHAPPEMENT X8490517

D D
04
C C
03
17
06
07
09
B 14 16 B
ECHELLE 1:10
02 16/03/15 MGSZ CREATION SERIE 14046 A

DATE NOM/NAME ETAIT AVANT MODIFICATION/WAS BEFORE MODIFICATION MODIF REP IND
PROJET/PROJECT:
TEREX CRANES FRANCE
POIDS/WEIGHT: Kg ZI DE LA SAULE 71304 MONTCEAU LES MINES
13 MATIERE/MATERIAL: CE PLAN EST LA PROPRIETE DE TEREX. IL NE PEUT ETRE NI REPRODUIT,
NI COMMUNIQUE SANS NOTRE AUTORISATION / THIS DRAWING IS THE
PROPERTY OF TEREX. IT IS NOT TO BE USED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT
Sce Emetteur: DRD OUR AUTHORIZATION
VERIFIE LE: 16/03/15 PAR

MJGA Description francais
A DESSINE LE: 16/03/15 PAR ASSEMBLAGE ECHAPPEMENT
MGSZ Description
A
15 anglais
FAMILLE TEREX: 44-P20 EXHAUST SYSTEM ASSEMBLY
ECHELLE 1:10 Indice
FEUIL/SHEET ECH/SCALE N Teamcenter N Prms
A2 1/1 1:10 PR0309986 CR110044 A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 Exhaust Aftertreatment System
In addition to the new, efficient in-line engines from Mercedes-Benz, innovations and optimized technical
solutions save fuel and therefore CO2.
The exhaust aftertreatment system is a major part of this.
Depending on emissions legislation and the associated certification, the following technologies are used in the
exhaust aftertreatment system:
• Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) with ammonia slip catalytic converter is used in all systems.
SCR reduces NOx emissions and is required for fuel to be burned in the engine with particular
efficiency.
17.1 Exhaust Aftertreatment System – System Description
BlueTec AdBlue FLO Dosiersystem 03.jpg
1 Pump module A4 Motor control module (MCM)

2 Exhaust aftertreatment unit A60 Aftertreatment control module (ACM)
5 AdBlue® tank A67 AdBlue® metering equipment
7 AdBlue® processing reactor B74 AdBlue® fill level sensor/temperature sensor
M25 SCR feed pump CAN 4 Drive CAN
S AdBlue® intake line D AdBlue® delivery line
R AdBlue® return line
The basic functions of the exhaust aftertreatment system as a whole are monitored and regulated by the motor
control module (MCM) (A4) and the aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60).
After the engine is switched on, the motor control module (MCM) (A4) starts an automatic background test
routine to check the operational readiness of the exhaust aftertreatment system. Once the system has been
released, the SCR feed pump (M25) integrated in the pump module (1) is engaged, taking in AdBlue® from the
AdBlue® tank (5) and pumping it to the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) via the AdBlue® feed line.
Because AdBlue® injection into the exhaust flow is not a constant process, the AdBlue® flows via the AdBlue®
return line back to the AdBlue® tank. This circulation takes place continuously, irrespective of whether AdBlue®
is actually injected. This results in circulation cooling, which protects the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67)
installed directly on the AdBlue® processing reactor (7) from damage due to overheating.
11/24/2014 Installation Instructions for Mechanical Components of Mercedes-Benz Engine Systems 153
• OM 93x & OM 47x EU Stage IV / US Tier 4

Reduction of NOx in SCR catalytic converter
The injection of AdBlue® into the exhaust flow is determined by the aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60).
If AdBlue® is to be injected, the injection timing and the amount to be injected are calculated and the AdBlue®
metering equipment (A67) activated accordingly.
The AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) injects AdBlue® into the hydrolysis segment in the AdBlue® processing
reactor (7), directly into the exhaust flow.
Here, the AdBlue® mixes with the exhaust and, in the first stage of the process, decomposes to form ammonia
(NH3). Together with the nitrogen oxide molecules (NOx) generated during combustion, the ammonia (NH3)
created continues as part of the exhaust flow to the SCR catalytic converter. The honeycomb in the latter has a
special coating that enables the conversion of NH3 and NOx into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O).
Operational monitoring
The system is permanently monitored by a number of diagnostics routines. If required, diagnostic trouble codes
are issued and operational restrictions activated.
Heater
In order to ensure operational safety even in the event of frost, the AdBlue® lines and the components must be
combined with heaters ( section 18.2).
Run-on
Depending on the installed position, operating conditions and ambient temperature, system run-on may be
necessary to ensure cooling. The duration is calibrated in the aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60).
The supply of power must be safeguarded throughout the entire run-on period.
154 Installation Instructions for Mechanical Components of Mercedes-Benz Engine Systems 11/24/2014
• OM 93x & OM 47x EU Stage IV/US Tier 4

18 AdBlue® Supply
The Future Liquid Only (FLO) dosing system is used for AdBlue® supply and AdBlue® injection:
18.1 AdBlue® Circuit
18.1.1 AdBlue® circuit – system description
Sample illustration of FLO dosing

system
1 Pump module
5 AdBlue® tank
A67 AdBlue® metering
equipment
S AdBlue® intake line

D AdBlue® delivery line
BlueTec AdBlue Kreislauf_FLO.jpg
AdBlue® circulates in the line system between the AdBlue® tank (5), pump module (1), AdBlue® metering
equipment (A67) and back again to the AdBlue® tank (5).
The AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) is installed on the AdBlue® processing reactor and is therefore exposed
to high temperatures.
AdBlue® thus constantly circulates from engine start and, where required, in a run-on period after engine stop
for recirculation cooling purposes.
Depending on the installed position, operating conditions and ambient temperature, system run-on may be
necessary to ensure cooling.
The supply of power must be safeguarded throughout the entire run-on period.

18.1.2 AdBlue® circuit – installation specifications
Scope of delivery
Some of the components in the AdBlue® circuit are included loose in the delivery to the OEM. The remaining
components can additionally be obtained from the Daimler AG Mercedes-Benz vehicle program. If the OEM uses
its own components or components from other suppliers, the applicable specifications must be considered.
Assembly is performed by the OEM, taking the installation specifications into consideration.
Material damage
Installation spaces through which a medium flows must be clean during installation.
Contamination enters the medium during operation and can lead to premature wear and severe damage to the
engine system.
The OEM must ensure that all components installed by the OEM meet the requirements pertaining to technical
cleanliness ( section 5.7).
18.1.2.1 Installed position of the components

Sample illustration of FLO
dosing system
1 Pump module
5 AdBlue® tank
A67 AdBlue® metering
equipment
B74 Fill level sensor/
temperature sensor
(AdBlue®)
S AdBlue® intake line

D AdBlue® delivery line
h1 Height difference – intake

side
h2 Height difference – delivery
side
h3 Height difference – return
AdBlue Einbaulage Komponenten_FLO.jpg
The permissible installed position of the components depends on the line length, height difference (h1, h2) and
line cross-sections.
The permissible pressure drop must not be exceeded.
Requirement Intake line (S)

Line cross-section D (internal) 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm
Line length 0.5 m 1.0 m 1.5 m 2.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m 4.0 m 5.0 m
Maximum height difference h1 0.5 m 1.0 m 1.2 m 1.2 m 1.2 m 0.9 m 0.2 m 0m
The OEM must make the intake line length and the height difference (h1) as low as possible.
It is also possible to undercut the minimum length of the intake line.
Requirement Delivery line (D) Return line (R)

Line cross-section D (internal) 4 mm 4 mm
Line length 0.5 m - 15 m
Maximum height difference h2 2m
The minimum length of the delivery line must be complied with.

18.1.3 AdBlue® lines – installation specifications
General:
• The AdBlue® lines must be flexible so that frost expansion can be accommodated in the lines
themselves.
• There must be no reductions in cross-section in the lines. It must be ensured that the lines are not
crushed or kinked.
• The minimum bending radii chosen during routing must not result in reductions in cross-sections.
• The lines must be fastened securely.
• The maximum distances for the line fastening points are 300 mm.
• The maximum pressure drop must not be exceeded.
• The pressure drop in the line is determined by the line cross-section and length.
If the individual components are arranged at different heights, this height difference must be
considered as an additional pressure difference.
• No air or dirt may be introduced into the system through the intake line (necessary pre-filtering (
section 18.3.2).
• The specifications ( section 18.2.2) must be taken into account for AdBlue® line heating.
Intake line
Max. permissible pressure drop: 0.35 bar (at Q=0.25 l/min).
Min. burst pressure: 5 bar
Operating pressure: 0.5 – 1.1 bar absolute
Material: PA, NBR, EPDM
A pre-filter with a minimum mesh width of 100 μm is required. If applicable, the filter is already integrated
in the tank ( section 18.3.2).
Delivery line
Material: EPDM, NBR
Return line
Material: PA, NBR, EPDM
Technical cleanliness
 section 5.7

18.2 AdBlue® Heater
18.2.1 AdBlue® heater – system description
BlueTec AdBlue Kreislauf_Heizung_FLO.jpg
1 Pump module C1 Coolant feed line from engine

5 AdBlue® tank C2 Coolant feed line to AdBlue® tank
A4 Motor control module (MCM) C3 Coolant feed line to pump module
A60 Aftertreatment control module (ACM) C4 Coolant return line to engine
A67 AdBlue® metering equipment S AdBlue® intake line
B74 AdBlue® fill level sensor/temperature sensor D AdBlue® delivery line
Y627 AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve R AdBlue® return line
AdBlue® heater
AdBlue® freezes from a temperature of approx. -11°C. The AdBlue® heater ensures that AdBlue® that has frozen
while the vehicle was stationary becomes fluid again and prevents it from freezing during vehicle operation in
the case of low ambient temperatures.
Coolant is directed through the AdBlue® tank (5) and the pump module (1).
The AdBlue® lines and connectors are heated electrically.
Alternatively, it may be possible to heat the AdBlue® lines by bundling them with the coolant line system.

Function of AdBlue® heater via coolant
The AdBlue® heater comprises the AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627), the piping integrated in the
AdBlue® tank, the coolant ducts in the pump module and the coolant line system.
Daimler AG recommends that the flow follow the sequence shown in the illustrated system description.
By means of the AdBlue® fill level/temperature sensor (B74) integrated in the AdBlue® tank (5), the
aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60) detects when the temperature of the contents of the tank is
approaching the defined limit of approximately -8°C. If this is the case and the coolant temperature has already
reached a temperature of 0°C, the AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627) is opened so that coolant
flows through the line system.
The AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627) is actuated by the aftertreatment control module (ACM)
(A60).
Function of AdBlue® line heating by resistance heating elements

The heating coils of the heating elements integrated in the AdBlue® lines are actuated by the aftertreatment
control module (ACM) (A60).
Decisive here are the temperature provided by the AdBlue® fill level/temperature sensor (B74).
18.2.2 AdBlue® heater – installation specifications

The configuration of the AdBlue® heater is the responsibility of the OEM.
The heating for the AdBlue® tank (5) and the pump module (1 ) is carried out with coolant. In the arrangement of
the components of the coolant flow AdBlue® tank (5) in front of the pump module (1) has to be considered
( section 18.2.1).
Depending on the usage profile, heating of the AdBlue® lines can take place electrically by means of resistance
heating elements ( section 18.2.3) or with coolant by means of bundled coolant lines.
When the AdBlue® tank (5) provided by Daimler and the pump module (1) are supplied with coolant,
approximately 140 l/h of water is taken from the cooling system for this purpose. Since the coolant pump
circulates this volume of water many times over, sufficient heat is available to the heater heat exchanger.
The following basically applies: The OEM must ensure rapid AdBlue® liquefaction and subsequent
AdBlue® circulation.
This is imperative for:
• Fulfillment of legislation/certification requirements.
The system must be ready for metering after a maximum thawing time of 40 minutes.
• Cooling of AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) and avoidance of overheating of the injection nozzle
( section 18.5.2).
Note
If the required cooling on the injection nozzle of the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) is not ensured, the
result may be failure of the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67)
18.2.3 AdBlue® line heating by resistance heating elements – installation specifications

The lines and connectors should be equipped with integrated resistance heating elements in all line sections.
The heating elements integrated in the AdBlue® lines can be actuated by the aftertreatment control module
(ACM) (A60). Five outputs are available for this purpose.
Consult specialist department for further specifications.
Further information specific to the control modules and electronic systems can be found in the Engine Data
Manual ( EDM ▸ Technical manuals ▸ Operating Instructions ▸ All Series).

18.2.4 AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve – component description
Arrangement
The AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627) is included loose in the scope of delivery.
It is assembled by the OEM.
Structure
The AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve
(Y627) is a 2/2-way valve.
Inside, the valve body takes the form of a
magnet plunger.
1 Electrical connector
2 Coolant inlet
3 Coolant outlet
Y627 AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve
W14.40-1573-71
Function
The AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627) is actuated by the aftertreatment control module (ACM)
(A60).
The valve opens and coolant is diverted from the engine coolant circuit.
When the AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627) is not open, the coolant is present at the closed valve
body inside the component.
This valve body holds the passage between the coolant supply line and the coolant working line closed using
the force of a pressure spring.
When power is supplied, the valve body moves and the passage is opened so that coolant can flow through.
When the power supply to the valve body is disconnected, the spring presses it back to its initial position. This
blocks the passage again.

18.2.5 AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve – installation specifications
Scope of delivery
The AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627) is supplied loose in the delivery to the OEM.
Illustration of AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve

(Y627)
1 Electrical connector
2 Coolant inlet
3 Coolant outlet
Y627 AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve
W14.40-1573-71
Technical data
Rated voltage: 24 V DC
Protection class: IP6K9K
Temperatures
Ambient temperatures: -40°C to +85°C
Hydraulic connections
Coolant inlet: Normaquick PS3 NW12 connector
Coolant outlet: Normaquick PS3 NW12 connector
The electrical connection and the geometric data specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data
Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸ Technical Data ▸ Engine Description ▸ "Installation Drawing") and for the
options (EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸ Optional Data ▸ MU Cold Start Accessories).
Initial commissioning
Before initial commissioning of the engine, the AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627) must be actuated
during initial filling of the coolant circuit by means of XENTRY Diagnostics.
Connection to coolant circuit for OM 93x

The AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627)
is connected to the engine at the coolant feed
connection point (2) for the oil/coolant module
(1).
The coolant return is installed in the piping on the

chassis as per the coolant circuit diagram
( section 7.2.2).
1 Oil/coolant module
2 Coolant feed connection point
Anbindung SCR Magnetventil OM 934.jpg

Connection to coolant circuit for OM 470
For connection of the AdBlue® heater coolant
solenoid valve (Y627) to the engine, the OEM
must replace the banjo bolt (A) with a double
banjo bolt. Connection to the coolant feed takes
place via an additional banjo union with a line to
the AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve
(Y627).
The coolant return is installed in the piping on

the chassis as per the coolant circuit diagram
( section 7.2.1).
Connection to coolant circuit

for OM 471/473
For connection of the AdBlue® heater coolant
solenoid valve (Y627) to the engine, the OEM
must replace the stopper (A) with a banjo bolt.
Connection to the coolant feed takes place via a
banjo union with a line to the AdBlue® heater
coolant solenoid valve (Y627).
The coolant return is installed in the piping on
the chassis as per the coolant circuit diagram
( section 7.2.1).
Further information on connection of the AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627) specific to the major
units can be found in the Engine Data Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸ Technical Data ▸ Engine Description ▸
"Installation Drawing").

18.3 AdBlue® Supply
18.3.1 AdBlue® tank – component description

Illustration of Mercedes-Benz tank
1 AdBlue® tank
2 AdBlue® filter
3 Coolant duct
4 Filler neck
5 Vent
6 Coolant inlet (from engine)
7 Coolant outlet (to pump module)
8 AdBlue® inlet (return line from AdBlue® metering
equipment)
9 AdBlue® outlet (feed line to pump module)
10 Electrical connection
B74 AdBlue® fill level sensor/temperature sensor
W14.40-1564-81
AdBlue®filling
The filler neck (4), with its narrow diameter and integrated solenoid adapter, is intended to prevent incorrect
filling, e.g. with diesel.
Upon filling, the magnetic field of the solenoid adapter actuates a solenoid switch located in the outlet pipe of
the pump nozzle, thus enabling the filling process to commence.
This system similarly prevents the diesel fuel tank from being incorrectly filled with AdBlue®, as its filler neck
does not have a solenoid adapter; the solenoid switch in the pump nozzle only allows refueling where a defined
magnetic field exists.
AdBlue® heating
The coolant coming from the engine and/or the AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve travels through the
coolant inlet (6) and the coolant duct (3), then through the coolant outlet (7) and onward to the pump module.
The heat transfer in the coolant duct (3) thaws any frozen AdBlue® and prevents liquid AdBlue® from freezing at
low temperatures during operation.
AdBlue® monitoring
The AdBlue® fill level/temperature sensor (B74) is screwed into the AdBlue® tank from the outside in order to
determine the AdBlue® fill level and AdBlue® temperature.
An AdBlue® quality sensor is also required.
The AdBlue® fill level/temperature sensor and quality sensor can be combined in one housing unit.

18.3.2 AdBlue® tank – installation specifications
It is expressly pointed out that the AdBlue® quality, fill level and temperature sensors must be
coordinated to the AdBlue® tank.
The OEM is responsible for ensuring that the requirements regarding function and legally compliant
operation are met.
General requirements:
• The AdBlue® tank must fulfill all legal requirements.
• The AdBlue® tank must be leak-tight.
• The tank and all components must be chemically compatible with AdBlue®.
• Changes to the AdBlue® in the tank due to erosion, dissolution or a conversion of the materials used in
the tank are not permitted.
• The tank must have a vent to the atmosphere.
• The tank must be made from HDPE (high-density polyethylene) or a material of equal quality.
• An information label ( section 18.3.3) must be affixed in a clearly visible location near the filler neck.
Dimensioning:
• The AdBlue® tank must be sufficiently dimensioned.
The volume must be sufficient to cover at least one diesel refueling for the vehicle.
A volume at a ratio of 1:2 relative to the vehicle diesel refueling is recommended.
In other words, the AdBlue® tank should be dimensioned such that the operator has to refill the
AdBlue® tank only in the case of every second diesel tank refill at the earliest.
• The tank design must also take into account the required expansion volume due to heat expansion or
frost expansion in the case of frozen AdBlue®. The expansion volume should be at least 12% of the total
volume.
• To ensure sufficient AdBlue® component cooling, the tank must be designed such that enough AdBlue®
"dead volume" remains in the tank even if the AdBlue® fill level sensor reading is 0% ( section 18.3.5).
• The minimum filling capacity in the tank must be enough that even in unfavorable conditions, such as a
minimum fill level combined with permissible inclined angles and sloshing motions, no air is taken in
and AdBlue® is not heated above the permissible temperature by circulatory pumping to cool the
metering equipment.
• The maximum permitted temperature for AdBlue® in the tank is 60°C.
Further information on AdBlue® consumption specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data
Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸ Technical Data ▸ Exhaust System ▸ "AdBlue Consumption, Related to Fuel
Consumption, approx.").
Heater
The AdBlue® tank must feature a sufficiently dimensioned heater to provide an adequate amount of liquid
AdBlue® promptly after a cold start.
This is necessary in order to fulfill legal requirements and to ensure cooling in the AdBlue® metering equipment
(A67) ( section 18.5.2).
Filler neck:
• The filler neck on the AdBlue® tank must be designed such that AdBlue® cannot leak or spill out.
In order that the tank is not incorrectly filled, e.g. with diesel, a small cross-section must be used for
the filler neck.
• An integrated solenoid adapter must be provided in the filler neck for the release of the AdBlue® nozzle.

Fill level and temperature detection
The OEM must provide an AdBlue® temperature and fill level sensor for the monitoring of the AdBlue® fill level
and AdBlue® temperature in the AdBlue® tank ( sections 18.3.4 and 18.3.5).
The OEM must provide a constantly visible AdBlue® fill level indicator in the driver's cockpit.
Quality determination
The OEM must provide an AdBlue® quality sensor to monitor the quality of the AdBlue® supply in the AdBlue®
tank ( section 18.3.6).
Line connections:
• The AdBlue® line connections on the tank must be designed in accordance with the SAE J-2044
standards.
- AdBlue® outlet line connection (feed line to pump module): 1x90° SAE J-2044 5/16".
- AdBlue® inlet line connection (return from AdBlue® metering equipment): 1x90° SAE J-2044 5/16".
• The AdBlue® line connections on the tank must lie below the minimum tank level (empty fill level).
• A pre-filter with minimum mesh width 100 μm is required on the AdBlue® intake side.
• The AdBlue® feed line connection must be located in the tank heater area.
• The AdBlue® feed line and return line connections must be located in the immediate vicinity of the SCR
AdBlue® temperature and fill level combination sensor.
18.3.3 AdBlue® tank information label

An information label must be affixed in a clearly visible location near the filler neck.
Sample illustration for Europe

A 930 584 24 38: "AdBlue® ONLY – No Diesel"
Sample illustration for NAFTA

A 629 584 00 07: "DEF Diesel Exhaust Fluid ONLY"

18.3.4 AdBlue® fill level/temperature sensor – component description
Arrangement
The AdBlue® fill level/temperature sensor (B74) is screwed into the AdBlue® tank from the outside.
Task
The AdBlue® fill level/temperature sensor (B74) detects the fluid level and temperature of the AdBlue® supply
in the AdBlue® tank (1).
Structure
Illustration of Mercedes-Benz component
2 AdBlue® inlet (return line from AdBlue® metering

equipment)
3 AdBlue® outlet (feed line to pump module)
4 Coolant outlet (to pump module)
5 Coolant inlet (from engine)
7 Float
8 Bayonet ring
9 Immersion tube
10 AdBlue® filter
11 Coolant duct
B74 AdBlue® fill level sensor/temperature sensor
W14.40-1571-81
The AdBlue® fill level/temperature sensor (B74) contains separate components for detecting the fill level and
temperature.
Fill level sensor

The fill level is ascertained by the immersion tube (9) with its integrated resistance measuring chain consisting,
for example, of reed contacts and a float (7) containing a permanent magnet.
Temperature sensor
For temperature measurement, there is a measuring element based on a negative temperature coefficient (NTC)
resistor at the lower end of the immersion tube (9).
Function
Fill level detection:
The sensor for detecting the fill level works on the basis of the float principle with magnetic transmission. A ring
magnet installed in the float (7) actuates very small reed contacts with its magnetic field through the wall of the
immersion tube (9). These reed contacts pick up an uninterrupted measurement voltage on a resistance
measuring chain (voltage divider principle) that is proportional to the fill level.
The values of the electrical resistance, which changes with the position of the float (7), are transmitted at
defined intervals as an analog signal via the aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60) to the motor control
module (MCM) (A4). This uses the resistance value to determine the corresponding fill level.
Temperature detection:
The AdBlue® surrounding the AdBlue® fill level/temperature sensor (B74) influences – depending on its
temperature – the measuring element in the sensor and thus the size of the electrical resistance.
The values of the changing electrical resistance are transmitted at defined intervals as an analog signal via the
aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60) to the motor control module (MCM) (A4). This uses the resistance
value to determine the corresponding temperature.

18.3.5 AdBlue® fill level/temperature sensor – installation specifications
An AdBlue® temperature and fill level sensor must be provided in the AdBlue® tank by the OEM for the
monitoring of the AdBlue® fill level and AdBlue® temperature.
AdBlue® temperature sensor:

• Signal acquisition can take place via the analog input on the aftertreatment control module (ACM) or be
fed in via the J1939 protocol.
• The temperature sensor must be designed to function for the service life of the vehicle.
• The AdBlue® temperature sensor must be located in the immediate vicinity of the AdBlue® intake for
the AdBlue® tank.
• The measurement range of the AdBlue® temperature sensor must extend at least from -40°C to 85°C
liquid temperature, to a minimum measurement accuracy of ± 1°C.
AdBlue® fill level sensor:

• Signal acquisition can take place via the analog input on the aftertreatment control module (ACM) or be
fed in via the J1939 protocol.
• The fill level indicator must be designed to function for the service life of the vehicle.
• The AdBlue® fill level sensor must ensure precise determination of the AdBlue® fill level.
A measurement accuracy of ± 10 mm is recommended.
It can function in accordance with the float principle, e.g. with reed contacts.
• Levels of 0% (empty) and 20% (reserve) must be reliably detected.
• A plausible signal concerning the fill level must be issued in all conditions.
• The characteristic curve for the AdBlue® fill level must be parameterized by the OEM in the common
powertrain controller (CPC4) (A3).
Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸ Technical manuals ▸ Operating Instructions ▸ All Series).
Dead volume
Reliable fill level sensing is critical when the tank fill level is low, especially during operation in an inclined
position.
For this reason, the tank and tank fill level sensor must be laid out such that the fill level sensor "Tank empty" is
displayed when a residual volume of 5% is reached in the tank.
The tank fill level sensor must be calibrated with a 5% deviation so that the 10% AdBlue® display really
corresponds to 15% AdBlue® in the tank.
This prevents air intake and fulfills the legal requirement that sufficient AdBlue® is available and can be
metered.
The sensor signal "Tank empty" stops AdBlue® injection and the corresponding warning and operating
restrictions come into effect.

18.3.6 AdBlue® quality sensor – component description
Arrangement
The quality sensor can be screwed into the AdBlue® tank from the outside or integrated in the AdBlue® intake
line.
The quality sensor can be combined with an AdBlue® fill level sensor and an AdBlue® temperature sensor.
Sample illustration:
Combined AdBlue® quality/fill level/temperature
sensor
1 AdBlue® tank
2 Filler neck
3 Electrical connection for AdBlue® quality sensor
4 Vent
AdBlue Qualitätssensor.jpg
Task
The AdBlue® quality sensor determines the quality of the AdBlue® supply in the AdBlue® tank.
The AdBlue® quality sensor is not included in the scope of delivery.
18.3.7 AdBlue® quality sensor – installation specifications

The OEM must provide an AdBlue® quality sensor to monitor AdBlue® quality.
The AdBlue® quality sensor is not included in the scope of delivery.
The AdBlue® quality sensor can be installed in combination with an AdBlue® fill level sensor and an AdBlue®
temperature sensor.
The specifications for the sensor can be requested from the specialist department.
• Signal acquisition is fed in via the J1939 protocol on the aftertreatment control module (ACM).
• Installed in the AdBlue tank near the AdBlue® intake fitting or in the feed line (line sensor).
• The quality evaluation must be designed to function for the service life of the vehicle.

Requirements:
• The AdBlue® quality sensor must issue a signal giving the urea concentration in the AdBlue® solution as
a percentage of the total liquid mass (referred to in the following as "reagent").
The AdBlue® quality sensor must distinguish all substances that might be found in the AdBlue system of
a heavy-duty diesel engine (water, diesel, oil, coolant etc.) and compensate for them in the signal.
• The urea concentration in the reagent must be measured across the entire liquefied operating mode (-
11°C to 60°C).
• A frozen reagent causes an "out of range" signal, which must be interpreted accordingly by the ACM.
• Necessary measurement accuracy:
± 3% reagent concentration (from -7°C to 60°C liquid temperature),
reduced to ± 1% as of mid-2015.
• Measured values must be output no more than 30 seconds after activation of the sensor. During the
activation period, the sensor must provide the last detected value.
• Response characteristics: max. 20 seconds after change in reagent quality.
Electrical connection
When the combined AdBlue® quality/fill level/temperature sensor is used, it must be pinned into the ACM's
120-pin connector by the OEM.
Pin assignment
Pin X120-47: Sensor ground
Pin X120-48: CAN4 High
Pin X120-49: CAN4 Low
Pin X120-62: Sensor voltage: 24 V
Technical data
Rated voltage: 24 V
Overvoltage: 35 V (max.)
Undervoltage: 10.5 V (min.)
Current consumption: 1 A (constant)
Current consumption: 6 A (max.)
Protection class: IP 6K 7 / IP 6K 9K / IP 6K X
EMC Directive: MBN 10284-1 and 10284-2
Temperatures
Operating temperature: -40°C to max. 85°C
Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸ Technical manuals ▸ Operating Instructions ▸ All Series).

18.4 AdBlue® Pump Module
18.4.1 AdBlue® FLO pump module – component description

Task
The pump module intakes AdBlue® from the AdBlue® tank, filters it and pumps it to the AdBlue® A67 metering
equipment. This function is integrated in the aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60).
Structure
The pump module consists of three main components: The motor housing (3) made of plastic, the basic body
(4) made of aluminum and the filter housing (5) made of plastic. The SCR feed pump (M25) is screwed into the
bracket via the basic body (4). The basic body (4) contains integrated coolant ducts for the heating system.
Illustration of FLO pump module

3 Motor housing
4 Basic body
5 Filter housing
7 Electrical connection (communication with
aftertreatment control module (ACM))
8 AdBlue® inlet
9 Intake filter
(mesh width 190 μm)
10 AdBlue® outlet
11 Ventilation membranes
12 Coolant inlet
13 Coolant outlet
14 Pressure regulating valve
15 Main filter
(mesh width 20-30 µm)
M25 SCR feed pump
FLO Pumpenmodul 01.jpg
8 AdBlue® inlet
9 Intake filter
10 AdBlue® outlet
11 Antifreeze element
12 Coolant inlet
13 Coolant outlet
15 Main filter
M25 SCR feed pump
Hydr. Schaubild Pumpenmodul.jpg
Function
After the engine is started, the aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60) activates the pump module. The SCR
feed pump (M25) starts, resulting in AdBlue® being drawn in from the AdBlue® tank and pumped towards the
AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) at an operating pressure of approximately 10 bar.

Because the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) is circulation-cooled by circulating AdBlue®, AdBlue® is
pumped constantly, irrespective of whether injection is actually required. The AdBlue® that is not required or
not injected flows back to the AdBlue® tank via the return line.
Heating
Coolant from the engine flows through the pump module for heating and/or de-icing purposes via a duct inside
the basic body (4). The supply of coolant is managed based on temperature by the aftertreatment control
module (ACM) (A60) via the AdBlue® heater coolant solenoid valve (Y627) ( section 18.2.4).
Run-on
If necessary, to prevent damage caused by overheating on the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67), the pump
module (1) continues to pump AdBlue® for a while after the engine is switched off so as to ensure that cooling
is still maintained for some time.
18.4.2 AdBlue® FLO pump module – installation specifications

Scope of delivery
The AdBlue® FLO pump module is included loose in the delivery to the OEM.
Illustration of FLO pump module

3 Motor housing
4 Basic body
5 Filter housing
7 Electrical connection (communication with
aftertreatment control module (ACM))
8 AdBlue® inlet
9 Intake filter
(mesh width 190 μm)
10 AdBlue® outlet
11 Ventilation membranes
12 Coolant inlet
13 Coolant outlet
15 Main filter
(mesh width 20-30 µm)
M25 SCR feed pump
FLO Pumpenmodul 01.jpg
Technical data
Protection class: IP 6 K 7 / IP 6K 9K as per DIN 40050-9
EMC Directive: tested to MBN 10284-2 (2008-3), certified in line with 72/245/EEC
Mass: approx. 1.5 kg (dry)
Dimensions: approx. 137 x 80 x 250 mm
Intake filter: mesh width 190 μm (at AdBlue® inlet)
Temperatures
Operating temperatures: -40°C to +85°C
Vibrations
Max. permissible acceleration: 15g in directions X, Y and Z
Hydraulic connections:
AdBlue® inlet: SAE J 2044 1/4"
AdBlue® outlet: SAE J 2044 5/16"
Coolant inlet: Normaquick PS3 NW8 connector
Coolant outlet: Normaquick PS3 NW8 connector

Electrical connections
1 HDSC connector (ACM)
Steckeranschluss FLO Pumpenmodul 01.jpg
AdBlue® connections
1 AdBlue® inlet
2 AdBlue® outlet
AdBlueanschluss FLO Pumpenmodul 01.jpg
Paintwork
The following components may not be overcoated:
• Model plate
• AdBlue® connections up to hexagon nut
• Coolant connections up to ribbing
• Ventilation membranes (11)
• Vent in filter cover
• Electrical connections (connector housing)

Installed position
The filter housing must point downwards.
Angles of ±45° (three-dimensionally) in all directions are permitted.
A clearance of 130 mm downwards from the vertical ± 45° (three-

dimensionally in all directions) is required for maintenance
(removal, installation of filter housing).
A protective plate against dirt and stone chipping may be

necessary.
Pumpenmodul FLO Einbaulage 01.jpg

Assembly
The pump module is mounted with two
screws on a min. 5 mm-thick bracket (see
adjacent hole diagram).
Screws: M8 x 25 (for 5 mm
bracket)
Classification: 8.8
Torque: 17.6 Nm ± 20%
Halter FLO Pumpenmodul.jpg
General notes on assembly/disassembly:

• The AdBlue® and coolant connections are provided with transport locks. Do not remove these until
assembly of the corresponding lines.
• After disassembly, seal connecting pieces and lines with protective caps.
• Do not spill any AdBlue®
• No AdBlue® on electrical plug contacts and connectors
• Do not place the disassembled pump module on the cover.
Escaping AdBlue® can damage the electrical plug contacts.
Maintenance
Filter element in filter housing:
• WAF 46 socket wrench
• Torque: 80 ± 5 Nm
• Maintenance interval as per maintenance booklet
• Filter may be replaced only in depressurized state

18.5 AdBlue® Metering Equipment
18.5.1 AdBlue® metering equipment – component description

Task
At the appropriate time, the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) injects the amount of AdBlue® calculated by the
control modules into the exhaust flow.
Arrangement
The AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) is installed on the AdBlue® processing reactor.
Structure
The AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) consists of a basic body (4) made of stainless steel with an injection
nozzle (7), the electric heater, a pressure sensor and the plastic housing (3).
3 Housing (plastic)
4 Basic body (stainless steel)
5 AdBlue® inlet
6 AdBlue® outlet (return)
7 Injection nozzle
8 Seal
9 Ventilation membrane
W14.40-1566-76
Function
5 AdBlue® inlet
7 Injection nozzle
12 Pressure sensor
13 Heating element
14 Injection valve
15 Filter
16 Return to AdBlue® tank
Hydr. Schaubild Dosiergerät.jpg
From engine start, AdBlue® conveyed by the pump module flows constantly through the AdBlue® metering
equipment (A67) at an operating pressure of approximately 10 bar.
This takes place regardless of whether AdBlue® is injected, as the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) is
protected by this circulation cooling from damage by overheating as a result of its installation location (on the
AdBlue® processing reactor) and the high temperatures that prevail there.
The AdBlue® that is not required or not injected flows back to the AdBlue® tank via the return line. This cooling
is absolutely necessary and continues for a certain time in a run-on phase even after the engine has been
switched off.

Injection
The AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) receives the signals concerning the volume of AdBlue® currently
required from the aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60).
The pressure sensor (12) integrated in the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) provides the values that serve as
a basis for calculation of the opening duration of the injection valve (14).
The injection valve (14) opens at timed intervals and, by means of the atomizing effect of the injection nozzle
(7), injects AdBlue® as a fine spray directly into the exhaust flow – more precisely, into the hydrolysis segment
of the exhaust aftertreatment unit/AdBlue® processing reactor.
Heating
At low ambient temperatures, the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) is heated by an integrated resistance
heating element (13).
Run-on
If necessary, to prevent damage caused by overheating on the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67), the pump
module (1) continues to pump AdBlue® for a while after the engine is switched off so as to ensure that cooling
is still maintained for some time.

18.5.2 AdBlue® metering equipment – installation specifications
3 Housing (plastic)
4 Basic body (stainless steel)
5 AdBlue® inlet
6 AdBlue® outlet (return)
7 Injection nozzle
8 Seal
9 Vent valve
W14.40-1566-76
Technical data
Protection class: IP 6 K 7 / IP 6K 9K as per DIN 40050-9
EMC Directive: tested to MBN 10284-2 (2008-3), certified in line with 72/245/EEC
Mass: approx. 1 kg (dry)
Dimensions: approx. 100 x 95 x 82 mm
AdBlue® operating pressure: abs. 10±1 bar
Temperatures
Ambient temperature: -40°C to +130°C
Injection nozzle surface temperature: max. 130°C (limit must never be exceeded).
Cooling by AdBlue® circulation must occur as quickly as possible.
Depending on the usage profile and installation case, cooling may
be required after just a few minutes.
Operational restrictions may be necessary during the AdBlue®
thawing phase.
Vibrations
Max. permissible acceleration: 15g in directions X, Y and Z
Hydraulic connections
AdBlue® inlet (5): SAE J 2044 1/4"
AdBlue® outlet (6): SAE J 2044 5/16"
HDSC, 8-pin (power supply and communication with aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60))
Paintwork
The AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) may not be overcoated.

Permissible installed position
The spraying cone generated during injection must not
be directed upwards (x).
x Spraying direction upwards to 45° (rotationally symmetric) is not

permissible
y Arbitrary installed position
Dosiergerät Einbaulage.jpg
Assembly
Mounting screws for assembly:
- DIN 34800 – external hexagonal round screw with flange
- M6 x 16 (min)
- Material: 1.4980 – X6NiCrTiMoVB25-12-2
- Coated with: Gleitmo 2332; do not use lubricants or copper paste
- Tightening torque: 10 ± 0.85 Nm
- Use screws only once
- Screws are included in scope of delivery
Assembly note
Once the metering equipment has been mounted on the flange, fasten the three mounting screws by hand, then
screw tight with the defined torque.
General notes on assembly/disassembly:

• The AdBlue® connections are provided with transport locks. Do not remove these until assembly of the
corresponding lines.
• After disassembly, seal connecting pieces and lines with protective caps.
• Do not spill any AdBlue®
• No AdBlue® on electrical plug contacts and connectors.
Escaping AdBlue® can damage the electrical plug contacts.
• A protective plate against dirt and stone chipping may be necessary.

Metal bead seal
An exhaust seal may be used only once; in other words, once the metering equipment has been disassembled,
the seal must be replaced with a new metal bead seal.
Note the installed position of the metal bead seal.
Dichtung A0001421180 Ausschnitt.jpg
4 Section of basic body showing position of injection nozzle

8 Seal
Dichtung Einbaulage.jpg

19 Exhaust Aftertreatment Unit (EATU)
The following basic versions of the exhaust aftertreatment unit are used.
Engine Exhaust certification Exhaust aftertreatment unit Assembly components

OM 934 EU Stage IV / US Tier 4 AdBlue® processing reactor SCR catalytic converter
OM 936 and exhaust aftertreatment box Ammonia slip catalytic
OM 470 (EATU box) converter
OM 471
OM 473
19.1 Exhaust Aftertreatment Unit Structure – System Description

Task
The primary purpose of the exhaust aftertreatment unit is to limit pollutant emissions from the
vehicle/equipment. The exhaust aftertreatment box (EATU box) also minimizes noise emissions in its capacity
as a muffler.
Structure
1 Exhaust aftertreatment box
2 Ammonia slip catalytic converter
3 SCR catalytic converter
6 AdBlue® processing reactor
7 Hydrolysis segment
8 Poss. exhaust pipe extension
A57 b1 NOx sensor at exhaust aftertreatment unit

outlet
A67 AdBlue® metering equipment
A70 b1 NOx sensor at exhaust aftertreatment unit
inlet
B70 Exhaust temperature sensor before AdBlue®
metering equipment
B72 Exhaust temperature sensor before SCR
catalytic converter
B73 Exhaust temperature sensor after SCR
catalytic converter
A Exhaust from engine

B Cleaned exhaust (to atmosphere)
Abgasnachbehandlungseinheit Tier4 System 01.jpg
The exhaust aftertreatment unit comprises the AdBlue® processing reactor (6) and the exhaust aftertreatment
box (EATU box) (1).
The exhaust flows from the engine (A) to the AdBlue® processing reactor (6).
The AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) injects AdBlue® into the hydrolysis segment (7) in the AdBlue®
processing reactor (6), directly into the exhaust flow.
The exhaust then travels through the SCR catalytic converter (3) and the ammonia slip catalytic converter (2).
The cleaned exhaust (B) is issued into the atmosphere via the exhaust tailpipe.

19.2 Components in the Exhaust Aftertreatment Unit
19.2.1 SCR catalytic converter – component description

Arrangement
Illustration of exhaust aftertreatment box (EATU box)
AGN-Box 01.jpg AGN-Box 02.jpg

2 Ammonia slip catalytic converter 3 SCR catalytic converter
The SCR catalytic converter (3) is located in the exhaust aftertreatment box (EATU box) and forms a single unit
together with the ammonia slip catalytic converter (2).
Task
In the SCR catalytic converter (3), the nitrogen oxides (NOx) generated during combustion are broken down into
nitrogen (N2) and water (H2O). The ammonia slip catalytic converter (2) serves primarily to convert non-reacted
ammonia particles (NH3), which could otherwise easily be noticed in the vehicle's surroundings owing to the low
smell threshold of ammonia.
Structure
The SCR catalytic converter (3) and the ammonia slip catalytic converter (2) consist of two cylindrical catalytic
converter elements connected in series and housed in a casing made of sheet metal. This ceramic block has a
catalytic coating to facilitate the chemical reactions.
Function
2 Ammonia slip catalytic converter

3 SCR catalytic converter
A Exhaust (from DPF)

B Hydrolysis segment
C AdBlue®
D Exhaust (end product)
AdBlue Prozess 01.jpg
The diesel particulate filter (DPF) component is omitted in the case of EU Stage IV / Tier 4 applications.
The exhaust (A) pre-cleaned by the diesel oxidation catalytic converter (DOC) and diesel particulate filter (DPF)
flows onward through the AdBlue® processing reactor, known as the hydrolysis segment (B). Here, the volume
of AdBlue® calculated by the aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60) on the basis of the sensor information
is injected.
In the first stage of the process, the AdBlue® is converted to ammonia (NH3) before flowing towards the SCR

catalytic converter (3).
The second stage of the reduction process takes place in the honeycombs inside the SCR catalytic converter
(3). The nitrogen oxide molecules encounter the ammonia molecules (NH3), releasing energy in the form of heat.
The only remaining chemical reaction products are nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), which are not harmful
to the environment. This process, known as selective catalytic reduction, requires a defined operating
temperature for the SCR catalytic converter (3). This temperature is > 250°C.
The exhaust, which has already been largely cleaned of NOx by the SCR catalytic converter (3), still has to pass
through the ammonia slip catalytic converter (2) before exiting into the atmosphere.
Any excess NH3 is oxidized here.
19.3 Identification of Exhaust Aftertreatment Box (EATU box)

Depending on the model, the identification marking for the exhaust aftertreatment box (EATU box) is located on
its top or underside.
Illustration of 125 l EATU box
Picture number
1 Position of identification marking 1 MB item number 6 Manufacturer
2 MB drawing index 7 Manufacturer drawing number
3 MB certification number 8 Date of manufacture
4 FINAS number 9 Catalytic converter ID
5 MDID According to manufacturer
Illustration of 175 l EATU box
Picture number
1 Position of identification marking 1 MB drawing index 4 Manufacturer
2 MB certification number 5 Manufacturer drawing number
3 MB item number

19.4 Aftertreatment Control Module (ACM)
19.4.1 Aftertreatment control module (ACM) – component description

Arrangement
The aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60) is supplied loose in the delivery to the OEM.
Installation is conducted by the OEM. The arrangement is specific to the vehicle/equipment.
Task
The aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60) regulates and controls almost all functions of the exhaust
aftertreatment system. It can also control the AdBlue® heater ( section 18.2).
To do so, it processes the incoming digital and analog signals from the connected sensors and communicates
with the modules via CAN connections.
The aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60) receives the analog signals from the directly connected
sensors. It receives the signals from the NOx sensors and communicates with the motor control module (MCM)
(A4) via CAN connections.
AdBlue® injection
Using the data supplied by the NOx sensors and the motor control module (MCM) (A4), it calculates the
necessary AdBlue® volume, which is then passed on directly to the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) in the
case of the FLO dosing system.

19.4.2 Aftertreatment control module (ACM) – installation specifications
Scope of delivery
The aftertreatment control module (ACM) is supplied loose in the delivery to the OEM.
Einbaulage ACM.jpg
Technical data
Protection class: IP 69k / IP 67
EMC Directive 72/245/EEC tested to MBN 10284-2 (2008-3)/tested to DC 10614
Required run-on period: 5 min.
Temperatures
Control module ambient temperature: -40°C - max. 85°C (adequate air cooling must be ensured).
120-pin connector:
• To be connected by the OEM.
21-pin connector:
• To be connected by the OEM.
• Power supply and CAN connection to chassis/engine.
Pin assignment can be found in the Engine Data Manual ( EDM ▸ ATS-Search ▸ Optional Data ▸ NY General).
Paintwork
Overcoating of the control module is not permissible.
Repair options
In the event of failure, the entire module is replaced. Opening the module will result in its destruction.
Installation position:
• Adhere to max. inclined position from the vertical as illustrated.
• The greatest possible protection from mechanical damage is required.
• Ensure stone impact protection.
• Ensure protection from spray water.
• Protect connectors and wiring harness from water ingress.
• Wiring harness strain relief must be ensured.
(120-pin connector through bracket attached to aftertreatment control module (ACM)).
• The aftertreatment control module (ACM) must be installed above the fording line ( section 2.10).

Installation of aftertreatment control module (ACM)
For electrical, thermal and vibration insulation, the OEM must attach the aftertreatment control module (ACM)
(A60) to four screwing points with eight damping elements (two per threaded connection).
The damping elements included in the scope of delivery must be used.
Dampfer A0035408745 01.jpg Dampfer A0001530681 01.jpg
1 Damping element 2 Screw

3 Support: 120-pin connector wiring harness A60 Aftertreatment control module (ACM)
4 Support: 21-pin connector wiring harness
Threaded connection M8
Tightening torque 15 ±2 Nm
Bracket for supporting wiring harness for 120-pin connector on the ACM
The bracket is included in the scope of delivery, along

with screws. It must be installed by the OEM at the
intended support points (3) on the aftertreatment
control module (ACM). The OEM must ensure the
fastening of the wiring harness using a cable tie,
taking strain relief into consideration.
Bracket
Screws M8 x 16
Tightening torque 25 ±2.5 Nm
Support: 21-pin connector wiring harness

The wiring harness must be fastened at the support point (4) on the aftertreatment control module (ACM) using
a cable tie included in the scope of delivery.
The OEM must ensure this, taking strain relief into consideration.

19.5 Exhaust Aftertreatment Unit Sensors
19.5.1 Exhaust aftertreatment unit NOx sensors – component description

Arrangement
The NOx sensor at the exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet (A70 b1) is installed by the OEM in the exhaust flow
upstream of the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67).
The NOx sensor at the exhaust aftertreatment unit outlet (A57 b1) is screwed into the exhaust aftertreatment
box (1) from the outside, but can also be positioned on the exhaust tailpipe by the OEM.
The control module (A70) is screwed onto a bracket provided by the OEM.
The control module (A57) is screwed onto a bracket on the exhaust aftertreatment box (1).
Task
A70 NOx sensor control module at exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet

A70 b1 NOx sensor at exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet
W14.40-1587-12
The NOx sensor represents the actual measuring probe, while the electronic control module calculates the
concentration of untreated NOx in the exhaust.
The NOx sensor at the exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet (A70 b1) measures the untreated NOx emissions before
exhaust aftertreatment and the NOx sensor at the exhaust aftertreatment unit outlet (A59 b1) measures the NOx
emissions after exhaust aftertreatment.
The NOx sensor control module calculates the untreated NOx values. It receives the analog signals from the
sensor and digitizes them. At a defined transfer rate, it then passes these on as digital CAN signals to the
aftertreatment control module (ACM) (A60), which evaluates them.

19.5.2 Exhaust aftertreatment unit NOx sensors – installation specifications
NOx Sensor 03.jpg

1 NOx sensor at exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet (A70 b1) or NOx sensor at exhaust aftertreatment unit outlet (A57 b1)
2 NOx sensor control module at exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet (A70) or NOx sensor control module at exhaust aftertreatment unit outlet (A57)
3 Electrical cable
The NOx sensor control module and the NOx sensor are connected by an inseparable electrical cable and form a
single unit.
Technical data
Protection class: IP 6K 9K as per DIN 40050 in installed state, with mounted connector and
sensor.
EMC Directive: 72/245/EEC
Temperatures
Control module ambient temperature: -40°C to max. +105°C
Exhaust aftertreatment unit NOx sensor cable: -40°C – max. 200°C
HDSC, 4-pin (power and communication with ACM)
Color-coding: Black on NOx sensor control module at exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet (A70
b1)
- Gray on NOx sensor control module at exhaust aftertreatment unit outlet (A59
b1)
Electrical cable length: Total length 908 mm
Paintwork
Overcoating of the sensor control module is not permissible.
19.5.2.1 Installation of NOx inlet sensor

The NOx sensor at the exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet (A70 b1) is supplied loose in the delivery to the OEM.
The NOx sensor at the exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet (A70 b1) is installed by the OEM in the exhaust flow
upstream of the AdBlue® metering equipment.
The NOx sensor control module at the exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet (A70) is screwed onto a bracket
provided by the OEM.

Installation is performed by the OEM, taking the following installation specifications into consideration.
• Install sensor immediately after opening the protective bag
• Installed position of NOx sensor relative to AdBlue® metering equipment
• Installed position of NOx sensor relative to mass exhaust flow
• Installed position of NOx sensor relative to horizontal
• Installed position of AdBlue® processing reactor as per specifications ( section 19.9.2)
• Threaded fixture for NOx sensor as per specifications
• Installed position of NOx sensor control module, taking the max. ambient temperature into
consideration
• Tension-free laying of electrical cables
• Cable routing
• Clearance for assembly of electrical connector
• NOx sensor must be protected from spray water
Color-coding of electrical connection

Black connector housing on NOx sensor control module at exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet (A70 b1)
Installed position of NOx inlet sensor relative to metering equipment

In terms of the mass exhaust flow, the NOx inlet sensor must be installed upstream of the AdBlue® metering
equipment.
Minimum clearance between NOx sensor and AdBlue® metering equipment: 200 mm
Installed position of NOx sensor relative to mass exhaust flow

The NOx sensor must be installed transverse (90°) ±10° to the mass exhaust flow.
B 90° ±10° to mass exhaust flow

C Mass exhaust flow
NOx Sensor 06.jpg
Installed position of NOx sensor relative to horizontal

The NOx sensor must be installed such that no condensation can collect inside the protective cap of the sensor
element.
An angle >15° to the horizontal datum plane must therefore be ensured even during operation.
A >15°
NOx Sensor 01.jpg

Cable routing
Tension-free routing of the electrical sensor cable must be ensured.
The electrical sensor cable must not chafe, be routed over sharp edges or lie against a hot surface (e.g. exhaust
pipe).
The electrical sensor cable must be supported every 200 mm – 300 mm.
Threaded fixture for NOx sensor

The threaded fixture for the NOx sensor is not included in the scope of delivery.
Material:
Steel, EN 10088-3-1.4301
Welding filler material:
1.4576
Welding process:
MAG 135 as per DIN ISO 4063
Dimensions illustrated apply after

welding.
NOx sensor installation

Remove plastic plug from threaded connection.
Hexagon nut: WAF 22
Tightening torque: 50 ±10 Nm
Do not twist the electrical cable during installation. Place the tool only on the hexagon nut of the union nut, as
the component is very sensitive and can easily be destroyed.
Installed position of NOx sensor control module

The installed position must be selected taking the maximum ambient temperature ( section 19.5.2) into
consideration.
Select the installed position such that the electrical cable is laid in a tension-free manner.
Screw plug
It may be necessary for an open threaded connection on the exhaust aftertreatment box to be sealed with an
M20x1.5 (stainless steel) screw plug.
Screw plug: A 001 990 02 17

Sealing ring: N 007603 020 101

Installation of NOx sensor control module
Tension-free assembly on a bracket with a level contact surface must be ensured.
The drilling template required for the intended mounting is illustrated below.
NOx Sensor Elektronik 01.jpg
Mounting with hexagon screw as per MBN 10105 - M6

Max. tightening torque: 7.4 ± 1.4 Nm
19.5.2.2 Installation of NOx outlet sensor

The NOx outlet sensor is supplied loose in the delivery to the OEM.
The NOx sensor at the exhaust aftertreatment unit outlet (A59 b1) is installed in the exhaust aftertreatment box
by the OEM.
Alternatively, the NOx sensor at the exhaust aftertreatment unit outlet (A59 b1) can, if necessary, be installed in
the exhaust tailpipe. The threaded bushing in the exhaust aftertreatment box must be sealed with a screw plug
(as per section 19.5.2.1).
The NOx sensor control module at the exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet (A70) is screwed onto a bracket
provided by the OEM.
• Installed position of NOx outlet sensor relative to exhaust aftertreatment unit
• Installed position of NOx sensor relative to mass exhaust flow (as per section 19.5.2.1)
• Installed position of NOx sensor relative to horizontal (as per section 19.5.2.1)
• Threaded fixture for NOx sensor in accordance with specifications (as per section 19.5.2.1)
• Installed position of NOx sensor control module, taking the maximum ambient temperature ( section
19.5.2) into consideration
• Color-coding of electrical connection ( section 19.5.2)
• Tension-free laying of electrical cables
• Cable routing
• Clearance for assembly of electrical connector
• NOx sensor must be protected from spray water
Installed position of NOx outlet sensor relative to exhaust aftertreatment unit

A maximum distance of 100 mm from the exhaust aftertreatment unit outlet must be maintained.

Cable routing
Tension-free routing of the electrical sensor cable must be ensured.
The electrical sensor cable must not chafe, be routed over sharp edges or lie against a hot surface (e.g. exhaust
pipe).
The electrical sensor cable must be supported every 200 mm – 300 mm.
19.5.3 Exhaust aftertreatment unit temperature sensors – component description

Arrangement
The exhaust temperature sensor before the AdBlue® metering equipment (B70) is screwed into the inlet pipe on
the AdBlue® processing reactor upstream of the AdBlue® metering equipment from the outside.
The exhaust temperature sensor before the SCR catalytic converter (B72) is screwed into the exhaust
aftertreatment box upstream of the SCR catalytic converter from the outside.
The exhaust temperature sensor after the SCR catalytic converter (B73) is screwed into the exhaust
aftertreatment box downstream of the SCR catalytic converter/the ammonia slip catalytic converter from the
outside.
Task
By means of the exhaust temperature sensor before the AdBlue® metering equipment (B70), the aftertreatment
control module (ACM) (A60) detects the temperature of the exhaust flow in the inlet pipe of the AdBlue®
processing reactor. This temperature is the basis for release of the AdBlue® metering.
By means of the exhaust temperature sensor before the SCR catalytic converter (B72), the aftertreatment
control module (ACM) (A60) detects the temperature of the exhaust flow in the inlet pipe of the exhaust
aftertreatment box (1).
By means of the exhaust temperature sensor after the SCR catalytic converter (B73), the aftertreatment control
module (ACM) (A60) detects the temperature of the exhaust flow downstream of the SCR catalytic converter.

The connector housings are color-coded:
Green: Exhaust temperature sensor before AdBlue® metering equipment (B70)
Black: Exhaust temperature sensor before SCR catalytic converter (B72)
Gray: Exhaust temperature sensor after SCR catalytic converter (B73)
19.5.4 Exhaust aftertreatment unit temperature sensors – installation specifications

®
19.5.4.1 Installation of exhaust temperature sensor before AdBlue metering equipment
The exhaust temperature sensor before the AdBlue® metering equipment (B70) is screwed into the threaded
bushing intended for this purpose on the AdBlue® processing reactor by the OEM.
The electrical connector is mounted on a bracket provided by the OEM.
• Screw in sensor by hand and secure according to torque specifications
• Color-coding of electrical connection
• Support location for electrical connector transfer
• Cable routing
• Sensor tightening torque

Black connector housing for exhaust temperature sensor before AdBlue® metering equipment (B70)
Temperatures
Flat-pin connector housing: -40°C – 120°C
Electrical cable and corrugated piping: -40°C to 280°C

Support location for electrical connector transfer
The installed position of the electrical connector transfer must be selected taking the maximum ambient
temperature into consideration.
The OEM must provide a bracket with a recess for the

connector housing (see diagram) made of steel for mounting
of the electrical connector.
The bracket is not part of the scope of delivery.
x 2.5 mm
Halter Steckeruebergabe TempSensor 01.jpg
A red mounting clamp (A 000 545 26 86; sheet thickness 2.5

mm) is provided for locking the connector housing in the
bracket.
The mounting clamp is included in the scope of delivery and

must be mounted by the OEM.
The 3 mm version is shown by way of example.
Befestigungsbügel Steckergehaeuse 01.jpg
Cable routing
Tension-free routing of the electrical sensor cable must be
ensured.
The electrical sensor cable must not chafe, be routed over
sharp edges or lie against a hot surface (e.g. exhaust pipe).
A support location (e.g. corrugated pipe clip (A)
A 001 991 71 71 or cable tie (B) A 006 997 17 90) must be
provided every 250 mm on the corrugated pipe to provide
support for the electrical sensor cable.
A Corrugated pipe clip A 001 991 71 71

B Cable tie A 006 997 17 90
Befestigung TempSensor.jpg

A separate support location must be provided at a distance < 100
mm from the connector housing bracket.
Bends within 25 mm of the exit point of the cable from the
connector housing or sensor body are not permissible. Bending
radii < 20 mm are not permissible.
A Bending radius
Biegeradius TempSensor.jpg
Installation
Before installation, coat thread on exhaust temperature sensor before AdBlue® metering equipment (B70) with
heat lubricant paste (A 000 989 76 51, 1 kg, DBL 6879.20).
Technical data
Sensor tightening torque: 30 ± 5 Nm
Electrical cable length: Total length 1000 mm

19.6 Durability of Exhaust Aftertreatment Unit (EATU) – Installation Specifications
In order to ensure the durability of the exhaust aftertreatment unit (EATU), the following aspects in particular
must be taken into consideration:
• Mounting of the EATU box in the vehicle/equipment
• Installed position and angle of inclination of the EATU box in the vehicle/equipment
• Acceleration spectrum of the EATU box in the vehicle/equipment
• Acceleration spectrum of AdBlue® processing reactor in the vehicle/equipment
• Permissible sectional strains on inlet and exhaust pipe
• Mounting of add-on parts on the EATU
• Temperature radiation
If at least one of the requirements listed is not ensured, the EATU must be validated in respect of durability.
For example, selective connection of additional mass can lead to natural vibrations, which can cause premature
failure of the EATU.
Other notes:
• Lifting the vehicle (e.g. jack, recovery crane) by the EATU box is not permissible.
• Standing/sitting on the EATU box is not permissible.
• If the EATU is located in an exposed position, it must be noted that it is not suitable for loads occurring,
for example, in the case of impact, resting on a surface or grazing of obstacles.
The EATU must therefore be given special protection if located in exposed vehicle positions!
• Welding work on the EATU box is permissible only in exceptional cases ( section 19.7).
19.6.1 Carrier element for mounting the EATU box on the chassis
The exhaust aftertreatment box (EATU box) may be mounted only by means of the validated bolting points and
series mounting point. Only the brackets supplied by Daimler AG are permissible. These are specified for
each EATU version.
The brackets must be connected to a sufficiently rigid carrier element (chassis) so that forces from the chassis
– e.g. twisting – are not transferred to the EATU box.
To ensure rigidity, the resultant deflection due to the forces applied in a defined manner must not be exceeded.
This is based on a length of 850 mm for the carrier element.
The boundary conditions for determining the deflection are presented in the following illustration.
1 Fixture point
2 Application of force:
Fy 1000 N
Fz 1000 N
Mx 100 Nm
Standard values for perm.

deflection:
Fy 0.57 mm
Fz 0.20 mm
Mx 0.0011 rad
Tragelement 02.jpg

If the series mounting point is not used, unforeseeable effects on the box frame structure can result. This can
be attributed to factors including changes in power transmission and vibration behavior.
The required bolting points are specific to the major unit. The geometric data can be found in the Engine Data
Manual ( EDM ▸ ATS-Search ▸ Optional Data ▸ NK Catalysts).
19.6.2 Mounting of the EATU box

Scope of delivery for the 175 l + 230 l exhaust aftertreatment box
The following components required for mounting of the exhaust aftertreatment box (EATU box) on the carrier
element ( 19.6.1) are included in the scope of delivery.
1 1x mounting plate
2 2x rubber mounts
3 2x bearing brackets
A 4x hexagon screws
M10x1.5x30 – 10.9
B 1x hexagon screw
M12x1.5x40 – 10.9
Befestigung AGN-Box.jpg
The components included in the scope of delivery must be used to mount the exhaust aftertreatment
box (EATU box) on the carrier element.
Assembly
A version is to be shown as an
example.
Attach rubber mounts (2) to

mounting point (C).
Montage_01.jpg

Attach bearing brackets (3) over
rubber mounts (2).
Montage_02.jpg
Attach mounting plate (1) to

bearing brackets (3) and mount
using screws (A,B) in threads
provided.
Montage_03.jpg
Mount support (4) using holes (H)

on equipment frame.
Montage_04.jpg
All components must be attached and mounted in a technically correct manner taking the specified tightening
torques into consideration.
Not included in scope of delivery:

• M12 hexagon screws for mounting bearing brackets (3) on equipment frame
• M14 hexagon screw for mounting bearing support (4) on equipment frame
• Connection to support (4)

The geometric data specific to the options can be found in the Engine Data Manual ( EDM ▸ ATS-Search ▸
Optional Data ▸ NK: Catalysts).
Note the following points when attaching the components for EATU mounting:
• Ensure that the components are free of defects during assembly.
• Ensure that the contact surfaces of the components are clean.
• Ensure that before assembly of the EATU, the components
are attached and mounted in a technically correct manner on the vehicle/equipment and that the
mounting points are designed for the application.
Material damage
If the components included in the scope of delivery are not used and/or the assembly instructions are not
followed, damage can be caused by detaching and flying components.
The components included in the scope of delivery must be used to mount the exhaust aftertreatment unit on
the carrier element.
The OEM must ensure that all components are attached and mounted in a technically correct manner and in
compliance with the assembly instructions and tightening torque specifications.
Warning!
If the components in the scope of delivery are not used, the exhaust aftertreatment box could break loose and
pose a risk to personnel or cause a life-threatening injury.
Therefore, ensure that:
• Only the components included in the scope of delivery are used
• The components have been attached and mounted as described.
19.6.3 Installed position and angle of inclination of the EATU box in the vehicle
The permissible installed position of the exhaust aftertreatment box is specified for the EATU box used and
displayed using the vehicle coordinate system. Installation of the EATU rotated around the x- and y-axes is not
permissible. If the EATU is rotated around the z-axis, it must be noted that the local coordinate system is
rotated accordingly.
A version is to be shown as an example.
Definition in vehicle coordinate system:

x Positive in vehicle longitudinal direction
y Positive from right to left (viewed in direction of travel)
z Positive upwards
Neigungswinkel_AGN-Box.jpg
In order to ensure the function of the exhaust aftertreatment box, the maximum permissible angles of
inclination (in longitudinal and transverse directions) in respect of the installed position must be taken into
consideration.

19.6.4 Acceleration spectrum of the EATU box in the vehicle
The maximum permissible acceleration is given in the three coordinate directions: x, y and z.
If the installed position is rotated about the coordinate axes, it must be ensured, for example, that the
maximum acceleration values for the new longitudinal axis do not exceed those of the validated longitudinal
axis.
The permissible acceleration values specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data Manual
( EDM ▸ ATS-Search ▸ Optional Data ▸ NK Catalysts).
Definition in vehicle coordinate system:

x Positive in vehicle longitudinal direction
y Positive from right to left (viewed in direction of travel)
z Positive upwards
 Position of sensor during measurement
Maximum permissible acceleration in direction x 10
2
in g
-2
-4
-6
-8
-10
420 1000 10000 100000 1000000 10000000 52749456
Häufigkeit
Maximum permissible acceleration in direction y 6
0
in g
-2
-4
-6
-8
420 1000 10000 100000 1000000 10000000 52749456
Häufigkeit
Maximum permissible acceleration in direction z 20
15
10
5
in g
-5
-10
-15
-20
420 1000 10000 100000 1000000 10000000 52749456
Häufigkeit

The maximum permissible acceleration must also be considered for the AdBlue® processing reactor similarly to
the EATU box.
19.6.5 Sectional strains on inlet and exhaust pipe

The sectional strains are limited at all interfaces of the inlet and exhaust piping of the AdBlue® processing
reactor and the exhaust aftertreatment box. Decoupling elements must be provided in order that the limit
values described for sectional strains are not exceeded.
The peak static and dynamic loads on the inlet and exhaust pipe (exhaust aftertreatment unit and AdBlue®
processing reactor) may not exceed the specified values.
The geometric data specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data Manual ( EDM ▸ ATS-Search ▸
Optional Data ▸ NK Catalysts).
Inlet pipe Exhaust pipe
Inlet pipe Exhaust pipe

19.6.6 Mounting of add-on parts on the EATU box
In general, additional points of load application in the form of extra add-on parts are not permitted.
This does not include specifically released series add-on parts:
• Heat shields
• Exhaust baffle plates
Applications with deviating centers of gravity, weights and means of connection must be validated separately.
19.7 Adaptations to EATU box by OEM

The OEM can carry out the following adaptations to the exhaust aftertreatment box (EATU box) in exceptional
cases. The system function is still ensured with the described changes.
The OEM must ensure that gas-tight and urea-tight pipe connections are used at the exhaust gas inlet and/or
outlet pipe separation points.
The pipe connections must be tension-free and may not pass any free-to-move loads on to the exhaust
aftertreatment unit.
Daimler AG recommends a mechanical validation of the changed pipe connections.

The OEM must make the Mercedes-Benz A-item number illegible.
The OEM is responsible for the changes to the exhaust aftertreatment unit.
Daimler AG accepts no liability.
Warning!
High-temperature exhaust gases can escape if the exhaust inlet and/or outlet pipe separation points do not
have a gas-tight and urea-tight design. This results in a fire and burn hazard.
Welding work must be performed professionally.
Material damage
If the pipe connections do not have a tension-free design, this can lead to damage to the exhaust aftertreatment
unit. Decoupling elements must be used to prevent this.
In the event of modifications to the exhaust gas inlet of the exhaust aftertreatment box and direct installation of
the AdBlue® processing reactor, the installation specifications of the AdBlue® processing reactor ( section
19.9.2) must be taken into consideration.
125 l exhaust aftertreatment box: code NV02 + NK04
A Exhaust-gas inlet
B Exhaust-gas outlet
Exhaust-gas inlet (A):

Flange for connection to exhaust
pipe is prepared. Changes are not
permitted.
Exhaust-gas outlet (B):

permitted.
Katalysator_125l_NV02+NK08_1.jpg Katalysator_125l_NV02+NK08_2.jpg

A Exhaust-gas inlet
1 Separation point

Bend is cut off so that a straight
flange remains.
The straight pipe socket must be
retained.

permitted.
A Exhaust-gas inlet

permitted.

permitted.
A Exhaust-gas inlet
1 Separation point

permitted.

flange remains.
retained.

230 l exhaust aftertreatment box
A Exhaust-gas inlet
1 Separation point

flange remains.
retained.

permitted.
230 l exhaust aftertreatment box
A Exhaust-gas inlet
1 Separation point

flange remains.
retained.

permitted.

19.8 Temperatures on the Exhaust Aftertreatment Unit
Due to the high temperatures and high heat storage capacity of the exhaust aftertreatment unit, the following
points must be observed:
• No combustible objects, fluids or gases may come into contact with the exhaust aftertreatment unit.
• If combustible objects, fluids or gases are located above and/or in the vicinity of the exhaust
aftertreatment unit, appropriate measures must be taken to ensure that the temperature of these
materials remains non-critical.
• No combustible cargo or bulk material (e.g. sawdust) may come into contact with the EATU during
operation.
During operations with increased dust loading, the collection of dust on the EATU must be minimized.
Suitable measures must be taken to ensure this.
If necessary, the OEM must provide corresponding instructions in the operating instructions for the
vehicle/equipment.
• When the exhaust aftertreatment unit is installed, it must be ensured that there is sufficient
free convection of cool ambient air so as to prevent overheating of components on the exhaust
aftertreatment unit (e.g. electrical components) and in the surrounding area.
In case of doubt, measures must be taken to ensure that the maximum temperature limits are complied
with and to verify this by means of suitable measurement. This applies especially in the case of
cramped installation spaces and if additional components are attached to the exhaust aftertreatment
unit (e.g. contact protection plates).
• Maintenance work must be performed only when the EATU is cold (including removal of the service
flap).
• Exhaust pipe connections (clamp connections) must be gas-tight.
Warning!
If combustible materials (e.g. liquids, combustible objects or gases) come into contact with hot parts of the
exhaust system or the exhaust flow, these materials may ignite. There is a fire and burn hazard.
Ensure the safety of the installation space for the respective usage profile in the vehicle/equipment.
19.8.1 Temperature limits for electrical add-on parts

Maximum ambient temperatures
NOx sensor
Exhaust aftertreatment unit NOx sensor control module: -40°C – 105°C
Exhaust aftertreatment unit NOx sensor cable: -40°C – 200°C
Temperature sensor
Flat-pin connector housing: -40°C – 120°C
Electrical cable and corrugated piping: -40°C – 260°C
Aftertreatment control module (ACM) -40°C – 85°C
Pressure sensors -40°C – 125°C

19.9 AdBlue® Processing Reactor
19.9.1 AdBlue® processing reactor – component description

The Tier 4 exhaust aftertreatment system consists of the two sub-systems – the AdBlue® processing reactor
and the exhaust aftertreatment box (EATU box).
The AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) is installed on the AdBlue® processing reactor and injects AdBlue® into
the exhaust flow. The EATU-side exhaust pipe forms part of the overall hydrolysis segment.
The AdBlue® processing reactor is certified and its geometry may not be altered.
Sample display
AdBlue Aufbereitungsreaktor 01.jpg

The atomizer (7) integrated in the AdBlue® processing
reactor aids the thermolytic process by which
AdBlue® is converted to NH3.
The 90° bend in the AdBlue® processing reactor
optimizes the mass flow within the reactor and
thereby assists the NH3 conversion.

A Exhaust flow
AdBlue Aufbereitungsreaktor 04.jpg
Two versions are used:

• AdBlue® processing reactor with 100 mm pipe cross-section (code ND06) and certification number RA
2013
• AdBlue® processing reactor with 120 mm pipe cross-section (code ND07) and certification number RA
2014

19.9.2 AdBlue® processing reactor – installation specifications
The AdBlue® processing reactor is supplied loose in the delivery to the OEM.
• Installed position of the AdBlue® processing reactor as close as possible to the engine outlet.
• Installation of flexible exhaust pipe with decoupling element ( section 19.10.3) upstream of the
AdBlue® processing reactor (prevention of AdBlue® deposits in corrugation profile).
• If necessary, insulation of flexible exhaust pipe with decoupling element (prevention of cooling down
too far)
• Protection of AdBlue® processing reactor from spray water (prevention of cooling down too far)
• If necessary, insulation of AdBlue® processing reactor (prevention of cooling down too far)
• The AdBlue® processing reactor with pipe cross-section of 120 mm is to provide with a partial
insulation (see description below).
• Pipe routing between AdBlue® processing reactor and exhaust aftertreatment unit should be kept as
straight as possible. Edges, recesses and narrow parts inside the pipe, as well as sharp changes in
direction, are not permissible.
• Formation of loop seals in the pipe routing before the NOx inlet sensor is not permissible.
• The geometry of the AdBlue® processing reactor may not be altered.
Recalibration (roundness, shape and dimensional tolerance etc.) may be necessary after welding work.
• Axial expansion of the AdBlue® processing reactor due to temperature must be taken into consideration
during installation in the vehicle/equipment. Distortion due to the expansion is not permissible.
• The permissible installed position of the AdBlue® processing reactor must be taken into consideration
(see illustration below).
• The permissible installed position for the AdBlue® metering equipment (A67) ( section 18.5.2) and, if
applicable, the NOx inlet sensor ( section 19.5.2) must be taken into consideration.
• There are no operating conditions in which the AdBlue® processing reactor may come into contact with
surrounding vehicle parts. A distance of at least 50 mm to other vehicle parts must be maintained.
• The AdBlue® processing reactor must be installed above the vehicle fording line ( section 2.10).
• The minimum hydrolysis segment (see illustration below) must be complied with.
• In the event of direct installation of the AdBlue® processing reactor with a pipe cross-section of 120
mm on the exhaust aftertreatment box, the following options are permitted:
o Insertion into the inlet nozzle solely on the exhaust aftertreatment box with a 230 l catalytic
converter volume with unchanged inlet nozzle similar to the depiction on the code drawing
o Flush with the inlet nozzle on the exhaust aftertreatment unit with a 230 l catalytic converter
volume
o Use of adapter pipe for cross-section adjustment with OM 93x.
The specifications (see illustration below) must be adhered to.
• In the event of direct installation of the AdBlue® processing reactor with a pipe cross-section of 100
mm on the exhaust aftertreatment unit, the cross-section is adjusted by an adapter pipe.

Permissible installed position for
AdBlue® processing reactor
1 Green area released

2 Gray area not reviewed
3 Red area not permissible
H Horizontal
Hydrolysis segment of AdBlue®

processing reactor with 100 mm pipe
cross-section
A minimum hydrolysis segment (S) of

360 mm upstream of the exhaust
aftertreatment box transfer point must be
adhered to.
Measured from AdBlue® metering
equipment (A67) contact surface.
S Hydrolysis segment
Hydrolysestrecke.jpg
Hydrolysis segment of AdBlue®

processing reactor with 120 mm pipe
cross-section
A minimum hydrolysis segment (S) of

426 mm upstream of the exhaust
aftertreatment box transfer point must be
adhered to.
Measured from AdBlue® metering
equipment (A67) contact surface.
Hydrolysestrecke AdBlue Aufbereitungsreaktor HD 01.jpg

Partial insulation of AdBlue® processing reactor with pipe cross-section of 120 mm
At using the AdBlue® processing reactor diameter 120 mm (Code ND07) the AdBlue® processing reactor is to
provide with a partial insulation along the hydrolysis segment (mounting flange of AdBlue® metering equipment
and complete pipe until transfer point).
Sample display

2 Partial insulation
Isolierung AdBlue Aufbereitungsreaktor HD mit OM93x 01.jpg
The requirements for insulation ( section 19.10.4.2) are observed. Deviations must be agreed in advance with
the specialist department of MTU.
Adapter pipe between engine and AdBlue® processing reactor (diameter 120 mm) OM 93x
Adjustment of the cross-section between the engine and AdBlue® processing reactor (diameter 120 mm) with
OM 93x by means of an adapter pipe is executed by the OEM. The adapter pipe is not included in the scope of
delivery.
Adapterrohr 01.jpg
D1 Adapter pipe inlet L1 Pipeline length before cone
D2 Adapter pipe outlet L2 Cone length
L3 Pipeline length after cone
1 Direction of flow to processing reactor
Adapter pipe specifications

Adapter pipe inlet (D1): > 90 mm

Adapter pipe outlet (D2): 120 mm
Pipeline length (L1) before cone: 50 mm
Total length (L2): 31 mm
Pipeline length (L3) after cone: 50 mm
Assembly
The adapter pipe outlet (D2) may overlap with the AdBlue® processing reactor inlet by no more than 50 mm.
Note
This must be manufactured from one piece.
Contamination, edges, welding residue etc. in the area of the adapter pipe outlet (D2) must be avoided.
Adapter pipe between AdBlue® processing reactor (diameter 120 mm) and EATU box piping
with OM 93x
Adjustment of the cross-section between the AdBlue® processing reactor (diameter 120 mm) and the piping of
the EATU box with OM 93x by means of an adapter pipe is executed by the OEM. The adapter pipe is not
included in the scope of delivery.
Adapterrohr 02.jpg
D1 Adapter pipe inlet
D2 Adapter pipe outlet W Cone angle
L Total length of adapter pipe R1 Radius before cone
L1 Pipeline length before cone R2 Radius after cone
L2 Pipeline length after cone 1 Direction of flow to EATU box
Adapter pipe specifications

Adapter pipe inlet (D1): 120 mm
Adapter pipe outlet (D2): For adaption exhaust pipe/EATU box inlet
Total length (L): For adaption exhaust pipe/EATU box inlet
Pipeline length (L1) before cone: ≥ 20 mm
Pipeline length (L2) after cone: ≥ 20 mm
Cone angle (W): ≤ 14°
Radius (R1) before cone: 20 mm
Radius (R2) after cone: 20 mm
Assembly
The adapter pipe inlet (D1) may overlap with the AdBlue® processing reactor outlet by no more than 20 mm.
Note
This must be manufactured from one piece.
Contamination, edges, welding residue etc. in the area of the adapter pipe inlet (D1) must be avoided.


19.10 Exhaust Line between Engine and EATU Box – Installation Specifications
The pipeline between the engine and the exhaust aftertreatment box must be gas-tight.
The pipeline between the AdBlue® processing reactor and the exhaust aftertreatment box must
be made from stainless steel of the same quality as or a higher alloy than the AdBlue® processing
reactor.
It must also be impervious to fluids and resistant to AdBlue®.
If AdBlue® can enter the pipeline between the engine and the AdBlue® processing reactor due to the
installed position of the AdBlue® processing reactor, this must also be impervious to fluids and
resistant to AdBlue®.
The exhaust aftertreatment unit is mounted on the chassis by the OEM.

The requirements for the "engine/chassis exhaust gas" transfer point ( section 19.10.1) and the permissible
sectional strains on the AdBlue® processing reactor and the exhaust aftertreatment box ( section 19.6.5)
must be adhered to. Decoupling elements are to be provided for this purpose ( section 19.10.3).
In order to ensure the necessary inlet temperature on the exhaust aftertreatment box, it may be necessary to
use an insulated pipeline ( section 19.10.4).
The length and route of the exhaust pipelines affect the exhaust back-pressure. The exhaust line between the
engine and exhaust aftertreatment box and the exhaust tailpipe must be taken into consideration.
The maximum permissible exhaust back-pressure must not be exceeded.
The maximum permissible exhaust back-pressure specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data
Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸ Technical Data ▸ Exhaust System ▸ "Exhaust Back Pressure (stat.), at Rated
Power").
19.10.1 Engine/chassis exhaust gas transfer point

The OEM has the option to design the "engine/chassis exhaust gas" transfer point with the following
connection versions and thus to route the exhaust gases to the AdBlue® processing reactor:
• Connection to exhaust nozzle ( section 19.10.1.1)
• Connection to turbocharger by means of a flange on turbine outlet (OM 47x) ( section 19.10.2)
In general, it must be ensured that the chassis-side components are decoupled from the engine-side
components at the transfer points.
• A decoupling element must be provided downstream of the transfer point in order to compensate for
tension in static and dynamic operation ( section 19.10.3).
• No free-to-move loads may be passed on to the engine.
For example, the chassis-side exhaust pipe must be bracketed on the chassis immediately after the
decoupling element.
• Vehicle dynamics may not be transferred to the engine.
For example, no forces on the chassis-side exhaust pipe caused by warping on the chassis may be
passed on to the engine-side exhaust nozzle or the exhaust gas turbocharger.
• Vehicle excitations may not be transferred to the engine.
• The permissible loads applied to the exhaust gas turbocharger by the exhaust pipes are limited.
In particular, this applies when:
o The transfer takes place at the flange connection and the exhaust nozzle installed on the engine
by Daimler is not supported.

19.10.1.1 Connection on exhaust nozzle
A decoupling element (not included in the scope of delivery) can be screwed directly onto the exhaust nozzle.
Alternatively, a connector (can be procured via code) can be screwed on directly, but must be combined with a
decoupling element further down the pipe.
The geometric data specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data Manual
( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸ Technical ▸ Engine Description ▸ "Installation Drawing") and for the options (EDM ▸
Engine Search ▸ Optional Data ▸ MB Engine Brake, Exhaust System).
OM 47x installation work

In the case of the OM 47x, the connection on the exhaust nozzle must be designed with a V-band clamp and
seal.
The seal and the necessary V-band clamp can optionally be procured with a connector (B) via code MB35.
1 Clamp
Place seal (3) over exhaust nozzle 2 Chamfer
(A). Slide clamp side with chamfer 3 Seal
(2) over connector (B) A Exhaust nozzle (engine-side exhaust pipe)
towards engine. B Connector (chassis-side exhaust pipe)
Position connector (B) with
clamp (1) over exhaust nozzle (A).
Übergabestelle OM47x 03.jpg
A Exhaust nozzle (engine-side exhaust pipe)

The maximum permissible B Connector (chassis-side exhaust pipe)
installation angle of the connector
(B) to the exhaust nozzle (A) is to
be observed before tightening the
clamp (1).
Tightening torque: 14 Nm
Übergabestelle OM47x 02.jpg
Note
The seals and clamps on the exhaust nozzle must be replaced after each instance of disassembly.
OM 47x bending moment

If the exhaust nozzle is not supported on the engine in the case of the OM 47x, the restriction of the permissible
bending moment caused by the exhaust pipes on the turbocharger flange must be ensured by the OEM.
Permissible bending moment: exhaust nozzle (not supported on engine) 2 Nm

OM 93x installation work
In the case of the OM 93x, the connection on the exhaust nozzle must additionally be designed with a V-band
clamp by the OEM.
A connector (B) with a V-band clamp can optionally be procured via code ( EDM ▸ Engine Search
▸ Optional Data ▸ MB Engine Brake, Exhaust System).
Slide clamp side with steeper edge 1 Clamp

2 Steeper edge
(2) over connector (B) towards
engine. A Exhaust nozzle (engine-side exhaust pipe)
B Connector (chassis-side exhaust pipe)
Position connector (B) with clamp
(1) over exhaust nozzle (A).
Übergabestelle OM934 01.jpg

The maximum permissible A Exhaust nozzle (engine-side exhaust pipe)
B Connector (chassis-side exhaust pipe)
installation angle of the connector
(B) to the exhaust nozzle (A) is to
be observed before tightening the
clamp (1).
Tightening torque: 25 Nm ±2
Übergabestelle OM934 02.jpg
Note
The clamps on the exhaust nozzle must be replaced after each instance of disassembly.
Welding material for connector

When the connector is used, Daimler AG recommends the use of welding material
1.4430 (SGX2CrNiMo19-12).
The material used subsequently must consist of stainless steel of the same quality as or a higher alloy than the
connector.
Further information specific to the options can be found in the Engine Data Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸
Optional Data ▸ MB Engine Brake, Exhaust System).

19.10.2 Connection to turbocharger by means of a flange on turbine outlet (OM 47x)
A connecting piece (not included in scope of delivery) can be flange-mounted as a threaded connection on the
turbine outlet flange of the turbocharger. This must be combined with a decoupling element further down the
pipe.
Bending moment
The restriction of the permissible bending moment caused by the exhaust pipes on the turbocharger flange
must be ensured by the OEM.
Permissible bending moment: flange on exhaust gas turbocharger turbine outlet 4 Nm
Pipeline
The following points must be considered on the rest of the pipeline:
• Angle of inclination
• Radius
• Axial offset in longitudinal direction
The angle of inclination of the

pipeline may not exceed 30–60°
from the horizontal.
The radius of the pipeline must be at

least 120 mm.
If the pipeline is installed in a

longitudinal direction, an axial offset
of 3 mm (turbocharger to engine
crankcase) must be ensured by the
decoupling element.

19.10.3 Decoupling element – installation specifications
The pipeline from the "engine/chassis exhaust gas" transfer point to the "chassis/exhaust aftertreatment box"
transfer point must feature at least one decoupling element.
The decoupling element is not included in the scope of delivery.
The description and illustration refer to a version used on trucks at Daimler.
Sample display
W14.40-1602-76 W14.40-1575-76
1 Marking on exhaust manifold
2 Marking on decoupling element
The following points must be noted during installation of the decoupling element:
• The flexible exhaust pipe with decoupling element is not installed until after the installation of the
engine and/or the exhaust aftertreatment unit.
• There must be no damage visible on the exterior housing of the decoupling element.
• The decoupling element must be laid in a line (coaxially) to the flange of the turbocharger, as far as
possible.
• The permissible mounting angle may not be exceeded ( section 19.10.1.1).

19.10.4 Exhaust pipes – installation specifications
The length of the exhaust pipe from the separation point on the engine to the intake on the exhaust
aftertreatment unit is subject to certification.
Depending on the length of the pipe between the engine and exhaust aftertreatment unit ( section 19.10.4.3),
it may be necessary for the pipe to be extended with insulation.
Only pipes with certified insulation may be used.
Daimler AG provides certified pipe extensions ( section 19.10.4.1) with approved certification numbers.
Alternatively, depending on the engine certificate, insulation specified by the certificate ( section 19.10.4.2)
can be used.
Note
Once the exhaust pipe has been extended, the exhaust back-pressure must be measured at full load.
The values measured may not exceed the limits specified in the certificate.
The maximum permissible exhaust back-pressure specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data
Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸ Technical Data ▸ Exhaust System ▸ "Exhaust Back Pressure (stat.), at Rated
Power").
In order to prevent excess cooling due to external influences, the exhaust pipe should be protected from spray
water.
Material damage
The collection of condensation and entry of moisture into the insulation of the pipeline can cause damage to the
insulation, as well as premature corrosion of the pipeline, which can result in leakage.
Leakage on the pipeline and malfunction of the exhaust system can cause damage to major units and
surrounding components.
The OEM must ensure that the pipeline insulation is dried and sealed.

19.10.4.1 Certified pipe extensions
Rohrleitung.jpg Rohrbogen.jpg
Engine Certification Outer Wall Insulation Pipeline Pipe bend MB no.

number diameter thick- length radius
ness
C d a b
1000 mm - A 960 490 67 10
2000 mm - A 960 490 68 10
OM 47x RA 2002 130 mm 1.5 mm 15 mm
- 180 mm A 960 490 05 23
- 85 mm A 960 490 06 23
1000 mm - A 960 490 65 10
2000 mm - A 960 490 66 10
OM 93x RA 2005 90 mm 1.5 mm 15 mm
- 120 mm A 960 490 03 23
- 60 mm A 960 490 04 23
The approved certification number is imprinted on the pipe extensions certified by Daimler AG.
The work and assembly instructions for certified pipe extensions ( section 19.10.4.4) must be taken into
account during installation. There must be at least one certification number on each welded pipe.
A pipe bracket must be positioned at each welded connection. The maximum distance between pipe brackets is
1100 mm.

19.10.4.2 Insulation for exhaust piping
If insulation is required for the exhaust piping between the engine and the exhaust aftertreatment unit, the
insulation must conform to the certification for the engine system.
Depending on the engine system certificate, the "Exhaust extension specification" drawing included in the
certificate contains the specification and the heat transfer resistance of the pipe insulation to be used. In this
case, the exhaust piping with insulation can be manufactured individually.
The OEM must provide verification of compliance with the insulation specification contained in the
certificate.
Sample excerpt from the certificate:

Insulation material with certification number RA 2002*
Stainless steel foil: t 0.15 mm
Silicate fibers: t 15 mm
* Option of silicate fiber heat transfer resistance. Values correspond to minimum requirements.
°C 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
m2K/W 0.357 0.288 0.231 0.183 0.153 0.126 0.101 0.086 0.079
Note
The specifications currently permissible can be found in the applicable certificate.
19.10.4.3 Permissible pipe lengths and exhaust pipe insulation

The permissible pipe length for exhaust pipes between the engine and exhaust aftertreatment unit:
• depends on the engine power
• depends on the pipe design (without insulation or with certified insulation)
• depends on the pipe layout (number of bends/maximum permitted sum of angles)
• is relevant to certification.
The maximum pipe lengths listed in the tables are based on the following premises:
• The minimum pipe length must be reached.
• The maximum pipe length applies between the engine/chassis exhaust transfer point
( section 19.10.1) and the exhaust aftertreatment unit inlet transfer point. The AdBlue® processing
reactor is thus incorporated in the maximum pipe length.
The pipe elbows must be taken into consideration in the total length.
• The maximum permissible sum of angles must be complied with in the case of insulated pipes.
OM 93x: 540° (6 x 90°) plus AdBlue® processing reactor
OM 47x: 540° (6 x 90°) plus AdBlue® processing reactor.
• Insulation must correspond to the engine certificate.
• If certified insulation is required, it must be applied to at least 80% of the pipe length (AdBlue®
processing reactor included).
An exception to this is OM 93x EU Stage IV/US Tier 4 in conjunction with the AdBlue® processing
reactor, diameter 120 mm. In this case, the AdBlue® processing reactor is to prove with a partial
insulation.
The insulation requirements must be complied with but can also be exceeded.
For example, in the case of an application for which no insulation is required, exhaust pipes with insulation can
be used in order to reduce heat dissipation onto surrounding components.

OM 470 EU Stage IV / US Tier 4
EATU certification SC 2029 SC 2029 SC 2029
Engine power [kW] 280 300 320
0.70 m – 2.50 m Partial insulation1) Partial insulation1) Partial insulation1)
Exhaust pipe
length*
> 2.50 m – 4.00 m Combined insulation2) Combined insulation2) Combined insulation2)
> 2.50 m – 5.00 m Not permissible Not permissible Combined insulation2)
*Total length
1)
Partial insulation of AdBlue® processing reactor as per certificate (e.g. RA 2002)
2)
Partial insulation of AdBlue® processing reactor and insulation of exhaust pipe as per certificate (e.g. RA 2002)

Engine power [kW] 320 340 360 380 390
Partial Partial Partial Partial
0.70 m – 2.50 m Partial insulation1)
Exhaust pipe
insulation1) insulation1) insulation1) insulation1)

length*
Combined Combined Combined Combined

> 2.50 m – 4.00 m Combined insulation2)
*Total length
1)
2)

Engine power [kW] 400 430 460
Partial insulation1) Partial insulation1) Partial insulation1)

Exhaust pipe
0.70 m – 2.50 m
length*
> 2.50 m – 4.00 m Combined insulation2) Combined insulation2) Combined insulation2)
*Total length
1)
2)

In conjunction with the AdBlue® processing reactor, diameter 100 mm (code ND06)
EATU certification SC 2020 SC 2020
Turbocharger Twin-stage Single-stage
Engine power [kW] 170 150 129 115 100
0.70 m – 2.50 m No insulation No insulation No insulation No insulation No insulation

Exhaust pipe length*
Certified Certified Certified Certified Certified

> 2.50 m – 3.00 m
insulation1) insulation1) insulation1) insulation1) insulation1)
Certified Certified Certified Not

3.00 m – 4.00 m ??
insulation1) insulation1) insulation1) permissible
Certified Not Not Not Not

4.00 m – 5.00 m
insulation1) permissible permissible permissible permissible
*Total length
1)
Certified insulation as per certificate (e.g. RA 2003, RA 2005, RA 2009, RA 2011)

EATU certification SC 2020 SC 2020
Engine power [kW] 170 150 129 115 100
Partial Partial Partial Partial Partial
< 2.50 m
Combined Combined Combined Combined Combined

> 2.50 m – 3.00 m
Combined Combined Combined Not

3.00 m – 4.00 m ??
insulation2) insulation2) insulation2) permissible
Combined Not Not Not Not

4.00 m – 5.00 m
insulation2) permissible permissible permissible permissible
*Total length
1)
Partial insulation of AdBlue® processing reactor as per certificate (e.g. RA 2003, RA 2005, RA 2009, RA 2011)
2)
Partial insulation of AdBlue® processing reactor and insulation of exhaust pipe as per certificate (e.g. RA 2003, RA 2005, RA 2009, RA 2011)
In this combination of the AdBlue® processing reactor a partial insulation ( section 19.9.2) provide.
OM 936 EU Stage IV/US Tier 4

EATU certification SC 2020/SC 2024 SC 2020/SC 2024
Engine power [kW] 260 230 210 180
0.70 m – 2.50 m No insulation No insulation No insulation No insulation
Certified Certified Certified Certified

2.50 m – 4.00 m
Certified Not Certified Not

4.00 m – 5.00 m
insulation1) permissible insulation1) permissible
*Total length
1)
Certified insulation as per certificate (e.g. RA 2003, RA 2005, RA 2009, RA 2011)

EATU certification SC 2020/SC 2024 SC 2020/SC 2024
Engine power [kW] 260 230 210 180
Partial Partial Partial Partial
< 2.50 m
Combined Combined Combined Combined

2.50 m – 4.00 m
Combined Not Combined Not

4.00 m – 5.00 m
insulation2) permissible insulation2) permissible
*Total length
1)
Partial insulation of AdBlue® processing reactor as per certificate (e.g. RA 2003, RA 2005, RA 2009, RA 2011)
2)
Partial insulation of AdBlue® processing reactor and insulation of exhaust pipe as per certificate (e.g. RA 2003, RA 2005, RA 2009, RA 2011)
In this combination of the AdBlue® processing reactor a partial insulation ( section 19.9.2) provide.
Material damage
The collection of condensation and entry of moisture into the insulation of the pipeline can cause damage to the
insulation, as well as premature corrosion of the pipeline, which can result in leakage.
Leakage on the pipeline and malfunction of the exhaust system can cause damage to major units and
surrounding components.
The OEM must ensure that the pipeline insulation is dried and sealed.

19.10.4.4 Work and assembly instructions for certified pipe extensions
The following work and assembly instructions are by way of example.
Daimler AG recommends following the work steps shown for the separation and welding of two insulated
exhaust pipes.
In the example presented, a 1,000 mm exhaust pipe is shortened by 250 mm to 750 mm.
Starting point:
Insulated exhaust pipe: 1,000 mm.
In the example, a clamp (1) is used to mark the separation point.

Alternatively, a piece of cardboard or similar can be used for marking.
Mark the final length of 750 mm.
Make a second mark (3) at a distance of

10 mm from the 750 mm mark (2) (740 mm).
Cut the exhaust pipe at the 750 mm mark (2) using a disc cutter.

Remove the stainless steel foil at the second mark (3) using plate shears.
Then cut back the insulation material as far as the stainless steel foil
edge using a cutting blade.
Compress the insulation material for approximately 10-20 mm under the

stainless steel foil.
Press down the stainless steel foil on the pipe diameter using a hammer
and flat pliers.
Secure the compressed stainless steel foil on the exhaust pipe using a
stainless steel clamp.

Separated stainless steel pipes must be welded together in a gas-tight manner using the WIG or MAG method.
Welding preparation: Clean using a rotating stainless steel brush.
WIG method: MAG method:

Diameter of tungsten needle: 2.4 mm Inert gas: M 12 (97.5 Ar / 2.5 CO2)
Amperage: 30 A No. B 1878102520
Welding filler material: Diameter 1.6 mm- W 18.8 Welding filler material: Diameter 1 mm / 15 kg
Mn=1.4370 Coil / SG-X(15Cr Ni Mn 18 8)
Nozzle: Diameter 11 mm / 11 l/min
Welding gas: Argon – 4.8
Purging gas: Argon – 4.8

20 Electrical System
20.1 Electrical System – Installation Specifications
20.1.1 General
The electrical components of the engine systems are designed for an on-board voltage of 24 volts.
Pick-up of signals
The pick-up of signals or potentials is intended only at the designated interfaces and pins.
This applies especially to cables connected to control modules, as it can interfere with the function of the
control modules.
20.1.1.1 Ground concept
Material damage
In the event of ground return via the vehicle/equipment chassis, damage can ensue to engine and transmission
parts, as well as to the ground line.
The ground return for the electrical consumers takes place not via the vehicle/equipment chassis (potential-
free chassis), but rather through wiring via a central ground point or via the controlling electronics system.
20.1.1.2 Starter power supply

The ground cable of the battery (terminal 31) must be connected directly to the intended ground fastening
bolt/ground connecting clamp on the timing case. Use of the vehicle/equipment chassis as ground (negative
cable) is not permissible!
The supply cable (terminal 30) must be connected directly to the intended connecting clamp on the starter.
Further information on the terminals specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data Manual
( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸ Technical Data ▸ Engine Description ▸ "Installation Drawing").
Cable routing
In general, the feed supply cables (terminal 30) must be routed as closely as possible and parallel to the return
supply cable (terminal 31).
This is the only way to ensure that any interference (EMC) will cancel out.
The information under ( section 5.8) must be taken into account.
20.1.2 Starter battery

The starter batteries must be matched with the vehicle/equipment and the engine with the installed alternator
and starter.
The assignment of battery sizes to the starters is specified by the manufacturers in order to prevent overloading
of starters and to guarantee starting capability in sub-zero temperatures. The minimum battery capacity must
be coordinated to suit the respective application (temperature) and the engine type.
In order to limit the development of gases and the consumption of distilled water, the charging voltages for
trickle and maintenance charging as specified by the manufacturer should not be exceeded in the case of lead
batteries.
The capacity of a battery denotes the amount of current that can be tapped. It is given in (Ah) and depends on
the plate surfaces, the discharge current, the temperature of the electrolyte and the charge level (electrolyte
density).

The following range must be complied with for battery capacity: 100 Ah – 220 Ah.
The cold cranking amperage of the battery (as per DIN EN 50342) must lie within a range of 760 A – 1150 A.
In order to ensure that the starter can provide sufficient current without being overloaded, only a value between
1 mΩ and 2 mΩ is permissible for the line resistance (entire route: B+ to starter and onward to B-). It is
essential that the maximum permissible low temperature test current not be exceeded on the starter.
In the case of vehicles that work in cold conditions, it must be ensured that a sufficiently high battery capacity
is installed, as a fully charged battery has only approximately 60% of its rated capacity at -10°C (pre-heating
may be recommendable).
In the event of extended standby periods in which lead batteries are not used, self-discharge must be taken into
account. Depending on the age, temperature and purity of the electrolyte, this can cause a daily loss in capacity
of 0.2% to over 1% of rated capacity. In the event of long shutdown periods (without recharging), this can lead to
an inability to start. Consequently, for installations with extended shutdown periods (electrolyte density < 1,200
kg/m3 or no-load voltage < 2.03 V/cell), equipment for trickle/maintenance charging (preferably with I-V
characteristic curve) is required, especially as antifreeze protection.
Battery terminals must be protected against corrosion by terminal grease (acid-free grease).
Further information must be requested from the corresponding manufacturers. In addition, the installation and
maintenance requirements of the battery manufacturer must be observed.
To avoid the need for long cables between the battery, starter and three-phase alternator, the battery should be
placed as close to the engine as possible. Unprotected installation directly next to the engine and its exhaust
line must be avoided. Ambient temperatures of over 55°C significantly reduce the useful life (internal
corrosion).
Because small amounts of acid mist and electrolytic gas cannot be completely prevented from escaping, the
installation space for the batteries must be ventilated. This prevents corrosion and electrolytic gas explosions.
For this reason, electrical switches and control relays should also not be placed in the vicinity of the batteries.
20.1.3 Alternator
The power supply of a vehicle is provided by an alternator, which is usually attached to and driven by the
engine. It must be ensured that there is sufficient battery charge in reserve, even if all electrical consumers are
active or connected.
With the introduction of electronic engine control, three-phase alternators with integrated overvoltage
protection are required. This ensures that even brief disconnection of the connecting cables from the alternator
to the starter battery does not result in destruction of electronic components as a result of overvoltage.
The alternator must be protected from dirt, spray water, shocks, impact etc.
It must be easily accessible for service work.
The maximum permissible ambient/intake temperature for the alternator fan is 80°C. In order to ensure
operational reliability and to prevent damage to heat-sensitive parts such as soldered joints, insulation,
semiconductors, bearings etc., the alternators supplied by Daimler are equipped with an integrated fan wheel.
Temperatures of > 80°C can occur as a result of thermal radiation from the engine, especially in the case of a
sealed engine compartment and self-heating of the alternator. If this temperature is exceeded, the application
must be released by the respective manufacturer.
Various alternators are used:

Alternator type Remy 28SI Bosch HD10 (150 A)
Technical data
Rated voltage 28.3 V DC 28.3 V DC
Maximum current: 100 A 150 A

The alternator is cooled by two interior fans. Dust-free air is required as cooling medium. The air enters the
alternator axially from both sides, while air outlet is radial. Adequate cooling of the alternator is ensured only if
the specified direction of rotation is adhered to.
The alternators have a "battery-sensed" connection with which the voltage regulator can be influenced. This
connection takes the form of a socket and may be connected only with the suitable mating connector.
The parallel operation of two or more alternators is permitted only with alternators of identical design from a
single manufacturer. In the event of parallel operation without a load share device, the service life calculation
must assume 100% utilization of the alternator capacity. All alternators must simultaneously be operated with
or without Battery Sense.
Warning:
Connecting the cables to the battery connections incorrectly (polarity reversal) will destroy the alternator and is
therefore not permissible!
Paintwork
Alternators may not be overcoated.
Installed position
• Ensure protection from dirt and spray water.
• Adequate cooling must be ensured.
Further information specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine
Search ▸ Technical Data ▸ Engine Description ▸ "Installation Drawing") and for the options ( EDM ▸ Engine
Search
▸ Optional Data ▸ MG: Alternator).
20.1.4 Starter
Operating period
It is not permissible for the starter to be operated without interruption for more than 30 seconds.
Technical data
Protection class: IP 6K9K
Further data specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine Search ▸
Optional Data▸ MS: Starter).
Temperatures
Ambient temperature: -30°C – max. +120°C
Paintwork
Electrical connections may not be overcoated.
Installed position
• Ensure protection from dirt and spray water.
Further information specific to the major units can be found in the Engine Data Manual ( EDM ▸ Engine
Search ▸ Technical Data ▸ Engine Description ▸ "Installation Drawing") and for the options ( EDM ▸ Engine
Search ▸ Optional Data ▸ MS Starter).

20.1.5 Engine start/stop button – system description
Arrangement
The engine start/stop button (S600) is located on the

fuel filter module, on the left in the direction of travel.
Illustration of OM 936
S600 Engine start/stop button
W07.04-1095-76
Task
If the engine is stopped and the actuation of the fuel injectors is not switched off, the engine can be started by
means of the engine start/stop button (S600) being pressed briefly. Once the button is released, the engine
runs at idle speed.
If the engine start/stop button (S600) is pressed and held when the engine is at a standstill, the engine speed
increases after roughly three seconds until either it reaches the maximum governed rpm or the engine
start/stop button (S600) is released again. Once the engine start/stop button (S600) is released, the engine
continues to run at the speed that it had reached before the button was released.
If the engine is at a standstill and the actuation of the fuel injectors has been switched off by the Star
Diagnostics, the engine can be cranked by means of the engine start/stop button (S600) being pressed, until
the button is released.
If the engine start/stop button (S600) is pressed when the engine is running, the motor control module (MCM)
(A4) interrupts the actuation of the fuel injectors and the engine switches off.
Starter lockout
In conjunction with "neutral detection", a safety function integrated in the common powertrain controller
(CPC4) (A3) can prevent the engine from being started when a gear is engaged.
The OEM must ensure that if a gear is engaged and/or if any equipment is in its operating position, the start
button on the engine does not function and the starter is not actuated.
Start locking
The start locking function in the motor control module (MCM) (A4) prevents the starter from being actuated if
the engine is already running.

20.2 Electronics
Material damage
Work or changes may be carried out on electronic components only by personnel qualified for the system or a
qualified specialist workshop that has the required special skills and tools for executing the necessary work.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a Mercedes-Benz service outlet for this purpose.
The control modules may be parameterized and different functions taught-in only by an authorized specialist
company.
20.2.1 Networking – system description
Vernetzung 02.jpg
A4 Motor control module (MCM)

A60 Aftertreatment control module (ACM)
Wiring harness support on connector

The OEM must secure the wiring harness, taking strain relief into consideration.
Cable cross-sections
MCM Terminals 30 and 31 supply 2.5 mm2
ACM Terminals 30 and 31 supply 2.5 mm2
CPC4 Terminals 30 and 31 supply 1.5 mm2
Diagnostics interface
A diagnostics connector (OBD2) is to be provided for commissioning and troubleshooting. This is not included in
the scope of delivery.

20.2.2 Motor control module (MCM) – installation specifications
The motor control module (MCM) is cooled via a heat exchanger by circulating fuel in the low-pressure fuel
circuit.
Installation location
The motor control module (MCM) is installed on the engine at delivery.
Temperatures
Ambient temperature of control module with fuel cooling: -40°C – max. 85°C
Maximum short-term housing temperature: < 110°C
Weighted average housing temperature: 82.5°C
Technical data
Protection class: IP 69k / IP 67
Required run-on period: 1 min.
Electrical connection:
120-pin connector:
• Connected ex works
21-pin connector:
• Must be connected by OEM.
• Power supply and CAN connection to chassis/EATU.
Installed position
• The motor control module (MCM) must be installed above the fording line.
Support: 21-pin connector wiring harness

The OEM must secure the wiring harness, taking strain relief into consideration.

20.2.3 Common powertrain controller (CPC4) – component description
The common powertrain controller (CPC4) (A3) forms the chassis-side interface. It is the central connection
between the vehicle CAN (J1939) and powertrain CAN.
Information that is relevant for the control modules connected to the powertrain CAN and/or to the vehicle bus
on the vehicle CAN is combined from both directions by the common powertrain controller (CPC4) and sent via
CAN to the different control modules.
20.2.4 Common powertrain controller (CPC4) – installation specifications

Scope of delivery
The common powertrain controller (CPC4) (A3) is supplied loose in the delivery to the OEM.
Installation location
In the case of vehicles, installation in the cab is recommended, e.g. in the lower region of the dashboard.
In the case of stationary applications, suitable environmental conditions must be ensured, e.g. with a separate
housing.
Installation in the engine compartment is not permissible.
Sample display
Assembly is performed using the bracket provided.
Technical data
Protection class: IP30 as per DIN 40050-9
EMC Directive: ECE-R10
Control module run-on: 1 min.
Temperatures
Control module ambient temperature: -40°C to max. +80°C
Paintwork
Overcoating of the control module is not permissible.
Repair options
In the event of failure, the entire module is replaced. Opening the module will result in its destruction.

Installed position
• Ensure drainage of any condensation that forms
Electrical wiring is performed by the

OEM.
Steuergerät CPC4 Anschluesse.jpg
Further information specific to the control modules can be found in the Engine Data Manual ( EDM ▸
Technical manuals ▸ Operating Instructions ▸ All Series).
20.2.5 Accelerator pedal

Sample description of a PWM accelerator pedal.
The load demand on the engine from the driver is detected through the position of the accelerator pedal sensor
(B 44).
Connection
Connection and signal detection takes place via the common powertrain controller (CPC4) (A3).
The position of the accelerator pedal is transmitted to the common powertrain controller (CPC4) (A3) in the
form of a pulse-width-modulated signal. The signal is detected via two independent circuits.
Function
The accelerator pedal sensor contains two Hall sensors that send out opposing signals when the accelerator
pedal moves. In other words, when the accelerator pedal is pressed, the sensor value falls on channel 1 and
rises on channel 2.
Installation note
The accelerator pedal sensor (B 44) is configured via the common powertrain controller (CPC4) (A3).
Shielding
The accelerator pedal must be shielded against low-frequency magnetic fields and permanent magnets. For this
purpose, laying of high-current cables near the accelerator pedal must be avoided and the accelerator pedal
must be shielded against external magnetic influences by means of suitable measures (e.g. placement of
accelerator pedal body outside cab interior) (EMC  section 2.5).
The flawless function of the accelerator pedal must be ensured by means of a suitable vehicle test.

21 Warnings and Operational Restrictions
The "warnings and operational restrictions" (inducement) are activated when, for example:
• there is a lack of AdBlue® (e.g. low AdBlue® fill level, no AdBlue®, empty AdBlue® tank)
• AdBlue® quality inadequate (e.g. AdBlue® diluted)
• Frozen AdBlue® that not liquefied in time. Thus the readiness for dosing not satisfied
(e.g. AdBlue® heater ( section 18.2.2) without function, cold bridges in the piping system)
• AdBlue® consumption is too low (e.g. consumption much lower than required)
• there is no metering (e.g. disconnected metering valve, metering switched off due to defective sensors
etc.)
• the monitoring system malfunctions (e.g. break in electrical circuit)
• there is a fault in the exhaust gas recirculation system (e.g. EGR valve blocked).
The display concept for the warning messages on the instrument cluster, as well as any operational
restrictions (e.g. torque, speed, engine speed limitations), are detailed in the CPC4, MCM and ACM
control module descriptions.
Further information specific to the control modules can be found in the Engine Data Manual ( EDM ▸
Technical manuals ▸ Operating Instructions ▸ All Series).

Te c h n i c a l d a t a System components
Transmission type 12 AS 2301 16 AS 2601 ● Transmission
Input torque max. Nm Direct
drive
Over-
drive
Direct
drive
Over-
drive
● Gearshift module
(Reference value: depending on vehicle data
and application conditions) 1900 2300 2200 2600 ● Clutch module
Standard ratios Gear 1 15.86 12.33 17.03 14.12 ● Range selector (gear selector)
2 12.33 9.59 14.12 11.68
3 9.57 7.44 11.50 9.54 ● Display
4 7.44 5.78 9.54 7.89
5 5.87 4.57 7.86 6.52 ● Electronic Control
6 4.57 3.55 6.52 5.39
7 3.47 2.70 5.51 4.57
8 2.70 2.10 4.57 3.78
9 2.10 1.63 3.73 3.09
10 1.63 1.27 3.09 2.56
11 1.29 1.00 2.52 2.09
12 1.00 0.78 2.09 1.73
13 – – 1.72 1.43
14 – – 1.43 1.18
15 – – 1.21 1.00
16 – – 1.00 0.83
R1 14.68 11.41 15.77 13.07
R2 11.41 8.88 13.07 10.81
Weight without auxiliaries ≈ kg 250 270
Oil capacity for standard installation ≈ dm3 11 12
Oil grade as specified in ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02
Clutch bell SAE 1 integrated
Installation dimensions 953 (910)

622.5 (579.5) 221
5
395
11 3 7
5
(109)
278
116.5
32
Ø 511
Ø 180
Ø 25
301
9 7 6 1 4 9 8 10 2
Key to drawing
1 Input 7 Compressed air connection

2 Output 8 Oil fill and oil level check
3 Gearshift module 9 Oil drain
4 Clutch module 10 Speedo sensor
5 Breather 11 Electrical connection
6 Connection point for clutch-dependent PTOs ( ) Values in brackets apply to 12 AS 2301
Subject to technical change without notice. For installation investigation ZF Friedrichshafen AG Pict.: 017028
017002
purpose, please request installation drawings; only the data contained therein D-88038 Friedrichshafen
is binding. Tel. ++49 (75 41) 77-0 • Fax ++49 (75 41) 77-90 80 00
Internet: http://truck-transmission.zf.com
Sheet-No. 1328 757 101b Printed in Federal Republic of Germany • Imprimé en République Fédérale d’Allemagne • ZF-Druckerei, Friedrichshafen

Betriebsanleitung
Operating Instructions
Manuel d’Utilisation
Manual de Servicio
Istruzioni per l’Uso
Special Vehicles
Rotary switch + Shift lever
4232 758 102

Subject to technical changes
Copyright by ZF
This documentation is protected by copyright. Any

reproduction or dissemination in whatever form which
does not comply fully with the intended purpose of this
documentation is prohibited without the consent of ZF
Friedrichshafen AG.
Printed in Germany
ZF Friedrichshafen AG, MC-C dept./ 2008
Edition: 2008-05

Preface
Before first driving the vehicle, we would ask you to read Your vehicle is fitted with an automatic transmission
this operating instructions carefully. system from the ZF-AS Tronic range.
The more familiar you are with your ZF-AS Tronic
Note the special instructions provided in the vehicle transmission, the more economically you will be able to
manufacturer’s operating instructions. drive with it. These operating instructions provide you
with the information required so that you can make full
For the operation and maintenance of the ZF-Intarder use of the technical advantages of the ZF-AS Tronic.
you also need the ZF-Intarder’s operating instructions,
order number 6085 758 102. In order to ensure reliability in service, please note the
specifications in terms of maintenance.
The ZF Customer Service specialists are available to assist
you in carrying out maintenance work or to help if any
other problems arise. The ZF plant in Friedrichshafen will
provide the addresses.
Motoring pleasure with ZF transmissions is brought to you

by
ZF Friedrichshafen AG
Nutzfahrzeug- und Sonder-Antriebstechnik
Commercial Vehicle and Special Driveline Technology
D-88038 Friedrichshafen
Phone +49 (0) 7541 77-0
Fax +49 (0) 7541 77-90 80 00
Internet: www.zf.com
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 3

Safety Information
The following safety instructions are used with the

! THREATS TO THE ENVIRONMENT!
present operating instructions:
Lubricants and cleaning agents must not be allowed
to enter the soil, ground water, or sewage system.
NOTE • Ask your local environment agency for safety
Reference is made to special procedures, methods, information on the relevant products and adhere to
information, etc. their requirements.
• Collect used oil in a suitably large container.
• Dispose of used oil, dirty filters, lubricants, and
CAUTION cleaning agents in accordance with environmental
Used when deviating and unprofessional operation can protection regulations.
damage the product. • When working with lubricants and cleaning agents
always observe the manufacturer’s instructions.
! DANGER!
This is used when lack of care could lead to personal
injury or material damage.
4
Table of Contents
1 Description of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.5 Moving Off Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.6 Changing Operating Mode:
Manual / Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.7 Gear Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.7.1 Changing Gear in Automatic Operation Mode . . 22
1.3.1 ZF-AS Tronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.7.2 Changing Gear in Manual Operation Mode . . 22
1.3.2 ZF-AS Tronic mid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.8 Change in Direction of Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4 Speed Range Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.9 Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.5 Display (ZF Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.10 Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.6 Accelerator Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.11 Switching Off Engine / Stopping Vehicle . . . . 25
1.7 Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.12 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.8 Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.12 Tow-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.9 ZF Auxiliary Power Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.14 Clutch Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.15 Engine Overspeed Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.15.1 Operating Mode: Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.15.2 Operating Mode: Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2 Starting, Forward Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2.16 Operation With Clutch-Dependent PTO . . . . . 28
2.2.1 Starting Gear Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2.16.1 Transient Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2.2 Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.16.2 Steady-State Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.3 Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.17 Roller Type Test Bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.4 Maneuvering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 2.18 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 5

Table of Contents
2.19 System Faults (Error Messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 4 Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic mid . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

2.20 Starting Up Vehicle at Low Temperatures . . . . 38 4.1 Visual Inspection of Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.20.1 Parking Vehicle at Low Temperatures . . . . . . . 39
4.2 Pneumatic System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.3 Type Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3 Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.4 Bleeding the Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.1 Visual Inspection of Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.5 Oil-Change Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.2 Pneumatic System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.6 Oil Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.3 Type Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.7 Oil Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.4 Bleeding the Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.8 Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.5 Oil-Change Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 4.8.1 Oil Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.6 Oil Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 4.9 Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.7 Oil Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.8 Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.8.1 Oil Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.9 Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 6

ZF-AS Tronic mid / ZF-AS Tronic
026809
Fig. 1 ZF-AS Tronic mid
027529
Fig. 2 ZF-AS Tronic without ZF-Intarder
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 7

Description
1 Description of the System
1.1 General Description
The automatic ZF-AS Tronic transmission is adapted to A display on the dashboard displays all the system
the engine by means of a standard dry clutch. The clutch information required for the driver (e.g. gear step,
is actuated by the ZF-AS Tronic transmission system malfunction etc.).
which means that the clutch pedal can be dispensed with.
The transmission actuator and clutch actuator are the
The ZF-AS Tronic consists of a basic transmission and an most important components for complete automation of
integrated splitter and planetary group. the transmission.
The basic transmission has constant mesh design, the The transmission actuator consists of the transmission
splitter group and planetary group are synchronized. electronics, shift valves, shift cylinders, and sensors.
Gear shifts are carried out automatically by the The clutch actuator is an electropneumatic actuator with
transmission system. travel sensors. It handles all clutch actuation functions.
The ZF-Intarder* is a transmission-integrated, wear-free

operating, hydrodynamic auxiliary brake.
*optional
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 8

Description
1.2 Overview
1
4
Key M
A
S
1a 1b
1 ZF range selector
1a Rotary switch
6
1b Shift lever
2* ZF display
3* E-Module 10
4 Transmission actuator
with integrated electronic
transmission control
5 Clutch actuator 3
6 Transmission
7 Accelerator pedal 5
8 Brake pedal
2 9b
9a* ZF-Intarder
9b* Electronic ZF-Intarder
actuation
8 7
10 Connection point for PTO ZF
FRIE
DRIC
HSH
AFEN
AG
* optional
9a 029730
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 9

Description
1.3 Technical Data
1.3.1 ZF-ASTronic
Transmission type Overdrive 12 AS 2302 12 AS 3002 16 AS 2602

Input torque max. Nm 1) 2500 3000 2600
Ratios Forwards gears 12.33 - 0.78 12.29 - 0.78 14.12 - 0.83
Reverse gears 11.41 - 8.88 11.38 - 8.88 13.07 - 10.81
Tachograph Electronic Solo version z = 8 / Intarder version z = 8.14
Installation with integrated clutch bell
Shift System Constant-mesh 3/4-speed section and reverse gear.
Synchronized range change and splitter group.
Shift actuation Automatic mode The transmission system performs clutch actuation and gear selection.
Manual mode Gear selection by the driver; clutch actuation by the transmission system.
Weight (without additional equipment) approx. kg 240 252 252
with ZF-Intarder approx. kg 320 340 340
Oil quantity3) for standard
installation2) approx. dm3 12 13 13
with ZF-Intarder approx. dm3 21 23.5 23
Oil Grade according to applicable ZF List of Lubricants, TE-ML 02
1) Guide value (depends on type of vehicle and vehicle data as well as the prevailing operating conditions).
2) Transmission inclination between 0 and 3°
3) For transmissions with a ZF-Intarder refer to Operating Manual 6085 758 102
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 10

Description
1.3.2 ZF-ASTronic mid
Transmission type Overdrive 12 AS 1210 SO 12 AS 1620 SO

Input torque max. Nm 1) 1200 1600
Ratios Forwards gears 10.37 - 0.81
Reverse gears 10.56 - 8.58
Tachograph Electronic z=8
Installationhorizontal left with integrated clutch bell
Shift System Constant-mesh 3-speed section and reverse gear.
Synchronized range change and splitter group.
Shift actuation Automatic mode The transmission system performs clutch actuation and gear selection.
Manual mode Gear selection by the driver; clutch actuation by the transmission system.
Weight (without additional equipment) approx. kg 183 201
Oil quantity for standard
installation2) approx. dm3 7.8 9.3
with heat
exchanger approx. dm3 7.5 9.0
Oil Grade ZF-Ecofluid M or acc. to applicable List of Lubricants TE-ML 02
1) Guide value (depends on type of vehicle and vehicle data as well as the prevailing operating conditions).
2) Transmission inclination between 0 and 3°
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 11

Description
1.4 Speed range selector
The speed range selector consists of a rotary switch and a Use the shift lever to shift the gears and to activate or
control lever (shift lever). deactivate the automatic mode.
Rotary switch Shift lever M/A Change from manual to automatic mode
(and vice versa)
N
D R
DM RM + shift up 2 gears (spring stop)
+ shift up 1 gear (first spring stop)
– shift down 1 gear (first spring stop)
– shift down 2 gears (spring stop)
029892 023868
S Search function*
After selection of the positions

Use the rotary switch to select the following ranges: « + », «+», « – », « – », «S»* and «M/A» the shift lever
springs back.
DM = Forward maneuvering
D = Drive (forwards, automatic or manual) Manual upshifts and downshifts including more than
N = Neutral 2 gear steps can be performed through repeated tapping
R = Reverse on the shift lever.
RM = Reverse maneuvering
If the rotary switch is in the «N» position, the control lever

has no function. If the “S” position (search function) is selected during manual
operation and the engine brake is not activated, the transmission
will shift into the ECO gear (low engine speed).
If the “S” position (search function) is selected with the engine brake
actuated, the transmission will shift into POWER gear (high engine
speed).
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 12

Description
1.5 Display (ZF Display) Manual Mode
Only descriptions of the displays for transmission The 4th transmission gear
functions are provided in this operating manual. is engaged.
Refer to vehicle manufacturer’s operating instructions
for other displays.
024374
The display shows the number of the gear selected,

downshifts available, neutral position or error messages. The 8th transmission gear
is engaged.
Downshifting possible
by up to 2 gear steps
Automatic Mode (one gear per bar). 029886
The transmission is
in automatic mode
(4 bars and 2 arrows).
The 4th gear is engaged.
029885
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 13

Description
1.6 Accelerator Pedal 1.7 Automatic Mode
The gas pedal position need not be changed during the Rotary switch in position «D». The gear shift system
shifting process. selects the best gear for driving off.
If you press the accelerator pedal, the clutch will close
During gear shifts, the engine is influenced by the automatically and the vehicle will start to move.
electronic transmission control unit. The shift system performs upshifts and downshifts
automatically during travel.
The clutch is activated by the electronic transmission
control unit depending on accelerator actuation. In the automatic mode, shifts resulting in overrevving or
stalling of the engine are prevented by the shift system.
Without throttling back, the driver can at any time, e.g.

in a difficult driving situation, intervene manually on the
shift lever. The mode will then change from automatic to
manual.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 14

Description
1.8 Manual Mode 1.9 ZF Auxiliary Power Units
Rotary switch in position «D». If the control lever is Depending on the vehicle version, the ZF-AS Tronic
activated, the transmission system changes into manual transmission can be fitted with the following auxiliaries:
mode. The driver can also use the control lever to select
a starting gear other than the suggested one. • ZF-Intarder
• ZF-PTO (clutch-dependent)
If you press the accelerator pedal, the clutch closes • ZF emergency steering pump
automatically and the vehicle starts to move.
The driver uses the control lever to select the gears Operation and maintenance of the ZF-Intarder are dealt
required. with in Operating Instructions 6085 758 102.
Overrevving the engine is not economical and should be

avoided by the driver.
If the accelerator is pressed when the gear engaged is too

high, the engine may stall.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 15

Operation
2 Operation 2.1 Start engine
Depending on the manufacturer and vehicle type, you • Apply parking brake D
N
R
may have controls and operating processes other than DM RM
those described in this manual such as vehicle control • Turn rotary switch to «N»
from the crane cabin. (transmission in neutral)
029892
Therefore, also observe the operating instructions • Switch on “ignition”
provided by the vehicle manufacturer.
• Shift system self check
(display shows «CH»)
! DANGER !
• The vehicle must not be left with the engine running • Start engine. 024367
and a gear is selected.

• Gears cannot be selected if the engine is not • Self check is completed.
functioning (e.g. no fuel), transmission shifts to «N» appears on display,
“Neutral”. Engine brake and steering assistance transmission is in Neutral
will fail during travel. 024369
NOTE
Gears cannot be selected when engine is stationary.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 16

Operation
2.2 Starting, Forward Driving 2.2.1 Starting Gear Correction
• Start engine (refer to 2.1). The driver can correct the starting gear proposed by the
N
D R system.
DM RM
• Turn rotary switch from «N»
to «D». Undertaking correction:
029893
• Automatic mode is • Move shift lever towards «–» or «+».
activated.
• The display shows the starting gear selected.
• The display shows the starting
gear selected.
(The system selects the starting
gear itself, the clutch remains
separated.) 024376
• Depress accelerator and at the same time release the

parking brake.
! DANGER!
The vehicle may start to roll away even if you do not Shift lever
029888
depress the accelerator.
• Vehicle sets off (clutch closes automatically).
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 17

Operation
2.2.2 Hill Start
Observe the instructions provided by the vehicle

manufacturer.
! DANGER!
Shift into gear. The parking brake may not be released
before the accelerator is depressed, otherwise the
vehicle will roll backwards.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 18

Operation
2.3 Reversing
The transmission is equipped with two reverse gears: Select reverse gear:
• «RL» = slow reverse gear
• Vehicle must be stationary D
N
R
• «RH» = fast reverse gear DM RM
• Turn rotary switch to «R».
• «RL» appears on the display
! (clutch remains separated). 029894
DANGER!
If the vehicle is rolling, a shift is not made into reverse • Depress accelerator and
gear! Immediately bring the vehicle to a standstill. release brake at the same time
(clutch closes automatically).
• Vehicle drives backwards. 024444
• Depending on vehicle
configuration, shifting is
possible from «RL» to «RH»
or from «RH» to «RL». 024445
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 19

Operation
2.4 Maneuvering
The maneuvering mode is provided for extremely slow The system recognizes the maneuvering mode through the
driving. position of the rotary switch. The 1st forward gear and the
1st reverse gear are available for maneuvering.
In maneuvering mode, the vehicle (accelerator) is more
sensitive and clutch actuation differs from the ordinary In the maneuvering mode, the entire accelerator pedal
mode. travel can be used. To leave this mode, the rotary switch
must be put into position «D», «N», or «R».
The rotary switch is used for forward and rearward
maneuvering.
DM
D
N
R
RM
Unlimited maneuvering period.
• Select « DM » ror forward maneuvering.
«CL» is displayed if the clutch is
N
overloaded. Clutch wear may occur.

D R
• Select « RM » ror rearward maneuvering. DM RM
CAUTION
If the driver fails to respond to the
display of «CL», overload may cause
damage to the clutch.
029898
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 20

Operation
2.5 Moving Off Downhill 2.6 Changing Operating Mode: Manual / Automatic
Prerequisite: Engine is running. Can be undertaken at any time, even during travel.
If the parking brake is released with a gear engaged and M/A Changing operating mode from manual to
the vehicle rolls off, the clutch will automatically close automatic
without any accelerator actuation being required.
• Move the shift lever to the left and select
«M/A».
! DANGER !
Changing operating mode from automatic
If the vehicle moves off without a gear being
to manual
selected – rotary switch in position «N» – no engine
braking effect will be available! • Move the shift lever to the left and «M/A» or
Do not let the vehicle roll in the opposite direction move the shift lever towards « +/+ » or « –/– »
of that of the engaged gear.
If the vehicle rolls forwards – transmission in Neutral –

after release of the brake, and if a shift from «N» to «D»
is performed, the system will select a gear appropriate
for the road speed. The driveline is then closed.
M/A
N
D R 029889
DM RM
Depending on the vehicle, the system may automatically

029893
return to the automatic mode after a certain time.
024376
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 21

Operation
2.7 Gear changes
2.7.1 Changing Gear in Automatic Operating Mode 2.7.2 Changing Gear in Manual Operating Mode
• All upshifts and downshifts are performed

automatically.
These shifts depend on:

• Driving resistance
• Vehicle weight
• Accelerator pedal position
• Vehicle speed
• Engine speed 029890
Press control lever in « +/+ » or « –/– » direction.

• « +/– » Change by one gear step
• « +/– » Change by two gear steps
029887
If a manual shift is performed, the automatic mode of the
shift system will be cancelled.
The gear is shown on the display during travel as a
number. NOTES
• You can shift from every gear to Neutral at any time
using the rotary switch. This shift request takes priority
over other requests.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 22

Operation
• The accelerator position must not be changed during 2.8 Change in Direction of Travel
the shift process because the engine is controlled
electronically. Rearward driving «R» to forward driving «D» and vice
• A shift command is not undertaken if the shift would versa:
result in the max. permissible engine speed being
exceeded. • Turn rotary switch from «R» to «D».
N N
! DANGER! DM
D R
RM DM
D R
RM
Shifts to “Neutral” can also be made during driving.
If a shift is made to “Neutral”, the driveline is
interrupted. The engine brake then no longer has
any effect. 029895
DANGER!
Changing direction of travel by moving the rotary
switch from «R» to «D» and vice versa from «D» to «R»
may only be untertaken when the vehicle is stationary,
ohtherwise the transmission shifts to Neutral.
The display is definitive for the direction of travel
selected in the transmission.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 23

Operation
2.9 Engine Brake 2.10 Stopping
! DANGER!
• With the accelerator untouched, slow down the
vehicle using the service brake until it reaches a
The engine brake function is interrupted during the
standstill.
gear shift. The vehicle may accelerate during downhill
driving. • The clutch opens automatically before the vehicle
reaches a standstill so that the engine does not “stall”.
• If the vehicle is going to be stationary for long periods
Manual Mode
of time, we recommend selecting the Neutral
The engine brake is deactivated by the system during gear
transmission position.
shifts. Once the gear shift is complete, the engine brake is
automatically reactivated. • Always engage the service or parking brake when the
vehicle is stationary.
Automatic Mode
By activating the engine brake, the system shifts down so
that maximum brake torque is achieved. ! DANGER!
- With the engine running and a gear engaged,
actuation of the gas pedal will suffice to set the
standing vehicle in motion!
- Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running,
the transmission must be shifted into Neutral and
the parking brake must be engaged.
- Activating the parking brake during travel and on a
smooth surface may bring the engine to a standstill.
Steering assistance is then NO longer available!
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 24

Operation
2.11 Switching Off Engine / Parking Vehicle 2.12 Towing
NOTE When towing, ensure that you observe the vehicle

If the transmission is not shifted to Neutral before the manufacturer’s instructions!
engine is switched off, this is done automatically after
ignition “Off ”. CAUTION
When towing, the propshaft flange must always be
disconnected from the rear axle. If this is not possible,
! DANGER ! remove both stub shafts.
Parking with a gear engaged is not possible. Prevent pollution caused by possible oil loss.
The vehicle might roll away if no brake is engaged.
Therefore, apply the parking brake.
2.13 Tow Starting

• Bring the vehicle to a complete stop
D
N
R The engine cannot be tow started.
• Activate the parking brake. DM RM
• Move rotary switch to «N» Neutral.

• Switch off engine via ignition key.
029892
• Place chocks under wheels
(e.g. on slopes).
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 25

Operation
2.14 Clutch Protection
If there is a risk of clutch overload caused by several • To preserve the mechanical parts of the clutch release
starting procedures in short succession or by crawling mechanism, you should shift the transmission to
in a starting gear that is too high «CL» will appear on Neutral during longer stops (more than approx. 1 to
the display. 2 min., for example in traffic jams, at traffic lights etc.).
That way the clutch is closed and the clutch release
NOTE mechanism relieved.
Select an operating mode in which there is no risk of
clutch overloading, such as: Despite the clutch being automated, the driver still has
• Accelerate vehicle considerable influence on the clutch’s service life.
(to close the clutch). To keep clutch wear levels as low as possible, we
• Stopping recommend always selecting the lowest gear possible
• Starting or maneuvering in a lower gear when starting off.
! DANGER!
If the driver ignores the warning, the clutch will
close with the gas pedal being activated.
This prevents further strain for the clutch.
It may result in “stalling” of the engine, and it
cannot be ruled out that the vehicle may roll
backwards on a slope.
After throttling back, the clutch will open again.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 26

Operation
2.15 Engine Overspeed Protection
To protect the entire driveline from excessive speeds, the

ZF-e Tronic only allows gear shifts which are within the
speed range defined by the vehicle manufacturer.
2.15.1 Operating mode: Manual 2.15.2 Operating mode: Automatic
• Ensure that the engine does not exceed the permissible Observe the instructions provided by the vehicle
speed range. manufacturer.
• If the vehicle speeds up when traveling downhill, there
is no automatic shift into a higher gear. ! DANGER !
The vehicle may gather speed during downhill driving.
CAUTION To protect the engine from damage in the overspeed
The engine may be damaged if the vehicle gathers speed range (red range), the system will perform an upshift.
during downhill driving and the engine speed enters the
overspeed range.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 27

Operation
2.16 Operation With Clutch-Dependent PTO
As soon as a PTO is activated, the display will a «P». • The following appears on the display, e.g.:
Example: « PN » indicates that a PTO is active and the
transmission is in Neutral. Also refer to the “Displays”
chapter.
024406
2.16.1 Nonstationary Mode i.e.: PTO 1 is activated, starting gear 3 is selected.

• During nonstationary PTO operation only the
following starting gears and the maneuvering mode
can be selected:
2.16.2 Stationary Operating State
ZF-AS Tronic Direct drive: Starting gears 1, 3
Overdrive: Starting gears 2, 4 During stationary PTO operation, no gears can be
selected. The transmission remains in Neutral.
ZF-AS Tronic mid all starting gears
• Gear shifts are only undertaken when the vehicle is
stationary. Gear changes during travel are not possible.
• Engage PTO and select starting gear.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 28

Operation
2.17 Roller Test Bench
! The vehicle could leave the rollers even if the

accelerator is not depressed.
Once driven onto a roller test rig (brake test N

D R
rig), shift transmission into “Neutral”. DM RM
• When the roller is running, the

system recognizes the “driving vehicle”
function. If you select a gear, the clutch 029892
closes.
• When the rollers are running, reverse gear can no
longer be selected.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 29

Operation
2.18 Displays
The display provides information on the transmission status.
OPERATING DISPLAYS
Display Description
• System self-check
display with “ignition ON”.
024367
• Maneuvering in forward direction

(drive maneuvering)
024368
• Transmission in neutral position

No transmission gear engaged.
024369
• PTO
- Arrow pointing upwards means PTO 1 is activated.
- “PN” means PTO (P) activated and transmission is in Neutral (N).
024370
*PTO = Power Take Off

4232 758 102 - 2008-05 30
Operation
• Auxiliary drive (PTO*) and forward maneuvering mode are active

- upward showing arrow means PTO 1 is active.
029941
• Auxiliary drive (PTO*) and rearward maneuvering mode are active

- upward showing arrow means PTO 1 is active.
029942
• Auxiliary drive (two PTOs* are active)

- upward and downward showing arrows mean PTO 1 and 2 are active.
- “P1” means PTO is active and 1st transmission gear is engaged.
024371
• Reverse gear “Fast” (High)

Fast reverse gear is engaged.
024445
• Reverse gear “Slow” (Low)

Slow reverse gear is engaged.
024444
*PTO = Power Take Off
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 31

Operation
• Maneuvering in reverse direction

(Reverse Manoeuvring)
024373
• Manual operation
4th gear is engaged in the transmission.
024374
• Gearshift recommendation in manual operation

- 2 bars and downwards pointing arrow mean downshift option of up to 2 gears.
- “5” means 5th gear is engaged.
024375
• Automatic operation is shown in display by 4 bars with 2 arrows.

3rd transmission gear engaged.
024376
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 32

Operation
WARNING NOTES
Display Description
• «AL» = Air pressure inadequate (airless)

- Appears alternatingly with normal display.
- The compressed-air system of the transmisson system does not have enough pressure.
024377 NOTE
Only start once sufficient air pressure is reached. If the clutch doesn’t open when stopping
as a result of insufficient air pressure, the engine is “stalled”.
! DANGER!
If gear shifts are undertaken with insufficient air pressure, the transmission may
remain in Neutral so that there is no direct drive and no engine brake effect.
• «CC» = Clutch Check

• Clutch position cannot be learnt.
024378
• «CL» = Clutch
- Appears in turn with the normal display.
• Clutch is overloaded.
024379 - Chapter 2.14 Clutch Protection
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 33

Operation
• «CW» = Clutch wear display (clutch wear)

- Clutch is worn.
- Go to special workshop soon for clutch replacement.
024380
• «EE» = Electronic Error

- Appears if communication between the display and transmission electronics is interrupted.
024381
• «FP » = Accelerator pedal

• Take your foot from the gas pedal.
- If the display does not go away, the system is malfunctioning. Continuation of travel not possible.
024383
• «HT» = Excessively high transmission temperature (high temperature).
024384
• «TC» = Transmission Check

• Transmission positions cannot be learnt.
024386
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 34

Operation
SYSTEM FAULTS
Display Description
• System fault
- Is shown if only limited driving operation is possible.
- Go to a special workshop as soon as possible.
024387
NOTE
With certain system faults, automatic mode is deactivated and the transmission system remains
in manual mode.
• STOP - Severe system fault

S
T • Stop !
O
P - You must not continue driving. You must take the vehicle to a workshop.
024388
! DANGER!
Whenever possible do not stop the vehicle in hazardous places.
See also Chapter 2.19 (System Faults)
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 35

Operation
2.19 System Faults (Error Messages)
• If a « wrench symbol » appears on the display, there

is a system fault. Only restricted operations may be
available.
If a « STOP » and « wrench symbol », appear on the
display, there is a serious system fault. Park the
vehicle, you must not continue driving.
• The error message and the resultant error reaction Shift lever 029891
can be cancelled when the vehicle is stationary via

« Ignition OFF », wait until the display goes out. If the
display does not go out after « Ignition OFF », switch
off the system by means of the master battery switch. Depending on the version, a 2 or 3-digit error number
Switch the ignition back on. If the error message is still will appear on the display. This corresponds to the error
present, you will have to go to a service center. currently active.
When contacting the service center, please specify the
error number(s).
If 4 bars are displayed in addition to the number shown,
Calling up active error numbers: this means: error no. + 100 (only on a two-digit display)
· Turn on the ignition (do not start the engine)
· Turn rotary switch to « N »
· Hold control lever in « + » position.
024404 024405
e. g.: Error no. 74 Error no. 174
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 36

Operation
If 4 bars and 2 arrows are displayed in addition to the Calling up error numbers from the error memory:
number shown, this means: Error no. +200 (only on a
two-digit display) • Turn on the ignition (do not start the engine)
• Turn rotary switch to «N» and at the same time depress

the foot brake.
024391 • Hold control lever in « + » position.
e. g.: Error no. 227 The errors saved are displayed one after another on the
display.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 37

Operation
2.20 Starting up the Vehicle at Low Temperatures
Outside temperature up to -20 °C -20 °C to -30 °C -30 °C to -40 °C

Oil grade In accordance with the In accordance with the In accordance with the
ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02 ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02 ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02
Engine start permitted permitted Transmission must be preheated

before the engine is started.
When starting, – Warm-up phase of at least This can be done e.g. with warm
note 10 minutes, with increased idling air which must not exceed 130 °C
speed of approx. 1 500 rpm. on the transmission.
Transmission in Neutral CAUTION
Do not heat on the transmission
and clutch actuator.
Limitations None At transmission temperatures in At transmission temperatures in

excess of -20 °C, the transmission excess of -20 °C, the transmission
is operable and all functions are is operable and all functions are
provided. Longer shift times provided. Longer shift times
should be expected. should be expected.
NOTE
At temperatures of -20° C air leakage on the transmission system will significantly increase.
In this it is not sure that the clutch can be opened for the engine start.
In such a case, the engine-mounted starter must be capable of overcoming transmission drag
in addition to the engine drag torque.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 38

Operation
2.20.1 Parking Vehicle at Low Temperatures
The vehicle may be parked or the transmission stored for

long periods down to an outside temperature of -40 °C.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 39

Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic
3 Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic 3.1 Visual Inspection of Wiring
• Please also note any details provided by the vehicle • Check wiring for damage as part of vehicle servicing.
manufacturer.
• Check that connectors are seated correctly, connectors
• Regular maintenance increases the transmission’s must be fitted strain-relieved.
operational reliability.
• Conduct a visual check for oil leaks during vehicle

servicing. 3.2 Pneumatic System Maintenance
• All transmission maintenance work may only be • The vehicle manufacturer’s maintenance instructions
carried out when the vehicle is on horizontal ground must be observed.
and the engine is switched off.
• The pneumatic tank should be drained once a week,
• With all drain plugs, fill plugs, or screw plugs it must in winter every day.
be ensured that the sealing ring is renewed before
every assembly. NOTE
During draining of the pneumatic tank, the pneumatic
• High-pressure water jets must not be pointed at the cleaners and water separators should also be drained if
vent valve. (Water in transmission: risk of corrosion). this is not done automatically.
• For transmissions with ZF-Intarder the ZF-Intarder • If vehicles are fitted with an air dryer, the interval for
Operating Instructions 6085 758 102 are necessary. replacing the cartridge must be observed.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 40

3.3 Type Plate 3.4 Bleeding the Transmission
The type plate contains the key data. The transmission oil heats up during travel. This results
It is located on the left of the transmission when viewed in the formation of excess pressure which is continuously
from the output. removed via a bleed valve (hose breather).
Make sure that bleeder valve and bleeder hose always
The following details must always be given when making function.
inquiries or undertaking repairs:
1 Transmission type When vehicle inspection is carried out, the following
2 Parts list no. of transmission bleeder hose checks are required:
3 Serial no. of transmission
• The hose must not be damaged in any way or show any
kinking or chafing marks.
ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG
MADE IN GERMANY • Max. permissible hose temperature (e.g. near exhaust
pipes, exhaust turbo charger) must not be exceeded.
ZF-AS Tronic 12 AS 2302 1
PARTS LIST NO. MODEL SERIAL NO. • End of hose must be located in the dry room and should
2 4231 030 011 00200100 3 be lowered by for approximately 150 mm.
CUSTOMER x
SPEC. NO
TOTAL x SPEEDO x
RATIO RATIO
P.T.O. N x n= x xn
ENGINE
OIL CAPACIT OIL GRADE SEE 02
IN LITERS
12 LUBRIC. LIST TE-ML
023906
Type plate (example)
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 41

3.5 Oil-Change Intervals 3.7 Oil quantity
To ensure that the transmission achieves the required The oil volume is noted on the type plate.
level of operational safety and reliability, the oil change Correctly undertaking the oil fill process is crucial for
intervals must be observed as specified in List of ensuring the precise oil volume (see Chapter 3.8.1).
Lubricants TE-ML 02!
For the current List of Lubricants, go to:
http://www.zf.com
3.6 Oil Grade
For permitted lubricants refer to ZF List of Lubricants

TE-ML 02.
“We recommend that you use ZF-Ecofluid M.”
The ZF List of Lubricants, TE-ML 02, is made available

by all ZF Service Centers or can be obtained from the
Internet: http://www.zf.com.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 42

4 3 2 1
Example: ZF-AS Tronic 12 AS 2302
1 Tighten oil drain plug to 60 Nm. 4 Type plate

2 Tighten oil drain plug to 60 Nm. 5 Connection for bleed hose or bleed valve
3 Tighten oil filler plug to 60 Nm.
029921
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 43

3.8 Oil Change
The oil may only be changed when the vehicle is

horizontal and the engine is switched off.
Always change the oil after a long journey while the

transmission oil is still at operating temperature and thin.
! DANGER!
Touching hot parts and transmission oil may cause burns.
029921_1 3 2 1
• Remove oil drain and oil filler plugs (1, 2 and 3) from
1 Oil drain plug
transmission and collect transmission oil in a suitable
2 Oil drain plug
container and dispose of in accordance with
3 Oil filler plug, oil filler hole
environmental regulations.
• Clean solenoid at oil drain plug (2).
• Renew sealing rings on oil drain and filler plugs. 3.8.1 Filling Oil
• Tighten oil drain plug (1 and 2) to 60 Nm. • Fill oil through oil filler hole (3).
• The oil level is correct when the oil has reached the
bottom edge of the oil filler hole and/or when oil is
already escaping out of the oil filler hole.
• Tighten oil filler plug (3) to 60 Nm.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 44

3.9 Oil Level Check
! DANGER !
Too little oil in the transmission will result in transmission
damage.
Risk of accident!
• Undertake oil level check when vehicle is on horizontal

ground.
• Do not check the oil level right after travel (this will
produce an incorrect measurement). Only check once
the transmission oil has cooled down (< 40 °C).
• Remove oil filler plug (3).
• If the oil level has fallen below the oil filler hole, the oil
must be topped up (refer to 3.8.1).
• If the oil level is OK, screw in the oil filler plug (3) with
a new sealing ring.
NOTE
Whenever checking the oil level, also inspect the
transmission for leaks.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 45

Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic mid
4 Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic mid 4.1 Visual Inspection of Wiring
• Please also note any details provided by the vehicle • Check wiring for damage as part of vehicle servicing.
manufacturer.
• Check that connectors are seated correctly, connectors
• Regular maintenance increases the transmission’s must be fitted strain-relieved.
• Conduct a visual check for oil leaks during vehicle

servicing. 4.2 Pneumatic System Maintenance
• All transmission maintenance work may only be carried • The vehicle manufacturer’s maintenance instructions
out when the vehicle is on horizontal ground and the must be observed.
engine is switched off.
• The pneumatic tank should be drained once a week, in
• With all drain plugs, fill plugs, or screw plugs it must be winter every day.
ensured that the sealing ring is renewed before every
assembly. NOTE
During draining of the pneumatic tank, the pneumatic
• High-pressure water jets must not be pointed at the vent cleaners and water separators should also be drained if
valve. (Water in transmission: risk of corrosion). this is not done automatically.
• If vehicles are fitted with an air dryer, the interval for

replacing the cartridge must be observed.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 46

4.3 Type Plate 4.4 Bleeding the Transmission
The type plate contains the key data. The transmission oil heats up during travel. This results
It is located on the right side of the transmission when in the formation of excess pressure which is continuously
viewed from the output. removed via a bleed valve (hose breather).
Make sure that bleeder valve and bleeder hose always
The following details must always be given when making function.
inquiries or undertaking repairs:
1 Transmission type When vehicle inspection is carried out, the following
2 Parts list no. of transmission bleeder hose checks are required:
3 Serial no. of transmission
• The hose must not be damaged in any way or have any
kink or chafe marks.
ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG
MADE IN FRANCE • Max. permissible hose temperature (e.g. near exhaust
ASTronic mid 1 pipes, exhaust turbo charger) must not be exceeded.
12 AS 1620 SO
PARTS LIST NO. MODEL SERIAL NO.
2 3 • End of hose must be located in the dry room and
4247 037 002 00 247 443 should be lowered by for approximately 150 mm.
CUSTOMER xxxxxx
SPEC. NO.
TOTAL 10.37 - 0.81 SPEEDO xxx
RATIO
RATIO
n= xn
P.T.O. N xxxxx xxxxx
ENGINE
OIL CAPACIT 9.3 OIL GRADE SEE 02
IN LITERS LUBRIC. LIST TE-ML
Type plate (example)
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 47

4.5 Oil change intervals 4.7 Oil Quantity
To ensure that the transmission achieves the required Correctly undertaking the oil fill process is crucial for
level of operational safety and reliability, the oil change ensuring the precise oil volume (see Chapter 4.8.1).
intervals must be observed as specified in List of
Lubricants TE-ML 02!
4.6 Oil Grades
For lubricants released by ZF, please refer to the ZF List of

Lubricants, TE-ML 02.
“We recommend the use of ZF-Ecofluid M“.
The ZF List of Lubricants, TE-ML 02, is made available by

all ZF Service Centers or can be obtained from the Internet:
http://www.zf.com.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 48

1 2 3
Example: ZF-AS Tronic mid
1 Tighten oil drain plug to 60 Nm. 4 Type plate

2 Tighten oil filler plug to 60 Nm. 5 Connection for bleed hose or bleed valve
3 Heat Exchanger (Option)
029919 / 029920
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 49

4.8 Oil Change
The oil may only be changed when the vehicle is


transmission oil is still at operating temperature and thin.
! DANGER! 029920_1
Touching hot parts and transmission oil may cause burns.
• Remove oil drain and oil filler plugs (1 and 2) from

transmission and collect transmission oil in a suitable 1 2
4.8.1 Filling Oil
• Clean oil drain plug (1) and replace seal.
• Fill oil through oil filler hole (2).
• Tighten oil drain plug (1) to 60 Nm.
• The oil level is correct when the oil has reached the
bottom edge of the oil filler hole and/or when oil is
already escaping out of the oil filler hole.
• Tighten oil filler plug (2) to 60 Nm.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 50

4.9 Oil Level Check
! DANGER !
Too little oil in the transmission will result in transmission
damage.
Risk of accident!
• Undertake oil level check when vehicle is on horizontal

ground.
• Do not check the oil level right after travel (this will
produce an incorrect measurement). Only check once
the transmission oil has cooled down (< 40 °C).
• Remove oil filler plug (2).
• If the oil level has fallen below the oil filler hole, the oil
must be topped up (refer to Chapter 4.8.1).
• If the oil level is OK, screw in the oil filler plug (2) with
a new sealing ring: 60 Nm.
4232 758 102 - 2008-05 51

Repair Manual
Maintenance, Diagnosis,
Component Replacement
Repair Level 1 - 2
Truck 1327 751 101b

CAUTION
The ZF order numbers listed in the manual
apply to the ZF standard.
Variances may occur depending on the vehicle
manufacturer.
The binding ZF order numbers can be found in
the relevant parts list – parts list numbers
are specified on the transmission type plate.
Subject to technical changes
Copyright by ZF Friedrichshafen AG
This documentation is protected by copyright. Any

reproduction or dissemination in whatever form
which does not comply fully with the intended
purpose of this documentation is prohibited without
the consent of ZF Friedrichshafen AG.
Printed in Germany
ZF Friedrichshafen AG, MC-C dept./ 2003-05
Edition: 2008-04
1327 751 101b

ZF-AS Tronic Table of Contents
Page
List of Changes ..................................................................................................................................... 5

Preface ................................................................................................................................................. 6
Important Information ......................................................................................................................... 7
Instructions for Repairs ....................................................................................................................... 8
Tightening Torques .............................................................................................................................. 10
Conversion Factors for Units of Measurement (EU - USA) ................................................................. 12
Special Tools ......................................................................................................................................... 13
ZF-AS Tronic Diagnosis Tools .............................................................................................................. 15
ZF-Intarder Diagnosis Tools ................................................................................................................. 18
Maintenance......................................................................................................................................... 21
General Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 21
Visual Inspection of Wiring.................................................................................................................. 21
Pneumatic System Maintenance.......................................................................................................... 21
Clutch Actuator and Transmission Actuator ....................................................................................... 21
Approved Oil Grades ............................................................................................................................ 22
Oil Volume ............................................................................................................................................ 22
Oil-Change Intervals ............................................................................................................................ 22
Screw Plug ............................................................................................................................................ 22
Repair Solution ................................................................................................................................ 22
Transmission Bleeding ......................................................................................................................... 23
Oil Change (ZF-AS Tronic Without ZF-Intarder) ................................................................................ 24
Filling Oil ......................................................................................................................................... 24
Oil-Level Check ............................................................................................................................... 25
Type Plate......................................................................................................................................... 25
Oil Change (ZF-AS Tronic With ZF-Intarder) ..................................................................................... 26
Oil Filter Replacement .................................................................................................................... 27
Oil Filling ....................................................................................................................................... 28
Oil Filling in Case of Oil Change ................................................................................................... 28
Oil Filling After Transmission Repair ............................................................................................ 28
Oil-Level Check ............................................................................................................................... 29
Engine Coolant ................................................................................................................................ 30
ZF-Intarder Type Plate .................................................................................................................... 30
Diagnosis ............................................................................................................................................. 31
Diagnosis on Vehicles With ZF Display and ZF Range Selector ......................................................... 31
Diagnosis With Testman pro ................................................................................................................ 32
Data Sheet: 20-pin Transmission Actuator........................................................................................... 33
Pin Assignment ..................................................................................................................................... 34
Transmission Actuator ....................................................................................................................... 35

Removing Transmission Actuator .................................................................................................. 35
Removing the Upper Section from Lower Section and Reattaching it .......................................... 37
Mounting Transmission Actuator ................................................................................................... 38
Replacing Pressure Relief Valve ..................................................................................................... 41
Programming Transmission Actuator ............................................................................................ 42
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 3

ZF-AS Tronic Table of Contents
Page
Clutch Actuator .................................................................................................................................... 43

Removing Clutch Actuator ............................................................................................................. 43
Clutch Actuator Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 44
Pushrod ............................................................................................................................................ 45
Set Pushrod ...................................................................................................................................... 46
Bleeding and Assembling Clutch Actuator .................................................................................... 47
Clutch .................................................................................................................................................. 49
Replace Clutch ................................................................................................................................ 49
Clutch Release Mechanism ................................................................................................................. 50
Removing Release Fork ................................................................................................................... 50
Mounting Release Fork.................................................................................................................... 52
Output Flange....................................................................................................................................... 55
Removing and Mounting Output Flange......................................................................................... 55
Removing and Mounting Yoke ........................................................................................................ 56
Output Cover ....................................................................................................................................... 57
Removing and Mounting Output Cover .......................................................................................... 57
Output Impulse Sensor (Speed Sensor) ............................................................................................. 58
Removing and Mounting Impulse Sensor....................................................................................... 58
Neutral switch ..................................................................................................................................... 59
Replacing Neutral Switch ............................................................................................................... 59
Replace Intarder Components ........................................................................................................... 60
Output Speed Sensor ...................................................................................................................... 60
Speedo Sensor ................................................................................................................................ 60
Solenoid Valve ................................................................................................................................ 60
Removing and Mounting 3/2 Directional Valve ............................................................................. 61
Removing and Mounting Intarder Cable Harness .......................................................................... 61
Temperature Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 61
Additional Cooling .............................................................................................................................. 62
Assembling the Valve Block of the Additional Cooling Unit.......................................................... 62
ZF Display ............................................................................................................................................ 63
Removing and Mounting Display .................................................................................................... 63
Connector and Mating Connector Designations ............................................................................... 64
Pneumatic Diagram ............................................................................................................................ 65
Appendix ............................................................................................................................................. 66
CAN BUS Measurements With Digital Multimeter ........................................................................ 67
Service Information No. 26_05 Neutral Switch.............................................................................. 68
Service Information No. 08_06 Neutral Switch.............................................................................. 72
Drawings
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 4

List of Changes: 1327 751 101
Index Date of issue Chapter Initiator Remark
a BKS/LKS Completely revised:

Maintenance included, diagnosis extended, repair
updated. Repair Instructions Stage 1-2 divided into
Truck 1327 751 101 and Bus 1337 751 101
b 2008-04 LKS-T dept. Clutch release mechanism (with rollers)
Added: Conversion factors, hose breather,
maintenance of clutch and transmission actuator
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 5

Preface
This documentation is intended for skilled person-

nel trained by ZF Friedrichshafen AG to carry out
maintenance and repair work on ZF products.
This manual deals with the standard ZF products

in accordance with the state of development on the
date of issue.
However, due to continuing technical development

of the product, repair work might require work
practices and test or adjustment data not contained
in this manual.
We recommend that work done on your ZF product

is carried out only by skilled mechanics who have
had their practical and theoretical knowledge up-
dated on a regular basis at our Customer Service /
After Sales training center.
Service Centers equipped by ZF Friedrichshafen AG

all over the world offer you:
1. Continually trained personnel,
2. Specified equipment, e.g. special tools,
3. Genuine ZF spares, according to our latest

specifications.
All work performed at these Service Centers is car-

ried out conscientiously and with utmost care.
Warranty:
Repair work carried out at ZF Service Centers is
subject to the contractual conditions prevailing in
ZF Friedrichshafen AG the individual case.
Nutzfahrzeug- und Sonder-Antriebstechnik
Commercial Vehicle and Damage resulting from work performed by non-ZF
Special Driveline Technology personnel in an improper and unprofessional
Service Werk 2 (Plant 2) manner and any consequential costs are excluded
Phone: +49 (0)7541 77-0 from the contractual liability agreement. Exclusion
Fax: +49 (0)7541 77-908000 of liability also applies if genuine ZF spares are
Internet: www.zf.com not used.
2007-02 6

Important Information
Safety Instructions General Information
In principal, companies repairing ZF units are Read this manual carefully before starting any tests
responsible for their own work safety. or repair work.
To avoid injury to personnel and damage to

products, all safety regulations and legal require- CAUTION
ments which apply to repair and maintenance Pictures, drawings, and components shown do not
work must be adhered to. always represent the original object, but are used
Before starting work, mechanics must familiarize to illustrate working procedures.
themselves with these regulations. Pictures, drawings, and components are not to
scale. Conclusions about size and weight should
Personnel required to carry out repairs on ZF not be drawn (even within a complete illustration).
products must receive appropriate training in Always follow the working steps as described in
advance. It is the responsibility of each company to the text.
ensure that their repair staff is properly trained.
After completion of repair work and testing, skilled

staff must check whether the product is functioning
The following safety instructions appear in this correctly.
manual:
! THREATS TO THE ENVIRONMENT !

NOTE Lubricants, consumables, and cleaning agents must
Refers to special working procedures, methods, not be allowed to enter the soil, ground water, or
information, use of auxiliary equipment, etc. sewage system.
• Ask your local environment agency for safety
information on the relevant products and adhere
CAUTION to their requirements.
This is used when incorrect, unprofessional work- • Collect used oil in a suitably large container.
ing practices could damage the product. • Dispose of used oil, dirty filters, lubricants, and
cleaning agents in accordance with environmental
protection guidelines.
! DANGER • When working with lubricants and cleaning agents
This is used when lack of care could lead to personal always refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
injury or death.
CAUTION
The transmission must NOT be suspended by the
input shaft NOR by the output flange.
2007-02 7

Instructions for Repairs
ZF Service Information must be observed. This Gaskets, Locking Plates

information is available at all ZF Service Centers
or via the ZF-ServiceLine. Parts which cannot be removed without being
damaged must always be replaced with new parts
In case of doubt always turn to the relevant depart- (e.g. gaskets and locking plates).
ment within ZF Customer Service / After Sales
Service for advice.
All work on transmissions is to be performed by
experts only and under clean conditions. Shaft Seals
Use specified tools to dismantle and assemble
transmissions. Always change shaft seals with rough, ripped, or
hardened sealing lips. Seal contact surfaces must be
totally clean and in perfect condition.
After removing the transmission from the vehicle,
clean it thoroughly with a suitable cleaning agent
before opening.
Pay particular attention to the projections and Reworking
recesses of housings and covers when cleaning.
Rework may be carried out on seal contact surfaces
Parts joined with Loctite are easier to separate if using plunge-cut grinding only, never use an emery
warmed with a fan heater. cloth. Ensure that there are no traces of grinding or
scroll.
If rework is needed on spacer disks, shims etc.

Cleaning Parts because of clearance adjustment, ensure that the
reworked areas contain no face runout and have
Remove remains of old gaskets on all sealing sur- the same surface quality.
faces. Carefully remove burrs or similar patches of
roughness using an oilstone.
Lube bores and grooves must be free of anti- Transmission Assembly

corrosion agents and foreign matter; check for
perfect passage. Find a clean work area to assemble the trans-
mission. Gaskets are installed without sealing
Carefully cover opened transmissions to prevent for- compound or grease. When measuring silicon-
eign matter from entering. coated gaskets, do not include the silicon layer.
During assembly, comply with all adjustment data
and tightening torques in the Repair Manual.
Reusing Parts
Parts such as roller bearings, disks, thrust washers

etc., must be inspected by a competent person who
should decide whether or not they can be re-used.
Replace parts which are damaged or have suffered
from excessive wear.
2007-02 8

Instructions for Repairs
Bearings d) Dual shaft seals have two seal-

ing lips. The dust-proof sealing
If bearings are mounted in heated condition, they lip (X) must face outwards.
are to be heated evenly (e.g. heating cabinet). X
Temperature should be at approx. 85 °C and must e) Fill the gap between the sealing
not exceed 120 °C. Each mounted bearing must be lips so it is 60 % filled with grease* (e.g. pro-
lubricated with operating oil. duced by Aral, such as Aralub HL2 or by DEA,
such as Spectron FO 20).
f) If possible, heat shaft seal bores to between

Sealing 40 and 50 °C (makes fitting easier). Press in shaft
sealing ring with mounting or face plate until
If a specific sealing agent* is to be used for sealing, firmly home at relevant installation depth.
comply with the manufacturer’s directions for use.
Apply a thin layer of sealing agent to the surfaces
and spread evenly. Do not allow sealing to enter oil
ducts and bores. On oil-carrying ducts and bores, Retaining Agents
wipe off the sealing agent on the surfaces to be
sealed near apertures to ensure that no sealing Retaining agents* may only be used where specified
agent enters the oil feeds when the parts are pressed by the parts list.
together. Always comply with manufacturer’s directions for
use when using retaining agents (e.g. Loctite).
During assembly, comply with all adjustment data,
checking data, and tightening torques.
Shaft Seals
a) Apply a light coat of sealing agent* on circum-

ference of shaft seals with “steel jacket”. Transmission Oil
b) Never apply sealing agent to shaft seals with After completing repairs, fill transmissions with
“rubber jacket”, but apply a thin coat of Vaseline transmission oil. For the procedure and approved oil
8420 to the outer circumference or wet with a grades, refer to the transmission Operating Instruc-
lubricant, e.g. a water-soluble, concentrated tions and TE-ML List of Lubricants (refer to identifi-
washing-up liquid (e.g. Pril, Coin, Palmolive). cation plate) which can be obtained from all ZF
Customer Service / After Sales Centers and on the
c) Shaft seals with steel and rubber jackets should Internet under www.zf.com.
be treated on the outer circumference of the rub- After filling the transmission with oil, tighten the
ber jacket as described for shaft seal b). screw plugs at the oil filling point and the oil over-
flow using the specified torques.
* refer to expendable material
2007-02 9

Tightening Torques
Tightening Torques for Bolts/Screws and Nuts

Extract from ZFN 148
This standard applies to screws/bolts acc. to Surface condition of bolts /screws and nuts: Ther-
DIN 912, DIN 931, DIN 933, DIN 960, DIN 961, as mally blackened and oiled or galvanized and oiled
well as ISO 4762, ISO 4014, ISO 4017, ISO 8765, or galvanized, chromated, and oiled.
ISO 8676, and to nuts acc. to DIN 934 as well as
ISO 4032, ISO 8673. Tighten screws/bolts with a calibrated ratchet dial
torque or ratchet wrench.
This Standard contains data on tightening torques
for screws/bolts and nuts in strength categories 8.8, NOTE
10.9, and 12.9, and nuts in strength categories 8, 10, Deviating tightening torques are listed separately in
and 12. the Repair Manual.
Regular screw thread Fine screw thread
Size Tightening torque (Nm) for Size Tightening torque (Nm) for
Screw/Bolt 8.8 10.9 12.9 Screw/Bolt 8.8 10.9 12.9
Nut 8 10 12 Nut 8 10 12
M4 2.8 4.1 4.8 M8x1 24 36 43

M5 5.5 8.1 9.5 M9x1 36 53 62
M6 9.5 14 16.5 M10x1 52 76 89
M7 15 23 28 M10x1.25 49 72 84
M8 23 34 40 M12x1.25 87 125 150
M10 46 68 79 M12x1.5 83 120 145
M12 79 115 135 M14x1.5 135 200 235

M14 125 185 215 M16x1.5 205 300 360
M16 195 280 330 M18x1.5 310 440 520
M18 280 390 460 M18x2 290 420 490

M20 390 560 650 M20x1.5 430 620 720
M22 530 750 880 M22x1.5 580 820 960
M24 670 960 1100 M24x1.5 760 1100 1250

M27 1000 1400 1650 M24x2 730 1050 1200
M30 1350 1900 2250 M27x1.5 1100 1600 1850
M27x2 1050 1500 1800

M30x1.5 1550 2200 2550
M30x2 1500 2100 2500
Edition: August 1991
2007-02 10

Tightening Torques
Screw Plugs DIN 908, 910, and 7604 Union Screws DIN 7643
The screw plug tightening torques were determined The tightening torques were determined for
according to DIN 7604 for screwing into steel, gray screwing into steel, gray cast, and aluminum alloys.
cast, and aluminum alloys. The values are based on experience and are
The values are based on experience and are intended as reference values for the fitter.
intended as reference values for the fitter.
The values for the tightening torque apply General rule:
analogously to screw plugs according to DIN 908 Screw/ Bolt class 5, ZFN 148-1
and DIN 910, as the thread geometries are almost Material: 9SMnPb28K acc. to DIN 1651
identical. Surface condition: As manufactured (without
surface protection) and lightly oiled or galvanized,
General rule: chromated, and lightly oiled.
Screw/ Bolt class 5, ZFN 148-1
Screw/ Bolt material: Steel acc. to DIN 7604.
Surface condition: As manufactured (without
surface protection) and lightly oiled or galvanized,
chromated, and lightly oiled.
Screw plugs (DIN 908, 910, 7604) Union screws (DIN 7643)
Dimensions Tightening torque Pipe Thread Tightening

in Nm screwed into outer torque
steel / gray cast Al alloy diameter in Nm
M8x1 20* 10*
M10x 1 25 / 30* 15 / 20* 4-5 M8x1 20 - 25
M12x1.5 35 25
M14x1.5 35 25 6 M10x1 25 - 35
M16x1.5 40 30
M18x1.5 50 35 8 M12x1.5 30 - 40
M20x1.5 55 45
M22x1.5 60 / 80* 50 / 65* 10 M14x1.5 35 - 40
M24x1.5 70 60
M26x1.5 80 / 105* 70 / 90* 12 M16x1.5 45
M27x2 80 70
M30x1.5 100 / 130* 90 / 130* 15 M18x1.5 50
M30x2 95 85
M33x2 120 110 18 M22x1.5 60
M36x1.5 130 115
M38x1.5 140 120 22 M26x1.5 90
M42x1.5 150 130
M42x2 145 125 28 M30x1.5 130
M45x1.5 160 140
M45x2 150 130 35 M38x1.5 140
M48x1.5 170 145
M48x2 160 135
M52x1.5 180 150
M60x2 195 165
M64x2 205 175
* DIN 7604 Form C Status: October 1995
2007-02 11

ZF-AS Tronic Conversion Factors
Conversion Factors:
from to x Factor Examples:
mm inch x 0.03937 20.0 mm = 0.7874 inch

inch mm x 25.4 0.4 inch = 10.16 mm
Nm ft.lb. x 0.7376 60 Nm = 44.256 ft.lb.

ft.lb. Nm x 1.356 35 ft.lb. = 47.46 Nm
°C °F 9 x °C 90 °C = 194 °F
+ 32
5
°F °C 5(°F-32) 248 °F = 120 °C

9
bar psi x 14.513 10 bar = 145.13 psi

psi bar x 0.06894 200 psi = 13.78 bar
liters US gallons x 0.2642 20 liters = 5.284 US gallons

US gallons liters x 3.7854 3 US gallons = 11.3562 liters
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 12

ZF-AS Tronic Special Tools
Fig. Figure Order no. Application Qty. Remark

no.
1X56 138 215 Chapter

“Clutch Release
Adapter Mechanism”
1 for assembly of bushes and 2 (Version A)
shaft sealing rings of release fork Release fork
with cams.

“Clutch Release
Press-in mandrel 1 Mechanism”
2 for assembly of bearing bushes and (Version B)
cam rollers of the release fork Release fork with
cam rollers.

“Clutch Release
Support 1 Mechanism”
3 ffor the release fork (Version B)
Release fork with
cam rollers.

“Output Cover”
Adapter
4 for installing the shaft sealing ring at 1
the output cover (in connection with
a spacer ring 1X56 138 189)

“Output Cover”
Spacer ring
5 for shaft sealing ring 105 x 125 x 12 1
at output cover (in connection
with adapter 1X56 137 124)
NOTE: Please inquire as to packaging unit before ordering.
1327_91D_010_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 13 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic Special Tools

no.
240
Sketch Chapter
“Transmission
M10
64
75
11
60.5
M10
112
74 Actuator”
15
100.1 ø9H7 ø9H7
Setting aid 1 Assembly aid
6 200.1 14
2120.1 for piston rods on
ø8.70.1
transmission actuator
ø9r6
25
2x45 2x45
37.50.1
40
1327_91D_010_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 14 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic Diagnosis Tools

no.
6008 208 503 Only for

ZF-Testman pro complete ZF Sales
and Service
Organizations
Scope of supply:
1 - 6008 208 100 ZF-Testman pro 1
with DPA05 + cable
- 6008 208 015 Application CD
- 6008 208 016 License
6008 208 501 Only for

ZF-Testman pro diagnosis software ZF Sales
and Service
Organizations
Scope of supply:
2 - 6008 208 011 ZF-Testman pro 1
Update CD
- 6008 208 015 Application CD
- 6008 208 016 License
6008 208 003 following

ZF-Testman pro for ZF customers agreement with
ZF Friedrichs-
Scope of supply:
hafen AG
- 6008 208 100 ZF-Testman pro
3 with DPA05 + cable 1
- 6008 208 900 ZF-Testman pro
software for user interface
(CD basic installation)
6008 208 819 Single user

license
Diagnosis software
ZF-AS Tronic 2
4 1
6008 207 003 Adapter cable for

programming and
configuration
Table mode adapter
purposes and for
ZF-AS Tronic 2 diagnosis outside
5 1 the vehicle
1327_91D_050_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 15 2008-03


no.
6008 006 002 The terminal

tester can be
Terminal tester used to inter-
68-pin rupt all PINs
1 1 and to take
measurements
at all PINs.
6008 307 025 Connection:

Terminal tester
Diagnosis connection
Universal for use with terminal tester CAUTION:
2 1 PIN assignment
depends on
control unit.
6008 206 007 Adapter cable

at socket end
Adapter cable for bus and
68-pin socket to 18/20-pin pin truck.
3 1

at pin end for
Adapter cable bus and truck.
68-pin pin to 18/20-pin socket
4 1
6008 307 009 Power supply

in vehicle via
Main power system cable cigarette lighter
for MobiDig 2001
5 1
1327_91D_020_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 16 2008-03


no.
MAN The diagnosis

connector
6008 207 007 for MAN TGA is near the fuse
box.
6008 207 006 for MAN F2000 + Bus
6 1
Diagnosis connection
for transmission and Intarder
RVI The diagnosis

connector is near
6008 207 009 the fuse box or
at driver’s place,
bottom left.
7 Diagnosis connection 1
for transmission and Intarder
IVECO Connection: 5-pin

diagnosis connector
is located under flap
6008 307 026 (5-pin)
in front of speed
6008 307 031 (30-pin)
range selector.
8 1 Connection: 30-pin
Diagnosis connection diagnosis connector
for transmission and Intarder is near the fuse box.
0501 211 104
Cable SAE 1708

(USA)
9 1
1327_91D_020_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 17 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic ZF-Intarder Diagnosis Tools

no.
6008 206 011 Adapter cable at

socket end for
Adapter cable for EST 42 terminal bus and truck
tester
1 1
Adapter cable, 68-pin pin to
88-pin socket

pin end for bus
Adapter cable for EST 42 terminal and truck
tester
2 1
Adapter cable, 68-pin socket to
88-pin pin

for programming
Table mode adapter EST 42 and
configuration
purposes and
3 1 for diagnosis
outside
the vehicle
6008 208 811 Diagnosis

software cpl. CD
Diagnosis software EST42/48
(single user
for ZF-Intarder license)
4 1

socket end for
tester
5 1
88-pin socket
1327_91D_030_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 18 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic ZF-Intarder Diagnosis Tools

no.

at pin end for
tester
6 1
88-pin socket

for program-
Table mode adapter EST 48 ming and
configuration
purposes and
7 1 for diagnosis
outside the
vehicle
1327_91D_030_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 19 2008-03

1327 751 101 - 2008-04

ZF-AS Tronic Maintenance
General Maintenance Clutch Actuator and Transmission Actuator
• Please also note the details provided by the Actuators are to be replaced and/or overhauled after
vehicle manufacturer 2.4 million gear shifts. The number of gear shifts can
be found in the statistics memory.
• Regular maintenance increases the transmission’s
• If “TC” appears frequently on the display, the
• Visual inspection for oil leaks during vehicle compressed-air supply is possibly defective and
servicing checks. therefore has to be checked.
- Check pressure with Testman pro:
• All transmission maintenance work may only be
Operating pressure (stock) 5.5 to 12 bar
carried out when the vehicle is on horizontal
If the system pressure is below 6.2 bar or
ground and the engine is switched off.
greater than 7.2 bar ( display via Testman pro
• With all screw plugs it must be ensured that the pressure sensor ) the pressure relief valve must
sealing ring is replaced before every assembly. be replaced.
If the system pressure is greater than 7.2 bar,
preliminary transmission damage is possible
Visual Inspection of Wiring and no error is saved in the error memory.
• Check wiring for damage as part of vehicle • If the “CC” (clutch check phase) takes very
servicing. long the compressed-air supply to clutch actuator
is possibily defective (soiling of valve screw);
• Check that connectors are seated correctly,
therefore, check the clutch actuator valve screw.
connectors must be fitted strain-relieved.
Pneumatic System Maintenance
• The vehicle manufacturer’s maintenance

instructions must be observed.
• The pneumatic tank should be drained once a

week, in winter every day.
NOTE
During draining of the pneumatic tank, the
pneumatic cleaners and water separators should
also be drained if this is not done automatically.
• If vehicles are fitted with an air dryer, the

interval for replacing the cartridge must be
observed.
1327_53D_010_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 21 2008_03

Approved Oil Grades For oil changes, please note the following:
Only those lubricants listed in ZF List of Lubricants The screw plug with tag 0768 409 494 at the oil
TE-ML 02 may be used. The ZF List of Lubricants, filling point must be replaced by the screw plug
TE-ML 02, can be obtained from all ZF Service without tag 0768 409 498.
Centers or from the Internet: http://www.zf.com. The screw plug with tag has a recess between collar
and hexagon (see arrow) and must therefore not be
used any more.
Oil Volume
Tightening torque,
The oil volume is noted on the type plate. screw plug with sealing ring: 60 Nm
It is crucial for the correct oil volume to carry
out oil fill accurately (see Chapter “Filling Oil”).
Repair solution,
only in agreement with ZF:
Oil-Change Intervals
• Tapered screw plug without solenoid
To ensure transmission’s the required level of 0736 303 005
operational safety and reliability, the oil-change • Tapered screw plug with solenoid
intervals must be observed as specified in the ZF 0736 305 016
List of Lubricants TE-ML 02!
Use Loctite 222 to coat tapered screw plug thread
before assembly.
Tightening torque,
tapered screw plugs: 50 Nm
Old New
AC
HT
U NG
SYN
TH
ET
BE OEL- IK-
FU
ELL
UN
GE G
A
OE ENDE
LW RT
INT ECHS ER
ER EL-
VA
LL
029486
1327_53D_010_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 22 2008_03

Transmission Bleeding
The transmission is fitted with a vent on the The following should be noted when fitting the hose
transmission actuator as standard. The vent should (also refer to sketch):
be protected from the ingress of large amounts of
• Ensure that the hose exits the transmission vent
water. The vent must be clean; ensure that the
horizontally (use angle screw connection if
plastic cover is not fitted.
necessary).
In the case of vehicles which are frequently cleaned • Route hose so that it rises continuously. A siphon
with a water jet, moisture or moist air may be drawn effect should be avoided (see sketch).
into the vent as a result of sudden transmission
• No kinks, chafing points. Route hose in the
cooling, causing condensation to form inside the
largest radius possible.
transmission. Also applications where the trans-
mission is located in the water-expelling area of the • Max. permissible hose temperature (e.g. near
rear wheels may be affected by this. exhaust pipes, exhaust turbocharger) must not be
exceeded.
Since the proportion of water in the transmission oil
• End of hose lowered by approx. 150 mm.
must not exceed 1 000 ppm, ZF recommends that
rather than the standard vent, a hose-type vent be • Inside width of hose should be at least Ø 4 mm.
installed in the vehicle’s dry compartment. The
• The vehicle manufacturer is responsible for the
transmission’s interface to the hose may be supplied
correct fitting and routing of the hose.
having been fitted in the factory.
A retrofit kit for hose venting is available under
ZF number 1315 298 021 from ZF Service.
This provides the best-possible protection for the

ca. 150 mm
transmission against water ingress. When using this correct

form of hose venting, the oil change interval for incorrect
ECOFLUID M transmission oil increases.
More information on this can be found in the List of
Lubricants TE-ML 02.
Notes on the “dry compartment” and routing of the

hose:
“Dry compartment” is defined as follows:
• Splash-protected
• Low air humidity

023915
Example: trunk, battery compartment
Fig: Guideline for routing a hose-type
vent to the dry compartment
1327_53D_010_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 23 2008_03

1 Screw plug with solenoid 4 Type plate

2 Screw plug with solenoid 5 Transmission bleeding
3 Screw plug
028456
Oil Change (ZF-AS Tronic Without ZF-Intarder) Filling Oil
Oil may only be changed when the vehicle is • Fill in oil through oil filling point (3).
• The oil level is correct when the oil has reached
the bottom edge of the oil filler hole and/or when
oil is already escaping out of the oil filler hole.
transmission oil is still at operating temperature and
thin. • Tighten screw plug (3) to 60 Nm.
! DANGER!
Touching hot parts and transmission oil may cause
burns.
• Remove screw plugs (1, 2 and 3) from trans-

mission and collect transmission oil in a suitable
• Clean screw plug solenoid and replace sealing

rings.
• Tighten screw plugs (1 and 2) to 60 Nm.
1327_53D_010_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 24 2008_03

Oil-Level Check (ZF-AS Tronic Without Type Plate

ZF-Intarder)
The type plate contains the key data.
It is located on the left of the transmission
! DANGER ! when viewed from the output.
Too little oil in the transmission will result in
transmission damage. RISK OF ACCIDENT! The following details must always be given
when making inquiries or for repairs:
1 Transmission type (model)
Check the transmission oil level as part of vehicle 2 Transmission parts list no.
servicing: 3 Transmission serial no.
• Undertake oil level check when vehicle is parked

on horizontal ground. ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG
MADE IN HUNGARY
• Do not check the oil level right after travel
AS Tronic 12 AS 2330 TO 1
(incorrect measurement result). Only check once MODEL
PARTS LIST NO. SERIAL NO.
the transmission oil has cooled down (< 40 °C). 2 1327 036 016 00247443 3
CUSTOMER xxxxxx
• Remove screw plug (3). SPEC. NO.
TOTAL 12.33 - 0.78 SPEEDO xxx
RATIO
• If the oil level has fallen below the oil filler hole, RATIO
xn
P.T.O. N xxxxx n= xxxxx
the oil must be topped up (refer to Chapter on ENGINE
OIL CAPACIT OIL GRADE SEE
“Filling Oil”). IN LITERS 12 LUBRIC. LIST TE-ML 02
029366
NOTE Type plate (example)

Whenever checking the oil level, also inspect the
transmission for leaks.
1327_53D_010_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 25 2008_03

ZF-AS Tronic With Intarder Maintenance
5
9 11
1 10
4 3 2
1 Oil drain location Intarder 9 Oil filling location after repairs

2 Oil drain location transmission 10 Tighten screw to 23 Nm
3 Oil filling and/or oil overflow location 11 Filter cover
4 Type plate Tighten screw plugs (1, 2, 3 and 9) to 60 Nm.
5 Transmission bleeding
019368
Oil Change (ZF-AS Tronic With ZF-Intarder) ! DANGER !

Touching hot parts and transmission oil may cause
CAUTION burns.
The ZF-Intarder may NOT be actuated shortly
before parking the vehicle to change oil! • Switch off engine.
This ensures that the correct oil volume is
measured in the transmission. • Remove screw plugs (1 and 2) from transmission
and Intarder and collect transmission oil in a
NOTES suitable container.
• In the case of an oil change, the oil must be Dispose of transmission oil in accordance with
drained into a suitable container and disposed environmental guidelines.
of in an environmentally-friendly manner. • Clean solenoid on screw plugs and replace
• Always change the oil after a long journey while sealing rings.
the transmission oil is still at operating • Screw in screw plugs (1 and 2) and tighten to
temperature and thin. 60 Nm.
• Change the oil only when the vehicle is parked
on horizontal ground. CAUTION
Observe the specified tightening torque for screw
plugs; otherwise transmission transmission
damage may occur!
• Replace oil filter.
1327_53D_020_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 26 2008-03

Oil Filter Replacement
NOTE
Use new oil filter for each oil change.
!
DANGER ! 11
When transmission oil is hot: Danger of burns!
1 Remove screw (10) from filter cover (11).
10
000529
2 Remove filter cover (11) with mounted

filter. Remove oil filter from filter cover.
CAUTION
There is residual oil left in the oiI filter housing!
3 Check O-ring (8) on filter cover (11), for

damage, replace and grease, if necessary. 000552
4 Safely attach magnet (12) to the new filter.
5 Grease O-ring (7).
6 Fit filter cover (11) onto new filter(6). Insert

the complete unit in the filter housing until
complete abutment.
7 Tighten screw (10) to 23 Nm.
11 8 7 6 12
004467
1327_53D_020_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 27 2008-03

Oil Filling (ZF-AS Tronic With ZF-Intarder)

9
CAUTION
In case of transmission with ZF-Intarder, a
distinction is made between oil filling during oil
change and oil filling after transmission repair.
Oil Filling in Case of Oil Change
NOTE 3
The oil filling may only take place when the vehicle
is parked on horizontal ground and the engine is
switched off. Oil grade according to TE-ML 02. 019368
• Remove screw plug (3).

Oil Filling After Transmission Repair
• Fill oil into transmission until it overflows.
• Insert screw (3) and new sealing ring and tighten NOTE
to 60 Nm. The oil filling may only take place when the vehicle
is parked on horizontal ground and the engine is
Undertake test drive: Distance of 2 - 5 km switched off. Oil grade according to TE-ML 02.
During test drive press the footbrake to disengage
Intarder. • Remove screw plugs (3 and 9).
DO NOT engage the Intarder during the test drive.
• Fill with oil at pos. 9 until oil flows over at pos. 3.
End of test drive: Vehicle is parked. • Insert screw plugs (3 and 9) and new sealing ring
DO NOT engage Intarder! and tighten to 60 Nm.
• Remove screw plug (3). Undertake test drive: Distance of 2 - 5 km

During test drive press the footbrake to disengage
CAUTION Intarder.
Check oil level again and if necessary, top up with Test drive: At the start of the test drive,
oil until it overflows. BRIEFLY activate the Intarder (stage 6) ONCE.
• Insert screw plug (3) and new sealing ring and End of test drive: Vehicle is parked.
tighten to 60 Nm. Do NOT engage Intarder!
• Remove screw plug (3).
CAUTION
Check oil level again and if necessary, top up with
oil until it overflows.
• Tighten screw plug (3) to 60 Nm.
1327_53D_020_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 28 2008-03

Oil Level Check (ZF-AS Tronic With ZF-Intarder) Visual Inspection
! If the accumulator charge valve is seriously leaking,

DANGER!
then replace the entire accumulator.
Too little oil in the transmission will result in
transmission damage.
Risk of accident!
CAUTION
To check the oil level, the Intarder must not
be activated just before parking the vehicle.
This ensures that the correct oil volume is
measured in the transmission.
NOTES
• In order to get a correct measurement, the oil
level check is to be effected with
- Vehicle parked on horizontal ground,
- Engine turned off,
- Transmission oil cooled down (< 40 °C).
• Check the transmission oil level as part of vehicle

servicing.
• Pay particular attention to possible leakages:

- Transmission,
- Intarder,
- Oil/Water heat exchanger,
- The corresponding cooling water pipes.
CHECK
• Park your vehicle on horizontal ground without

actuating the Intarder.
• Remove the screw plug at the oil filling point (3)

during oil level check.
• If the oil level has dropped below the edge of the

oil filler hole, refill oil until overflow.
• Insert screw plug (3) and new sealing ring and

tighten to 60 Nm.
1327_53D_020_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 29 2008-03

Engine Coolant ZF-Intarder Type Plate
CAUTION The type plate contains the important key data of

When refilling the engine coolant, please pay strict the Intarder. It is located on the side of the Intarder
attention to the instructions given by the vehicle housing.
manufacturer! Otherwise, damage may occur at
the oil/water heat exchanger! The following information must always be given
when making inquiries, placing orders, or carrying
• Engine coolant out repairs:
(mixture made from fresh water and anti-freeze/
anti-corrosion agents) 1. Parts list no. of the Intarder
- Recommended volume for anti-freeze/anti- 2. Serial no. of the Intarder
corrosion agent: 40 -50 Vol.%, to be checked
with coolant inspector. ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG
MADE IN GERMANY
INTARDER AS Tronic
• Anti-freeze and anti-corrosion agents MODEL
PARTS LIST NO. SERIAL NO.
Basic fluid: Ethylenglycol with corrosion 1 6085 020 028 XXX XXX 2
inhibitors. CUSTOMER
SPEC. NO.
TOTAL SPEEDO
RATIO
RATIO
• Fresh water P.T.O. N n= xn
ENGINE
pH value 6.5 -8.0; overall hardness < 20° dH OIL CAPACIT OIL GRADE SEE
IN LITERS LUBRIC. LIST TE-ML
029367
Change interval of the engine coolant: Type plate (example)
• At max. every 2 years
with aluminum heat exchanger
(for fill as pre-mixture).
• At max. every 4 years
with stainless steel heat exchanger
(for fill as pre-mixture).
• Deviating information
(shorter change intervals), given by the vehicle
and/or engine manufacturer are to be complied
with.
NOTE
The entire cooling system must always be rinsed
with water prior to new fills.
The coolant must also be replaced immediately if
sludge forms or if the coolant’s concentration falls
suddenly.
1327_53D_020_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 30 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic Diagnosis
Diagnosis on Vehicles With ZF Display and Call up error numbers*:

ZF Range Selector
• Switch on the ignition.
NOTE • Turn rotary switch to «N» .

Depending on the manufacturer and vehicle type,
• Hold control lever in « + » position
you may have operating processes other than those
described in this manual. Therefore, also observe
The number shown in the display is the error
the operating instructions provided by the vehicle
number.
manufacturer.
If 4 bars are displayed in addition to the number
shown on a two-digit display, this means:
Error no. +100

e. g.: Error no. 74
Error no. 174
002 686 003 930
013 587
ZF display ZF range selector

If 4 bars and 2 arrows are displayed in addition to
the number shown, this means:
The ZF standard software displays system errors on
the ZF display.
Error no. +200
If a “wrench symbol” appears e.g. : Error no. 27
on the display, there is a system Error no. 227
error. 018 470
Only restricted operations may

008026
be available.
For example: With certain system errors, automatic
mode is deactivated and the transmission system
remains in manual mode.
If a “STOP” and a “wrench

symbol” appear on the display,
there is a serious system error.
You must not continue driving. 008027
The vehicle usually has to be
towed away.
* also refer to vehicle manufacturer’s operating instructions
1327-93D-010_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 31 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic Diagnosis
Diagnosis With Testman pro
Reading Error Memory Clearing Error Memory
1. Open Testman 1. Open Testman
2. Commercial Vehicle / Special Driveline 2. Commercial Vehicle / Special Driveline

Technology Technology
3. Main menu AS Tronic 2 3. Main menu AS Tronic 2
4. Licensing 4. Licensing
5. Safety information 5. Safety Information
6. Diagnosis product menu 6. Diagnosis product menu
7. Information regarding laptop connection 7. Information regarding laptop connection
8. Communication structure 8. Communication structure
9. Description 9. Description
(is automatically saved in GDS3000 directory (is automatically saved in GDS3000 directory
under the transmission number) under the transmission number)
10. Read diagnosis error memory 10. Clear diagnosis error memory
(transmission actuator in vehicle, connection
11. Clear error memory yes/no
via diagnosis interface on vehicle)
12. Error memory erased
11. Read/Save error memory
12. Select error

(e.g. in this case, error 191 EOL error) Working with checklists
(AS Tronic check list, refer to ZF-ServiceLine)
13. Read out error data
(save if possible)
When reporting complaints, it is important that
you have fully worked through the check list and
provided the data required. This is the only way in
which the problem can be localized.
CAN BUS test with digital multimeter, see annex.
1327-93D-021_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 32 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic Data Sheet: 20-pin Transmission Actuator
TECHNICAL DATA TECHNISCHE DATEN CARACTERISTIQUES TECHNIQUES CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE
WORKING MEDIUM: AIR

ARBEITSMEDIUM: LUFT
FLUIDE D'UTILISATION: AIR
FLUIDO DI ESERCIZIO: ARIA 62/X1B 61/X1A
W U
TERMAL RANGE OF APPLICATION:
THERMISCHER ANWENDUNGSBERREICH:
PLAGE DE TEMPERATURE EN UTILISATION:
CAMPO TERMICO DI APPLICAZIONE:
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE: 32

UMGEBUNGSLUFTTEMPERATUR: -30˚ C . . . MAX. 95˚C
TEMPERATURE AIR AMBIANTE:
TEMPERATURA ARIA AMBIENTE:
FLANGE TEMPERATURE:
FLANSCHTEMPERATUR: MAX 0,5h ... 130˚C -30˚C BIS 110˚
BRIDE TEMPERATURES:
FLANGIA TEMPERATURA:
WORKING PRESSURE (SUPPLY):

BETRIEBSDRUCK (VORRAT): pe = 5,5...12 bar
PRESSION D'UTILISATION (ALIMENTATION):
PRESSIONE DI ESERCIZIO (ALIMENTAZIONE): GROUPING OF WIRES (ON THE PLUG)
STECKERBELEGUNG
DEGREE OF PROTECTION ACCORDING TO IE C 529: GROUPEMENT DE CABLES
RAGGRUPPAMENTO DEI CAVI (SULLA CALOTTA) 61/X1A
SCHUTZART NACH IEC 529: IP 6K9K NACH DIN 40050 T9
DEGRE DE PROTECTION SUIVANT IEC 529: STECKER 61/X1A STECKER 62/X1B U
GRADO DI PROTEZIONE SECONDO IEC 529 : 1 VPI 1 -
2 SDDK 2 VM4
3 CANF2-H 3 VM3
VOLTAGE: 4 VPE1 4 -
SPANNUNG: 24V -6V DC 5 VPE2 5 -
TENSION : +8V DC 6 CANF2-L 6 VMGA2
TENSIONE: 7 SDEF 7 ADS1
8 CANF1-H 8 ADS3
9 SD 9 ADS2
HARDWARE: 446 180 101 2 DOC 610
10 SDP 10 EU 62/X1B
SOFTWARE: 446 180 101 2 DOC 690 MIT SOFTWAREVERSION 201 11 ADVP 11 EF2 W
12 CANF1-L 12 ADS4
M = TORQUE 13 CANF1-L+ 13 ADS4+
M = ANZUGSMOMENT 14 CANF1-H+ 14 ADS3+
M = COUPLE DE SERRAGE 15 CANF1-T 15 AU
16 VM1 16 VM1
M = COPPIA DI SERRAGGIO 17 VM2 17 VM2
18 VMHF1 18 ADVP
SUPPLY OF ENERGY: 19 VMHF2 19 ADVP+
ENERGIEZUFLUSS: 1 (ø8mm) 20 VM3 20 VMGA1
APPORT D'ENERGIE:
ALIMENTAZIONE
DI ENERGIA: 61/X1A 62/X1B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
DELIVERY: ECU STEUERELEKTRONIK

ARBEITSLEITUNG:
2 (ø 4mm)
UTILISATION:
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 Y10
MANDATA:
EXHAUST: 1
ENTLUEFTUNG: 2
31> 32 , 33 ø 16mm) )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )(
ECHAPPEMENT:
33
SCARICO:
31
ELECTRICAL CONTROL:
ELEKTRISCHER
STEUERANSCHLUSS: 61, 62
COMMANDE
32
ELECTRIQUE: K1 - K2 1/2-R-3/4 2/4/R-N-1/3 H - L
COMANDO ELETTRICO: SPLIT-GV SELECT-WAEHLEN SHIFT-SCHALTEN RANGE-GP
019 067
1327-74D-021_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 33 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic
Assignment
Pinbelegung Pin Assignment
1337 D0 0071
Pin
1327-74D-022_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 34 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic Transmission Actuator
Removing Transmission Actuator
!DANGER
74.140*
Only work on the transmission actuator
74.130* 74.120*
when the ignition is off. Risk of accident!
74.030
74.090 74.070
1 Switch off ignition
CAUTION
If vehicle-specific parts (e.g. fuel pump, exhaust
pipe, or steering pump) have to be removed,
please contact the vehicle manufacturer.
74.050
2 Disconnect electric plug connection from
74.010
transmission actuator.
12.090
74.050
!DANGER 34.140 12.080
34.130 06.050
Protective glasses must be worn when removing 06.040
the compressed air line from the transmission
06.080
actuator. Compressed air will escape!
Risk of injury from dirt particles.
Loctite
262
* depends on the parts list 015166

3 Remove compressed air line from
transmission actuator’s pressure relief valve.
4 Remove breather 74.120 or angle piece

74.140 and cannon plug 74.130 from
transmission actuator 74.030 if these parts
are being replaced.
5 15 Remove 15 M8 hex bolts 74.090, 74.070

from transmission actuator 74.030.
1327-74D-031_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 35 2008-03

CAUTION
The rubber seals /170 may fall into the
transmission housing.
/170
6 Remove transmission actuator 74.030
from transmission housing and ensure that
the rubber seals /170 are also removed,
otherwise they could fall into the
transmission housing.
b
a
Note of dimensions “a” and “b” for later
installation.
7 Remove the pressure springs 06.050, 34.140

and 12.090 and detent pins 6.040, 34.130
and 12.080. Replace the two cylinder pins
74.050 if they are damaged. 018774
8 Remove seal 74.010 and clean sealing

surfaces on transmission housing and 74.140*
transmission actuator. 74.130* 74.120*
74.030
NOTE
A transmission actuator kit is available. 74.090 74.070
It consists of transmission actuator 74.030,
seal 74.010, and breather 74.120.
9 Remove ball pin 06.080 if damaged.
74.050
74.010
12.090
74.050
34.140 12.080
34.130 06.050
06.040
06.080
Loctite
262
1327-74D-031_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 36 2008-03

Removing the Upper Section from the Lower

Section 6009 274 069
NOTE 09 03 43872
Seal kit 0501 319 863 contains both screws /150-1, 4213 550 110
the flat seal /150-2, and the profile seal /150-3.
024361
CAUTION
1
Note down the data on the type plate. You will /150-1
need them for ordering spare parts and for
correspondence.
/110
1 Remove both screws /150-1.
2 Raise upper section /110 at the pressure

relief valve /180 and use both tabs (1) to
74.030
carefully move it sideways into the grooves* /180
(2). Disconnect plug connections (7, 8).
3 Remove seals /150-3 and /170. /150-2

2
4 Remove seal /150-2 and clean sealing faces.
/150-3
* not possible with the 18-pin variant
/130
Reattaching the Upper Section to the Lower

Section /170
019352
1 Insert seal /150-3.
2 Place seal /150-2 on lower section /130.
3 Re-connect plug connections (7 and 8).

Again check fit of plug connection.
4 Place upper section /110 on lower section 8

/130. Ensure that the seal /150-2 does not
7
slip, fix if necessary. Tighten the two screws
/150-1 to 9.5 Nm.
5 Insert seals /170.
018205
1327_74D_005_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 37 2007-05

Mounting Transmission Actuator
1 If the ball pin is being replaced, coat the

thread of ball pin 06.080 with Loctite no. 262. /170
Tighten ball pin to 23 Nm.
2 Move piston rod (4) on transmission actuator

into central position (Neutral). The correct
position is reached when slight resistance can
b
a
be felt when pulling out the piston rod (4).
3 Transfer dimensions “a” and “b” from the

removed transmission actuator to the piston
rods (3 and 5).
4 Selector gate (6) and piston rod (4) must be

one above the other (flush). Ensure that the 018774
rubber seals /170 have been inserted on the
transmission actuator. /170
5 4 3
Legend
Piston rod (3) = shifts the splitter group (SG)
Piston rod (4) = shifts the basic transmission
Piston rod (5) = shifts the range change group (RC)
Selector gate (6) = selects the shift gate
NOTE
6
With the 12-speed version, do not slide the-
shift rail 06.010 in the middle too far into the
transmission, otherwise the shift finger could
fall into the transmission.
017908
Legend
12.010 Splitter group (GV) shift rail
34.010 06.080 06.010 12.010
06.010 Shift rail for basic transmission
34.010 Range change group (GP) shift rail
06.080 Ball pin
015019
1327_74D_041_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 38 2008-03

Alternative: If dimensions “a” and “b” can no

longer be established, the transmission actuator
can be fitted using setting aid (34) 1X56 138 244.
In-house production following sketch, see special 34
tools. On request, tool 1X56 138 244 can also be
supplied by ZF.
Adjust the transmission actuator’s piston rods (3, 4,
and 5) so that they are in contact with the setting
aid (34). Engage SG and RC shift rails in the trans-
mission in output direction.
Move the central gear shift rail into Neutral.
Selector gate (6) and piston rod (4) must be one
above the other (flush). Ensure that the rubber seals
/170 on the transmission actuator are inserted.
017907
5 Place new seal 74.010 on transmission
housing.
74.140*
6 Insert detent pins 06.040, 34.130 and 12.080
74.130* 74.120*
and compression springs 06.050, 34.140 and
12.090. 74.030
74.090 74.070
NOTE
The compression springs 06.050, 34.140 and
12.090 must be of the same length (approx.
50 mm). If deviations are found, replace
pressure springs.
7 Attach transmission actuator 74.030 ensuring

that piston rods of transmission actuator 74.050
reach into gearshift rails of transmission. 74.010
The vertical ball pin 06.080 reaches into the
selector gate.
12.090
74.050
34.140 12.080
8 Tighten M8 hex bolts 74.090 and 74.070 to 34.130 06.050
06.040
23 Nm.
06.080
9 Depending on parts list:
Tighten cannon plug 74.130 to 18 Nm and
Loctite
secure angle piece 74.140 and/or tighten 262
breather 74.120 to 10 Nm.
* depending on parts list 015166
1327_74D_041_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 39 2008-03

CAUTION
If the transmission actuator is replaced, the
following should be noted.
• To reprogram the transmission actuator,
please refer to chapter
• Take over vehicle parameters from removed
transmission or re-enter.
10 Connect air line to transmission actuator’s

pressure relief valve.
11 Re-connect cable harness at transmission

and vehicle end, otherwise functions
cannot be tested.
NOTE
Connectors must be fitted strain-relieved.
Plug must snap in.
Final check:
Has the transmission actuator been reprogrammed?
Refit vehicle-specific parts as far as possible.

The diagnosis unit can only be used to test the
transmission actuator once the engine is running
and there is a sufficient air reserve. The system
then carries out a number of calibration processes.
This may take up to 5 minutes. The following errors
might be displayed, e.g.: Piston rod not attached
with errors 132, 134, etc. or teaching-in error for
gear, gate, RC, SG sensors with ignition on.
1327_74D_041_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 40 2008-03

Replacing Pressure Relief Valve

(repair kit 0501 320 849) 10
NOTE
Mark the installation position of the pressure relief
valve /180 for fitting later on.
1 Remove 4 nuts (10) and take off pressure

relief valve /180 and O-ring (12).
CAUTION
Do not use grease to fit O-ring (12).
2 Insert new O-ring (12), use 4 nuts (10)

to attach pressure relief valve /180 to
transmission actuator 74.030. 019251
New O-ring (12) available on request at ZFF

dept. LKS or BKS.
/180 12 74.030
019252
1327_74D_110_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 41 2007-09

Programming Transmission Actuator
When replacing the transmission actuator and/or 21

upper section, customer-specific programming
and/or parameter setting (entering EOL data) will
be required.
20
During parameter setting, the EOL data are enter-

22
ed in the transmission actuator’s electronics using
ZF-Testman pro and the corresponding software.
Diagram of transmission actuator programming

Item 20.1 23
20 Table mode adapter
20.1 Power supply connection
21 Cable from table mode adapter to the DPA05 028537
22 DPA05
23 Cable to laptop and/or PC
CAUTION
When reprogramming a transmission actuator,
transfer the vehicle parameters from the removed
transmission actuator or re-enter them.
1327_74D_012_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 42 2007-05

ZF-AS Tronic Clutch Actuator
7 68.300 8
68.010
6
68.330 68.320
68.060
68.210*
68.020*
/030
/020
68.150 /010
68.020*
68.154
* depending on parts list 029 482
Removing Clutch Actuator
!DANGER! 5 Remove 4 M8 hex-head bolts 68.154 and take

• Switch off ignition. off the cover 68.150.
• Protective glasses must be worn when removing the
compressed air line. Compressed air will escape! 6 Remove 4 M8 hex-head bolts /030 with shims
Risk of injury from particles of dirt. and/or 4 M8 hex-head bolts 68.020.
1 Once the ignition has been switched off, the 7 Remove the clutch actuator 68.010.
compressed air line should be removed from
the clutch actuator. 8 Take pushrod 68.210 completely out
of the release fork 68.060.
2 Bleed clutch actuator. Loosen screw (6) for
this purpose.
NOTE
3 Disconnect plug connection (7) from For removal and fitting of release fork, refer to the
transmission actuator and (8) from output chapter “Clutch Release Mechanism”.
speed sensor.
4 Remove cable harness from cable clamps

68.300, 68.320, 68.330 and, if necessary,
remove the fixing devices 68.360, 68.370.
1327_68D_021_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 43 2008-03

22
024537
Clutch Actuator Maintenance

(repair kit 0501 322 365)
! DANGER! Inspect valve screw (2) for dirt, replace if necessary.

• Only work on clutch actuator when the ignition is off. If the clutch actuator is very dirty it has to be
• Protective glasses must be worn when removing replaced or cleaned after consultation with ZF
the compressed air line. Compressed air will Service.
escape!
Risk of injury caused by dirt particles! NOTE
If the transmission system remains too long in
“CC” (teach-in clutch) this indicates that the clutch
The repair kit consists of a screw (6) with sealing actuator is dirty.
ring and a valve screw (2) with O-ring.
Visual Inspection
Tightening torque (MA): Check whether cable routing is correct. Ensure that
Screw plug (6) MA = 22 Nm there are no chafings.
Valve screw (2) MA = 70 Nm
1327_68D_071_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 44 2008-03

Pushrod
Length “A” of the pushrod 68.210 depending on

parts list version:
68.210
OEM ZF no. Length in mm
DAF 1328 302 033 119.1
RVI 1328 368 008 123.1
Hyundai, KIA 1314 268 002 124 A
MAN TGA 1328 368 003 127.1
Meritor 1328 368 004 133.6
Meritor 1328 368 009 144.9

018485
Adjustable pushrod e.g. IVECO
ZF no. 68.210
Pushrod 68.210 complete 1314 268 002
(variably adjustable)
/110 /130 /120
Ball pin /110 1314 368 008
Pushrod /120 1314 368 004
Hex nut /130 0637 002 051
Set pushrod to reference dimension “A”
1 Loosen hex nut /130

019622
2 Screw in ball pin /110 until desired
dimension is attained.
3 Tighten hex nut /130 to 52 Nm.
1327_68D_080_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 45 2008-03

6
68.210
68.020
68.060
B C
019 357
Set Pushrod 2 Calculate dimension “C” :

(e.g. IVECO version)
Dimension “B” + 33 mm = dimension “C”
The old pushrod dimension is adopted when the
clutch actuator only is replaced. Example:
Dimension “B” = 57 mm
If the driver disk or pressure plate is replaced, the
pushrod 68.210 must be reset. 57 mm + 33 mm = 90 mm (dimension “C”)
CAUTION
In vehicles with an AS Tronic transmission, the 3 Set dimension “C”:
release travel is set and not the wear dimension (as
is usually the case). If not set correctly, the pressure Insert pushrod 68.210 into clutch actuator
plate is damaged. 68.020. Loosen screw (6) from clutch actuator
68.020 until cylinder moves out.
1 Dimension “B” Measure measurement “C” between ball head
of pushrod and thrust surface of clutch
Press release fork 68.060 forward and actuator.
measure dimension “B”. Set pushrod accordingly until dimension “C”
is reached.
1327_68D_090_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 46 2008-03

Bleeding and Assembling Clutch Actuator
1 Loosen screw (6) M12x1.5.

If sealing ring is worn at screw, replace
sealing ring.
018475
2 Push piston back.
018476
3 Hold piston pushed down and tighten screw

(6).
CAUTION
If the screw (6) is tightened, the piston must not
come out of the cylinder; it must stay in position
6
for at least two hours, otherwise the clutch
actuator has to be replaced due to leakage.
018477
1327_68D_032_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 47 2008-03

4 Place pushrod 68.210 in socket of release

fork 68.060.
5 Secure clutch actuator 68.010 with 4 M8

hex nuts (/030) and 4 washers (/020) and/or
4 M8 hex screws 68.020. In so doing, ensure
68.010
that the connections are positioned correctly
and that the pushrod 68.210 is seated 68.210* 6
correctly in the release fork and clutch
actuator. 68.020*
/030
Tightening torque: /020
Hexagon nut (/030) M8 = 23 Nm /010
Stud bolt (/010) M8 = 10 Nm
68.020*
Hex-head bolts 68.020 M8 = 23 Nm
6 Loosen bolt (6) and wait until piston has

extended. In so doing, ensure that pushrod
68.210 is seated correctly in release fork
68.060 and clutch actuator.
Tighten bolt (6) again to 22 Nm.
7 Secure cover 68.150 with 4 M8 hex-head

bolts 68.154.
Tightening torque M8 = 23 Nm 6
68.060
CAUTION 68.150
Do not bend cable or put under tensile load.
Avoid chafing points.
Fit connectors strain-relieved and check detent.
68.154
018482
8 Replace cable clamps 68.300, 68.320, and
68.330 if damaged.
7 68.300 8
9 Press cable harness into cable clamps.
10 Connect 18 or 20-pin connector (7) to

transmission actuator and then attach
connector (8) to output speed sensor.
11 Connect compressed air line to clutch

actuator.
68.060 68.330 68.320
018483
1327_68D_032_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 48 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic Clutch*
Replace Clutch*
If the clutch disk is replaced, the following must be

considered:
• Grease the spline of the input shaft with

OLISTA LONGTIME 3EP (ZF no. 0671 190 050).
• Slide clutch disk onto input shaft, remove it

again and, if necessary, wipe off excess grease.
NOTE
Avoid soiling of clutch disk with grease, oil, etc.
014794
Fitting Engine, Clutch, and Transmission CAUTION

(also refer to Instructions for transmission/clutch Do not damage pressure plate!
removal and installation, 1327 754 104 and/or
1327 754 106). 6 Insert pushrod.
NOTE 7 Close opening on transmission bell housing

The release bearing is fitted when the transmission (refer to Chapter “Bleeding and assembling
is delivered. The transmission is in Neutral or in clutch actuator”).
the highest gear available.
CAUTION
1 Fit clutch disk and pressure plate (use a • The clutch disk, pressure plate, and friction
mandrel to center the pressure plate). lining are part of the customer specification
(basic document for drawing up parts list).
2 Slide profile of input shaft into profile of • The software of the shift program is adapted to
clutch disk. the characteristics of the clutch components.
• Changing the components contrary to the
3 Screw transmission and engine together. customer specification results in poor clutch
characteristics and/or damage to the
4 Blede clutch actuator (refer to Chapter components.
“Bleeding and assembling clutch actuator”).
5 Press release bearing forwards (engine end)

so that the clutch snaps into snap ring of the
release bearing.
NOTE
This is done by using a short lever to push
the lower end of the release fork to the back
(transmission end) through the opening in
the transmission bell housing. * ZF scope of supply depends on spare parts version
1327_68D_061_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 49 2008-03

ZF-AS Tronic Clutch Release Mechanism
Clutch Release Mechanism
68.060
/140 68.050
/130 /110
68.210
/130
68.110
68.130
/120
68.050 /140
68.130 68.110
68.060
Clutch Release Mechanism: Version A
028365
Removing Release Fork Version A: Release fork with cams
1 Remove 2 M12 hex-head bolts 68.130 from 4 Dismantling the release fork 68.060:
release shaft 68.110. Remove the two shaft sealing rings /140 and
bearing bushes /130 with suitable tools.
2 Take release bearing 68.050 and release fork Replace the ball cup /120 if damaged or worn.
68.060 off the input shaft.
3 Slide the release shaft 68.110 out of the

release fork 68.060. If necessary, take out the
pushrod 68.210 from the release fork.
1327_68D_010_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 50 2007-05

Version B: Release fork with cam rollers

68.060
CAUTION
Do not wash the following parts:
68.110
- Release fork 68.060
/150
- Release bearing 68.050 /160
68.130
4 Disassemble the release fork 68.060:
Remove the bearing bush /130 with suitable /130 /110
tools.
68.210
Drive out cam rollers /150 and /160 from the
release fork 68.060 (e. g. with a punch).
Replace ball cups /120 if damaged or worn. /120
68.050
028231
1327_68D_010_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 51 2007-05

Mounting Release Fork
/110
/140 /130
68.050 68.060
68.110
/140
/130 /110
68.130
68.130 68.210
/120
/130
68.060 68.050
68.110
/140
Clutch Release Mechanism: Version A
028366
CAUTION 4 Guide release shaft 68.110 into release fork

The release fork 68.060 and the release bearing 68.060, do not damage shaft sealing rings in
68.050 of the versions A and B cannot be combined. the process.
The release shaft 68.110 however is identical for
both versions. 5 Position release bearing 68.050 on release
flange (guide tube).
Version A: Clutch release mechanism with cams
NOTE
1 Assembling the release fork 68.060. Do not grease the bearing fit
An adapter 1X56 138 215 is needed as support “release bearing – release flange”.
for the release fork /110. Another adapter
1X56 138 215 is used to press in the two 6 Apply OLISTA LONGTIME 3EP (ZF no.
bushes /130 and shaft sealing rings /140 (pay 0671 190 050) grease to contact face to the
attention to the installation position) one after release bearing 68.050 at the release fork
the other. 68.060. Engage release fork 68.060 with
release bearing 68.050.
2 Fill the shaft sealing rings /140 with grease
between the sealing lips. 7 Fasten the release shaft 68.110 with 2 M12
Grease bearing bushes /130 with OLISTA hex-head bolts 68.130 to the connection plate.
LONGTIME 3EP (ZF no. 0671 190 050). Tightening torque: 115 Nm
3 Press in ball cup /120 and grease with OLISTA

LONGTIME 3EP (ZF no. 0671 190 050).
1327_68D_100_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 52 2007-05

1X56 138 546
1X56 138 547
/110 /130
Clutch Release Mechanism: Version B
028244
Version B: Release fork with cam rollers NOTE

Press in the bearing bush – rim facing the
CAUTION press-in mandrel.
Always press in the bearing bush /130 first, then
the cam rollers /150 and /160. Use the press-in mandrel 1X56 138 546 for
pressing in the bearing bush /130 until firmly
home in the release fork /110 so that the
1 Assemble the release fork 68.060 using bush’s rim fully engages in the groove of the
assembly fixture 1X56 138 547 as a support. release fork.
2 Use the press-in mandrel 1X56 138 546 in

order to press in the cam rollers /150 and /160
until firmly home in the release fork /110.
1327_68D_100_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 53 2007-05

CAUTION
Do not grease the following parts: 68.050
- Cam rollers
- Bearing fit “Release bearing – release flange”
- Release shaft
- Bearing bush (greased ex works)
68.110
68.060
028239
3 If necessary, press in ball cup /120 and grease

with OLISTA LONGTIME 3EP
68.060
(ZF no. 0671 190 050).
68.110
4 Slide release shaft 68.110 into release fork
/150
68.060. /160
68.130
NOTE
The release shaft in the bearing bush has /130 /110
clearance.
68.210
5 Grease the front end of the cams of the release

bearing with OLISTA LONGTIME 3EP /120
(ZF no. 0671 190 050).
68.050
6 Position release bearing 68.050 on release 028233

flange (guide tube).
7 Engage release fork 68.060 with release

bearing 68.050. Ensure correct fit of pushrod
68.210.
8 Attach release shaft 68.110 to the clutch

housing with 2 M12 hex-head bolts 68.130.
1327_68D_100_en
1327 751 101 - 2008-04 54

Langue

AC 55-3 AC60-3 Training Manual V 1.1

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description :

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Description :

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

AC 55-3 AC60-3 Training Manual V 1.1

Titre original :

Transféré par

Description :

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Demag AC55-3 & AC60-3

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

All Terrain Crane

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

Page · Seite · Page · Pagina · Página · Página · Страница:

Dimensions · Abmessungen · Encombrement · Dimensioni · Dimensiones · Dimensões · Pазмеры. . ............................. 4

Technical description · Technische Beschreibung · Descriptif technique · Descrizione tecnica ·

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

Counterweight · Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Working speeds · Arbeitsgeschwindigkeiten ·

Boom elevation · Ausleger-Winkelstellung ·

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

When using H2, counterweight „c“

Configurations · Konfigurationen · Configurations · Configurazioni ·

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

3 23,9 50-3-18 3 550 kg 1,80 m

120 m/min 60,2 kN 18 mm 200 m

120 m/min 60,2 kN 18 mm 200 m

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

6,0 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO

4,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

3,0 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO

1,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

6,0 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO

4,1 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

3,0 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO

1,1 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO

6,0 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

4,1 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO

3,0 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO

1,1 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

6,0 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO

4,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

3,0 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO

1,1 t 6,90 m x 6,50 m 360° ISO

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

6,0 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO

4,1 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

3,0 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO

1,1 t 6,90 m x 4,50 m 360° ISO

6,0 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

4,1 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO

3,0 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO

1,1 t 6,90 m x 3,00 m 360° ISO

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

Runner · Montage­spitze · Potence · Runner · Runner ·

Copyright 2018 TEREX ®

Counterweight · Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Working speeds · Arbeitsgeschwindigkeiten ·

Boom elevation · Ausleger-Winkelstellung ·

Runner · Montagespitze · Potence · Runner · Runner ·

Counterweight · Gegengewicht · Contrepoids · Working speeds · Arbeitsgeschwindigkeiten ·